As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on December 20, 201719, 2018
Registration No. 333-

 
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549
 
FORM S-1
 
Registration Statement Under the Securities Act of 1933
__________________________________________
 
MEMBERS Life Insurance Company
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

IOWA 6311 39-1236386
(State or other jurisdiction of (Primary Standard Industrial (I.R.S. Employer
incorporation or organization) Classification Code Number) Identification No.)

2000 Heritage Way
Waverly, Iowa 50677
(319) 352-4090
(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code,
of registrant’s principal executive offices)
 
Ross Hansen, Esq.
MEMBERS Life Insurance Company
2000 Heritage Way
Waverly, Iowa 50677
(319) 352-4090
(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of agent for service)
_______________________
___________________
 
COPY TO:
 
Stephen E. Roth, Esq.
Thomas E. Bisset, Esq.
Eversheds Sutherland (US) LLP
700 Sixth Street, NW, Suite 700
Washington, DC 20001
(202) 383-0100

Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public: As soon as practicable after this registration statement becomes effective.

If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box. [X][ X]

If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering. o

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.o

If this Form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.o

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company, , or an emerging growth company. See definitions of “large accelerated filer,” accelerated filer,” “smaller reporting company,” and emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

 Large accelerated filero Accelerated filero
    
 Non-accelerated filer x Smaller reporting companyo
    
   Emerging Growth Companyo

If an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 7(a)(2)(B) of the Securities Act.o


Calculation of Registration Fee
Title of each
class of securities
to be registered
Amount to be
registered
Proposed
maximum offering
price
per unit
Proposed
maximum
aggregate offering
price
Amount of
registration fee
Single Premium
Deferred Annuity
Contract
**$2 billion$249,000.00
Title of each
class of securities
to be registered
Amount to be
registered
Proposed
maximum offering
price
per unit
Proposed
maximum
aggregate offering price
Amount of
registration fee
Single Premium
Deferred Annuity
Contract
**$750,000,000$90,900

*       The maximum aggregate offering price is estimated solely for the purposes of determining the registration fee. The amount to be registered and the proposed maximum offering price per unit are not applicable since these securities are not issued in predetermined amounts or units.

Pursuant to Rule 415(a)(6) under the Securities Act, the securities registered pursuant to this Registration Statement include unsold securities previously registered for sale pursuant to Registrant’s Registration Statement on Form S-1 (File No. 333-210491), which was filed initially on March 30, 2016 as updated by a post-effective amendment on March 31, 2017 which was declared effective on April 28, 2017 (“Registration Statement No. 1”). Registration Statement No. 1 registered securities of the Registrant with a maximum aggregate offering price of $1,000,000,000 of which approximately $___________ of such securities registered on Registration Statement No. 1 remain unsold. The unsold securities from Registration Statement No. 1 (and associated filing fees paid) are being carried forward to this Registration Statement. Pursuant to Rule 415 (a)(6), the offering of unsold securities under the prior Registration Statements will be deemed terminated as of the date of effectiveness of this Registration Statement.

The registrant hereby amends this registration statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this registration statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933 or until the registration statement shall become effective on such date as the Securities and Exchange Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.


MEMBERS® Zone AnnuityGLWB Supplement Dated May 1, 2019
to the
Prospectus Dated May 1, 2019

This GLWB Supplement should be read and retained with the prospectus for the CUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terms reflected in this GLWB Supplement shall remain in effect and will not be superseded until an updated GLWB Supplement is filed with the SEC. We will publish any changes to this GLWB Supplement for any future periods at least seven calendar days before they take effect on EDGAR at www.sec.gov under file number 333-XXXXXX. Please work with your financial professional or contact us at 800-798-5500 to confirm the most current supplement prior to your Contract Issue Date.

Age of Covered Person as of
the Contract Issue Date
Base Withdrawal PercentageAnnual Increase Percentage
Single LifeJoint LifeSingle LifeJoint Life
552.00%1.50%0.40%0.40%
55 - 593.00%2.50%0.40%0.40%
60 - 644.00%3.50%0.40%0.40%
65 - 745.00%4.50%0.40%0.40%
75 - 796.00%5.50%0.40%0.40%
80+7.00%6.50%0.40%0.40%

On the Contract Issue Date both the Base Withdrawal Percentage and Annual Increase Percentage are determined based on the election of single life or joint life option rates using the age of the younger Covered Person(s).

We cannot change the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terms for your Contract once they are established. If the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terms you receive are unacceptable, you can cancel your Contract during the right to examine period.
The Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit cannot provide a GLWB Payment until the Contract Anniversary following the 50th birthday of the younger Covered Person or the first Contract Anniversary, whichever is later.
If you begin GLWB Payments before age 59½, the payments may be subject to an additional 10% federal tax penalty.

The information in this Prospectus is not complete and may be changed. We may not sell these securities until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This Prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and it is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state or other jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted.

CUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity

Issued by:
MEMBERS Life Insurance Company
2000 Heritage Way
Waverly, Iowa 50677

Telephone number: 800-798-5500
Offered Through: CUNA Brokerage Services, Inc.

SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED [•], 2018

This Prospectus describes the MEMBERS®CUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity, an individual or joint owned, single premium deferred modified guaranteed index annuity contract (the “Contract”), issued by MEMBERS Life Insurance Company (the “Company”, “we”, “us”, or “our”). Capitalized terms used in this Prospectus and not otherwise defined have the meanings set forth in the “Glossary,” starting on page __.

The Contract, which you may purchase with an initial Purchase Payment of at least $10,000, is designed primarily for individuals, corporations, financial institutions, trusts, and certain retirement plans that qualify for the special federal income tax treatment as well as those that do not qualify for such treatment.associated with annuity contracts. The Contract offers youprovides for the ability to allocateaccumulation of retirement savings by allocating your monies among two interest creditingvarious Allocation Options including Risk Control Accounts and a Declared Rate Account. The Contract also offers standard annuity features including multiple fixed annuitization options accumulate interest earnings under the Contract and receive income payments.(“Payout Options”). The Contract is a complex insurance and investment vehicle. You should speak with a financial professional about the Contract’s features, benefits, risks and fees, and whether it is appropriate for you based upon your financial situation and objectives. The Prospectus describes all material rights and obligations of Owners, including all state variations.

A non-optional Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit feature is part of the Contract. The Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit provides guaranteed lifetime payments (“GLWB Payments”) based on a single or joint percentage (“GLWB Percentage”) of your GLWB Benefit Base described in the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Section. Once GLWB Payments begin, the full GLWB payment must be taken each Contract Year. We assess a fee for the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit which is described in the “Fees and Expenses” on page __ and “Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit” on page__ of this Prospectus.

Each Contract Anniversary prior to the Allocation Option Maturity Date starts a new year for purposes of calculating index interest for each Risk Control Account. We currently offer three reference indices; the S&P 500 Price Return Index (“S&P 500”), the Russell 2000 Price Return Index (“Russell 2000”), and the MSCI EAFE Price Return Index (“MSCI EAFE”). Each Risk Control Account has two investment options, a Secure Account Option and a Growth Account Option. When funds are withdrawn from a Risk Control Account prior to the Contract Anniversary for a surrender, partial withdrawal, transfer, annuitization or payment of the Death Benefit, index interest is calculated up to the date of withdrawal. It is possible that you will not earn any interest in the Risk Control Accounts.

The Secure Account option has an Index Rate Floor of 0%. The Index Rate Floor protects amounts allocated to the Secure Account from declines in the external Indices. This means that negative investment performance of the applicable Index would not reduce your Risk Control Account Value. The Secure Account provides your Risk Control Account Value the most protection from negative


investment performance of the reference Index. The Growth Account option has an Index Rate Floor of -10%. This means that negative investment performance of the reference Index could result in a negative Index Rate of Return that would reduce your Risk Control Account Value. However, Risk Control Account Value will not decline by more than 10% as a result of Index performance for any one-year period even if Index performance is less than -10%. In return for accepting some risk of loss to your Risk Control Account Value allocated to the Growth Account, the Index Rate Cap for the Growth Account is higher than the Index Rate Cap for the Secure Account. This allows for the potential for greater increases to your Risk Control Account Value allocated to the Growth Account. The Index Rate Caps place a limit on the positive performance of an Index and therefore limit the amount of Index Interest that can be credited to an Owner’s investment in a Risk Control Account. The Index Rate Cap will never be less than 1.0%. There is a risk of loss of your principal and any previously credited interest because each year you agree to absorb all losses less than or equal to the stock marketapplicable Index Rate Floor. In addition, if the performance of the reference Index equaled or in any securities index.

You may purchaseapproached the Index Rate Floor, the deduction of the Contract Fee, the GLWB Rider Fee, Surrender Charges, a Market Value Adjustment and Federal Income Tax Penalties could result in a reduction of Contract Value greater than if only the Index Rate Floor applied.

Declared Rate Account is supported by the assets of the Declared Rate Separate Account of the Company. We credit Contract Value allocated to the Declared Rate Account with an Interest Rate that we will not change for the duration of the Allocation Option Period (six years). The Interest Rate is available two weeks in advance of the Allocation Option Start Date. The Interest Rate will never be below the Minimum Interest Rate. We do not asses a single Purchase PaymentContract Fee against the Contract Value held in the Declared Rate Account. There is a risk of loss of your principal if the deduction of the GLWB Rider Fee, Surrender Charges, a Market Value Adjustment and Federal Income Tax Penalties result in a reduction of Contract Value greater than the interest credited. The Declared Rate Account may not be available in all states as described in Appendix B to this Prospectus.

Each Allocation Option Period is six years. Not all Allocation Options or Allocation Option Periods may be available in all markets where we offer the Contract.

If you surrender your Contract or take a partial withdrawal during the Accumulation Period, we will apply a Market Value Adjustment to the amount being surrendered or withdrawn that is at least $5,000.in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount unless you qualify for the Nursing Home or Hospital waiver or Terminal Illness waiver. If the surrender or withdrawal is taken during the Surrender Charge Period, we will also apply a Surrender Charge to the amount being surrendered or withdrawn that is in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount unless you qualify for the Nursing Home or Hospital waiver or Terminal Illness waiver described in this Prospectus. The maximum Surrender Charge is 9% of the Contract Value withdrawn. The terms under which the Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment will be waived may vary in some states and are described in Appendix B to this Prospectus. Please review Appendix B for any variations from standard Contract provisions that may apply to your Contract based on the state in which your Contract was issued. A surrender or partial withdrawal on the Allocation Option Maturity Date will not be subject to a Surrender Charge or Market Value Adjustment. See “Fees and Expenses” on page __, “Market Value Adjustment” on page __ and “Access to Your Money” on page __. The Market Value Adjustment may be either positive or negative, which means the Market Value Adjustment may increase or decrease the amount you receive upon surrender or partial withdrawal.

The Contract is supported by the assets of the Risk Control Separate Account and the Declared Rate Separate Account, which are non-registered, insulated Separate Accounts of the Company which support the Company’s obligations with respect to the Contract. You may allocate your Purchase Payment among two options –or Contract Value to one or more Investment Options which include the Secure AccountRisk Control Accounts and the Growth Account (the “Risk Control Accounts”). For each Risk Control Account, we credit interest based in part on the performanceDeclared Rate Account. The assets of the S&P 500 Price Index (the “Index”) over a one-year period. We hold reserves for Index Interest Rate Floor and Cap guarantees for amounts allocated to each Risk Control Account in a separate account (the “Separate Account”).Separate Accounts are not chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business that we conduct. Our General Account assets are also available to meet the guarantees under the Contract as well as our other general obligations. The guarantees in this Contract are subject to the Company’s financial strength and claims-paying ability.

We may offer additional Risk Control Accounts in the future. Not all Risk Control Accounts may be available in all markets where we offer the Contract.

If you surrender your Contract or take a partial withdrawal during the Initial Index Period, we will apply a Surrender Charge and a Market Value Adjustment (“MVA”) to the amount being surrendered or withdrawn that is in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount unless you qualify for the Nursing Home or Hospital waiver or terminal illness waiver, described in the Prospectus. See “fees and charges” on page __, “market value adjustment” on page __ and “access to your money” on page __. The MVA may be either positive or negative, which means the MVA may increase or decrease the amount you receive upon surrender or partial withdrawal.

There are risks associated with the Contract. These risks include liquidity risks, investment risks, market risks, companyCompany risks, and interest rate risks. Also, a Market Value Adjustment and Surrender Charges and an MVA(in each case, as applicable), may apply for a number of years, so that the Contract should only be purchased for the long-term. Under some circumstances, you may receive less than your Purchase Payment and lose previously credited interest under the Contract. In addition, partial withdrawals and surrenders will be subject to income tax and may be subject to a 10% Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) penalty tax if taken before age 59½. Accordingly, you should carefully consider your income and liquidity needs before purchasing a Contract. It is also possible that you will not earn any interest in the Risk Control Accounts.Additional information about these risks appears under “highlights”“Highlights” on page __, “access_, “Access to your money”Your Money” on page __, and “federal income tax matters”“Federal Income Tax Matters” on page __.

Please note that you could lose significantly more than 10% of your investment in a Risk Control Account under the Contract. For example, if you invested $10,000 in thewith a 0.75% Contract Fee and a 0.50% GLWB Rider Fee and allocated your investment to the Growth Account and the Index then declined by 10% or more in each of three consecutive years, your investment in the Contract at the end of the third year would be equal to $7,290.$6,975. If you surrendered the Contract at the end of that third year, you would pay a Surrender Charge equal to 8%7% of your investmentthe Contract Value or $525$433 which would leave you with $6,765.$6,542. That amount would be reduced further if a negative MVAMarket Value Adjustment applied or increased if a positive Market Value Adjustment applied. In addition, if you were age 59½ or younger at the time of the surrender, a ten percent10% tax penalty of $677$654 would apply and would reduce the amount you would havereceive from the Contract to $6,088.$5,888. This example, however, does not take into account your ability to allocate some or all of your initial investmentPurchase Payment to the Secure Account which has a floor that protects amounts allocated to that Account


account from declines in the Index. The example also does not take into account your ability to transfer some or all of your investment to the Secure Account after the first and second year.

The Contract is offered through CUNA Brokerage Services, Inc. (“CBSI”), which is the principal underwriter. The principal business address of CBSI is 2000 Heritage Way, Waverly, IA 50677. The principal underwriter is not required to sell any specific number or dollar amount of Contracts but will use its best efforts to sell the Contracts. There are no arrangements to place funds in an escrow, trust, or similar account. The offering of the Contract is intended to be continuous.

A registration statement relating to this offering have been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”). You may request one by writing to our Administrative Office at 2000 Heritage Way, Waverly, Iowa 50677, or by calling 1-800-798-5500. This is a continuous offering.Prospectus can also be obtained from the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov.

This Prospectus provides important information you should know before investing.investing, including risks related to the Company’s business. Please see “Potential Risk Factors That May Affect Our Business and Our Future Results” on page __ for more information regarding these risks. Please keep thethis Prospectus for future reference.

Neither the Securities and Exchange CommissionSEC nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or passed upon the adequacy ofdetermined if this Prospectus.Prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

An investment in this Contract is The Contracts are not a bank deposit and is not insured or guaranteed by any bank or by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or any other government agency.
They are not deposits or other obligations of any bank and are not bank guaranteed. They are subject to investment risks and possible loss of principal and previously credited interest.

The date of this Prospectus is May 1, 2018_______, 2019


TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
GLOSSARY1
 
HIGHLIGHTS46
 

How Your Contract Works

46

Contract Charges

6

Change of Annuitant Endorsement Charge

7

Benefits of Your Contract

710

Risk Factors

10

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit

812
FEES AND EXPENSES13

Other Important Information You Should Know

914
 
GETTING STARTED – THE ACCUMULATION PERIOD1014
 

Purchasing a Contract

1014

Tax-Free “Section 1035” Exchanges

1015

Owner

1115

Divorce

16

Annuitant

1116

Beneficiary

1117

Right to Examine

1117
 
ALLOCATING YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENT1118
 

Purchase Payment

18
AUTOMATIC REBALANCE PROGRAM

Purchase Payment and Allocation

1218
 
CONTRACT VALUE1219
 

Allocation Option Maturity Date

19
 
DECLARED RATE ACCOUNT OPTION20
 
RISK CONTROL ACCOUNTSACCOUNT OPTION1320
 

Risk Control Account Value

21
 
MARKET VALUE ADJUSTMENT1827
 

Purpose of the Market Value Adjustment

28

Market Value Adjustment Formula

29
 
SURRENDER VALUE2130
FEES AND CHARGES21

Surrender Charge

21

Change of Annuitant Endorsement Charge

22

Other Information

22
 
ACCESS TO YOUR MONEY2330
 

Partial Withdrawals

23

Free annual withdrawal amount

23

Waiver of Surrender Charges

23

       Nursing Home or Hospital Waiver

23

       Terminal Illness Waiver

2430

Surrenders

2431

Partial Withdrawal and Surrender Restrictions

2431

Right to Defer Payments

24

Bailout Provision

2531
 
GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT32
 
DEATH BENEFIT2537
 

Death of the Owner during the Accumulation Period

25

Death of Annuitant While the Owner is Living

26

Death Benefit Payment Options

2637

Death of Owner or Annuitant After the Payout Date

41

Interest on Death Benefit Proceeds

2641

Abandoned Property Requirements

2741
 
INCOME PAYMENTS – THE PAYOUT PERIOD2741
 

Payout Date

2741

Payout Period

i42

i


Terms of Income Payments

2742
 
INCOME PAYMENTPAYOUT OPTIONS2842
 

Election of an Income Payment Option

28

Payout Options

2843
 
FEDERAL INCOME TAX MATTERS2944
 

Tax Status of the Contracts

2944

Taxation of Non-Qualified Contracts

2944

Taxation of Qualified Contracts

3146

Federal Estate Taxes, Gift and Generation-Skipping Transfer Taxes

3247

Medicare Tax

3247

Same-Sex Spouses

3247

Annuity Purchases Byby Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations

3247

Possible Tax Law Changes

3347

Important Information about the Indices

48
 
OTHER INFORMATION3349
 

DistributionBusiness Disruption and Cyber-Security Risks

33

Cyber Security

3451

Authority to Change

3451

Incontestability

3451

Misstatement of Age or Gender

3451

Conformity with Applicable Laws

3451

Reports to Owners

3551

Change of Address

3552

Inquiries

3552
 
CORPORATE HISTORY OF THE COMPANY3552
 

Financial Information

3653

Investments

3653

Reinsurance

36

Policy Liability and Accruals

36
 
POTENTIAL RISK FACTORS THAT MAY AFFECT OUR BUSINESS AND OUR FUTURE
RESULTS3753
 
SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA4159
 
MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF
OPERATIONS4259
 

Cautionary Statement Regarding Forward-Looking Information

4260

Overview

4260

Critical Accounting Policies

62

Executive Summary

4268

Financial Condition

4369

Liquidity and Capital Resources

70

Statutory Financial Data and Dividend Restrictions

72

Contractual Obligations

73

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk and Cyber Security

73
 
MANAGEMENT4374
 

Directors and Executive Officers

4374

Transactions with Related Persons, Promoters and Certain Control Persons

75

Committees of the Board of Directors

77

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

77

Director Compensation

77

Legal Proceedings

77

ii


FINANCIAL STATEMENTS5278
 
APPENDIX A: EXAMPLES OF THE PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS AND FULL SURRENDER AND THEWITH 

APPLICATION OF SURRENDER CHARGE AND MARKET VALUE ADJUSTMENT

A-1
 
A-1APPENDIX B: STATE VARIATIONS OF CERTAIN FEATURES AND BENEFITSB-1

The Contract may not be available in all states. This Prospectus does not constitute an offer to sell any Contract and it is not soliciting an offer to buy any Contract in any state in which the offer or sale is not permitted. We do not authorize anyone to provide any information or representations regarding the offering described in this Prospectus other than the information and representations contained in this Prospectus.

iiiii


 
glossaryGLOSSARY
 

We have tried to make this Prospectus as understandable as possible. However, in explaining how the Contract works, we have had to use certain terms that have special meanings. We define these terms below.

Accumulation Credit – A unit of measure used to calculate Risk Control Account Value.

Accumulation Credit Factor – A dollar value for each Accumulation Credit in a Risk Control Account.

Accumulation Period – The Accumulation Period isphase of the period of time that: (a)Contract that begins on the Contract Issue Date as statedand ends on your contract data page; and (b) continues until the Payout Date, unlessor the date the Contract is terminated.terminated if earlier.

Adjusted Index Value – The InitialClosing Index Value adjusted for the Index Interest Rate Cap or Index Interest Rate Floor for the current Contract Year.

Administrative Office – MEMBERS Life Insurance Company, 2000 Heritage Way, Waverly, Iowa 50677. Phone: 1-800-798-5500.

Age – Age as of last birthday.

Allocation Level – Specific levels identified in your Contract for the sole purpose of administering allocation instructions according to the requirements of the Contract.

Allocation Option Maturity Date – The last day of an Allocation Option Period. If an Allocation Option Maturity Date does not fall on a Business Day, any transactions required as of that date will be processed on the next Business Day.

Allocation Option Period – The period that begins on an Allocation Option Start Date and ends on an Allocation Option Maturity Date. Each Allocation Option Period is six years.

Allocation Option Start Date – The first day of an Allocation Option Period.

Allocation Options – All Risk Control Account and Declared Rate Account options available under the Contract for allocating your Contract Value.

Annual Free Withdrawal Amount – The amount that can be withdrawn without incurring a Surrender Charge or Market Value Adjustment each Contract Year. It is equal to 10% of the Contract Value determined at the beginning of the Contract Year.

Annual Increase Percentage – The percentage that is added to the GLWB Percentage for each completed Contract Year from the Contract Issue Date until the GLWB Payment Start Date, subject to the Maximum Annual Increase Period.

Annuitant (joint annuitant)(Joint Annuitant) – The natural person(s) whose life (or lives) determines the amount of annuity payments under the Contract.

Automatic Rebalance ProgramAuthorized Request – A programsigned and dated request that is in Good Order. A request to automatically transfer values betweenchange your allocation instructions must be signed by all Owners. A request to change a party to the Contract, change the Payout Date or request a partial withdrawal or full surrender of the Contract must be signed by all Owners. An Authorized Request may also include a phone, fax or electronic request for specific transactions.

Base Withdrawal Percentage – The GLWB Percentage on the Contract Issue Date.

Bailout Rate – A specific rate that applies to the Bailout Provision. If the Index Rate Cap for a Risk Control Account is set below the Bailout Rate, you may withdraw the Risk Control Accounts to achieve the balance of ContractAccount Value equal to the allocation percentages you requested. The Automatic Rebalance Program is only in effectfrom that Risk Control Account during the Initial Index Period.30-day period following the Contract Anniversary without a Surrender Charge and without any MVA.

Bailout Provision – If the Index Interest Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account is set below the bailout rateBailout Rate prominently displayed on your contract data pageContract Data Page attached to the front of the cover page of the Contract, the Bailout Provision allows you to make a withdrawal of some or all ofwithdraw the Contract Value attributable to that Risk Control Account without a Surrender Charge and without any MVAValue from that Risk Control

1


Account during the Initial Index Period.30-day period following the Contract Anniversary. A Market Value Adjustment and Surrender Charges will not apply to such withdrawal.

Beneficiary – The person(s) (or entity) you named to receive proceeds payable due to the death of the Owner. Before the Payout Date, if no Beneficiary survives the Owner, we will pay the Death Benefit proceeds to the Owner’s estate.

Business Day – Any day both the Company andthat the New York Stock Exchange areis open for business. The Companytrading. All requests for transactions that are received at our Administrative Office in Good Order on any Business Day prior to market close, generally 4:00 P.M. Eastern Time, will be closed onprocessed as of the following holidays: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King, Jr. Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmasend of that Business Day. We are closed on the day itself if those days fall Monday through Friday, the day immediately preceding if those days fall on

Closing Index Value – The closing value for an Index as of a Saturday, and the day immediately following if those days fall on a Sunday.Business Day.

Company – MEMBERS Life Insurance Company; also referred to as “we”, “our” and “us”.

Contingent OwnerContinuation Date – – A contingent owner assumes control ofThe date we receive notification that the surviving Spouse has elected to continue the Contract and becomesas the new Owner if the original Owner(s) dies before the Annuitant.in Good Order.

Contract – The MEMBERSCUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity, an individual or joint owned, single premium deferred modified guaranteed index annuity contract issued by MEMBERS Life Insurance Company.

Contract Anniversary – The same day and month as the Contract Issue Date for each year the Contract remains in force. If a Contract Anniversary does not fall on a Business Day, any transactions required as of that date will be processed on the next Business Day.

Contract Fee – A fee assessed against Contract Value in the Risk Control Account(s). This fee equals a percentage of the Accumulation Credit Factor for the Risk Control Account at the start of a Contract Year. This fee compensates us for the expenses, mortality risk and expense risk assumed by us.

Contract Issue Date – The date from whichwe use to determine Contract Years and Contract Anniversaries are determined. The Contract Issue Date is shown on your contract data page.Anniversaries.

Contract Value – The currenttotal value of your annuity as provided under this Contract during the Accumulation Period. Contract Value will be impacted byAll values are calculated as of the Credited Index Interest, which may be positive or negative.

end of a Business Day.

Contract Year – Any twelve-month12-month period beginning on the Contract Issue Date or Contract Anniversary and ending one day before the next Contract Anniversary.

Credited Index InterestCovered Person(s) – The natural person(s) whose Age and lifetime we base GLWB Payments on under this Rider.

Data PageThe amount of Index Interest credited on eachPages attached to your Contract Anniversary and at time of partial withdrawal, surrender, death and annuitization. Credited Index Interest may be positive or negative and will impact Contract Value.

Credited Index Interest Rate – The rate usedthat describe certain terms applicable to determine the index interest to be applied to Contract Value.your specific Contract.

Death Benefit – The greater of Contract Value or the Purchase Payment adjusted for Credited Index Interestwithdrawals as of the date death benefitsDeath Benefits are payable. We do not apply the Surrender Charge or MVAMarket Value Adjustment in determining the death benefitDeath Benefit payable.

1


Due Proof of DeathDeclared Rate AccountProofAn account under the Contract that is part of death satisfactory to us. Such proof may consistour Declared Rate Separate Account. We credit Contract Value held in the Declared Rate Account with a single fixed annual rate of interest. We guarantee that the credited rate of interest for the duration of the following if acceptableAllocation Option Period (six years).

Declared Rate Separate Account – The MEMBERS Life Declared Rate Separate Account (“Declared Rate Separate Account”). An insulated separate account that we established within our General Account and under the laws of Iowa in which we hold reserves for our guarantees under the Declared Rate Account. Our other General Account assets are also available to us: a) a certified copymeet those and other guarantees under the Contract and our other general obligations. The Declared Rate Separate Account is not registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940.

Earnings – Your Contract Value minus Purchase Payment not previously withdrawn.

Eligible Person(s) – The natural person(s) who can be selected as the death record; b) a certified copyCovered Person(s).

Excess Withdrawal – The portion of a court decree reciting a finding of death; c)withdrawal that, when added to other withdrawals during the Contract Year, is greater than the total GLWB Payment for the current Contract Year. Excess

2


Withdrawals include withdrawals prior to the GLWB Payment Start Date and deductions for any other proof satisfactory to us.applicable Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment.

General Account – All of the Company’s assets other than the assets in its separate accounts.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit – A withdrawal benefit feature that is part of your Contract. The Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit provides for GLWB Payments to be made each year for the Separate Account.life of a Covered Person(s) in the form of partial withdrawals without reducing the value of GLWB Payments in future years. The Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit is described in the “Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit” section of this Prospectus.

GLWB Benefit Base – The amount upon which the GLWB Payment is based.

GLWB Rider Fee – A fee assessed against the GLWB Benefit Base while the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit is in effect. The fee compensates us for the expenses, mortality risk, and expense risk assumed by us for providing the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit.

GLWB Payment(s) – The payment made each year under the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit that is equal to GLWB Percentage multiplied by the GLWB Benefit Base.

GLWB Percentage – The percentage applied to the GLWB Benefit Base to determine the GLWB Payment.

GLWB Payment Start DateThe date GLWB Payments begin. The GLWB Payment Start Date must be on a Contract Anniversary.

GLWB Supplement – A supplement that accompanies this Prospectus and contains the terms used to calculate your GLWB Payment. The GLWB Supplement contains the Base Withdrawal Percentages and Annual Increase Percentages. We cannot change these percentages once they are established for your Contract. We publish changes to the GLWB Supplement at least seven calendar days before they take effect for new Contracts. The GLWB Supplement is filed on EDGAR at www.sec.gov under file number 333-XXXXXX.

Good OrderAllA request or transaction generally is considered in “Good Order” if we receive it at our Administrative Office within the time limits, if any, prescribed in this Prospectus for a particular transaction or instruction, it includes all information and supporting legal documentation necessary documentsfor us to execute the requested instruction or transaction, and formsis signed by the individual or individuals authorized to provide the instruction or engage in the transaction. A request or transaction may be rejected or delayed if not in Good Order. This information and documentation necessary for a transaction or instruction generally includes, to the extent applicable: the completed application or instruction form; your contract number; the transaction amount (in dollars or percentage terms); the signatures of all Owners (exactly as indicated on the Contract), if necessary; Social Security Number or Tax I.D.; and any other information or supporting documentation that are complete andwe may require, including any consents. With respect to Purchase Payment, Good Order also generally includes receipt by us of sufficient funds to affect the purchase. We may, in our possession. To besole discretion, determine whether any particular transaction request is in “GoodGood Order,” an instruction must be sufficiently clear so that and we do not need to exercise any discretion to follow such instructions and any payment amount must meet our minimum requirements to complete the request. We reserve the right to change from time to time, our requirements for what constitutesor waive any Good Order and which documents, forms and payment amounts are required in order forrequirement at any time. If you have any questions, you should contact us to completeor your financial professional before submitting the form or request. We will provide you a written notice of any change in our requirements for what constitutes “Good Order” at least 10 days in advance of such change.

Hospital – A facility that is licensed and operated as a Hospitalhospital according to the law of the jurisdiction in which it is located.

Income PaymentPayout OptionAn option to receive income payments duringThe choices available under the Payout Period.

Index – The S&P 500 Composite Stock Price or any substituted suitable alternative index. See “addition or SubstitutionContract for payout of an Index” for the criteria we would use to identify a suitable alternative index.your Contract Value.

Index, InterestIndicesInterestThe reference index (or indices) we calculate that is baseduse in part ondetermining interest credited to the performance of an Index.Risk Control Account Value.

Index Interest Rate Cap – The maximum indexannual Index Rate of Return the Company will use in calculating interest rate that we may usecredited to determine Credited Index Interest. We may change this rate at the beginning ofRisk Control Account Value for a Contract Year. The Index Rate Cap does not reflect deduction of the Contract Fee.

Index Interest Rate Floor – The minimum indexannual Index Rate of Return the Company will use in calculating interest rate that we may usecredited to determine the Credited Index Interest. This rate will equal the initial Index Interest Rate Floor shown on your contract data page and will not change duringRisk Control Account Value for the life of yourthe Contract. The Index Interest Rate FloorsFloor does not reflect deduction of the Contract Fee.

3


Index Rate of Return – The change in the Index for the Secure Account and Growth Account are currently 0% and -10% respectively.current Contract Year, adjusted for the Index Rate Cap or Index Rate Floor.

Initial Index Value – The index value for the reference Index as of the beginningstart of the currenta Contract Year.

Initial Index PeriodInterest Rate – The period beginning onfixed rate of interest credited to the Contract IssueDeclared Rate Account. The Interest Rate is available two weeks in advance of the Allocation Option Start Date and ending onwill not change for the Initial Index Period Expiration Date. This period coincides with the Surrender Charge Period. See “fees and charges” for more details.

Initial Index Period Expiration Date – The last dayduration of the Initial IndexAllocation Option Period which coincides with the expiration of the Surrender Charge Period.(six years). We may change this rate on any Allocation Option Start Date.

Internal Revenue Code (IRC) – The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Issue DateIrrevocable Beneficiary – A Beneficiary who must consent to being changed or removed as a Beneficiary.

Market Value Adjustment – The date on which we issueamount of an adjustment (increase or decrease) that may be applied to a full surrender or partial withdrawal, also referred to as the Contract. We will only issue the Contract on the 10th and 25th of each month, unless the day falls on a non-business day. See “Business Day” definition for more details.MVA.

Market Value Adjustment (“MVA”) – An adjustment that we will make to the amount you receive if you surrender the Contract or take a partial withdrawal during the Initial Index Period. The MVA helps offset our costs and risks of owning fixed income and other investments used to back the guarantees under your Contract from the Contract Issue Date to the date you surrender the Contract or take a partial withdrawal. The MVA may be either positive or negative. This means that the MVA may increase or decrease the amount payable to you upon surrender or partial withdrawal.

Market Value Adjustment Index (Indices)Indices – The index (indices) that we useIndices used to determine the interest rates used to calculate the Market Value Adjustment.

Maximum Annual Increase Period – The number of years after which no further Annual Increase Percentages will be applied. The Maximum Annual Increase Period is 10 years.

Minimum Interest Rate – The minimum rate of interest usedwe will credit Contract Value held in calculating the MVA.Declared Rate Account.

Non-Qualified Contract – An annuity contract that is independent of any formal retirement or pension plan.

Nursing Home – A facility that is licensed and operates as a nursing facility according to the law of the jurisdiction in which it is located.

Owner (Joint Owner) – The person(s) (or entity) who owns thisthe Contract and whose death determines the Death Benefit. The Owner is also the person(s) (or entity) who receives income payments during the Payout Period while the Annuitant is living. If there are multiple Owners, each Owner will be a jointJoint Owner of the Contract and all references to Owner will mean jointJoint Owners. The Owner has all rights, title and interest in this Contract during the Accumulation Period.Contract. The Owner may exercise all rights and options stated in thisthe Contract, subject to the rights of any irrevocable Beneficiary.Irrevocable Beneficiary or assignee. The Owner is also referred to as “you” or “your.”

Payee – The person(s) (or entity) who receives income payments during the Payout Period

2


while the Annuitant is living. The Payee is the Owner, unless otherwise designated. A minor cannot be the Payee.

Payout Date – The date we begin makingthe first income paymentspayment is paid from the Contract to the Payee from the Contract.Owner.

Payout Period – The phase the Contract is in once income payments begin.

Pro Rata – A method of allocating, withdrawing or transferring values across all Allocation Options that is proportional to the Contract Value in each Allocation Option.

Proof of Death – Proof of Death may consist of a certified copy of the death record, a certified copy of a court decree reciting a finding of death or other similar proof.

Purchase Payment – The initial payment that we require to issue the Contract. We do not allow any paymentsadditional Purchase Payment under the Contract after the initial Purchase Payment.

Qualified Contract – An annuity that is part of an individual retirement plan, pension plan or employer-sponsored retirement program that is qualified for special tax treatment under the Internal Revenue Code.

Required Minimum Distributions. The required minimum distribution (RMD) defined by the IRC for this Contract and as determined by us.

Risk Control Account – An interest crediting option to which you may allocate your contract value.Contract Value. We credit interest under each Risk Control Account based in part on the performance of a reference Index, subject to an Index Rate Cap and Index Rate Floor. There are multiple Risk Control Accounts within the Risk Control Separate Account.

4


Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee – The Contract Fee divided by the number of days in the Contract Year and then multiplied by the Accumulation Credit Factor for the Risk Control Account at the start of a Contract Year.

Risk Control Account Value – The amount of Contract Value allocated toin a Risk Control Account.

Risk Control Separate AccountAThe MEMBERS Life Risk Control Separate Account (the “Risk Control Separate Account”). An insulated separate account that we established within our General Account and under the laws of Iowa in which we hold reserves for our guarantees under the Contract.Risk Control Accounts. Our other General Account assets are also available to meet thethose and other guarantees under the Contract and our other general obligations. The portion of the assets of the separate account equal to the reserves and other contract liabilities with respect to the separate account will not be chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business we may conduct. TheRisk Control Separate Account is not registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940.

SEC – The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission.

Spouse – The person to whom you are legally married. The term Spouse includes the person with whom you have entered into a legally-sanctioned marriage that grants you the rights, responsibilities, and obligations married couples have in accordance with applicable state laws. Individuals who do not meet the definition of Spouse may have adverse tax consequences when exercising provisions under this Contract and any attached endorsements or riders. Additionally, individuals in other arrangements that are not recognized as marriage under the relevant state law will not be treated as married or as Spouses as defined in this Contract for federal tax purposes. Consult with a tax advisor for more information on this subject and before exercising benefits under the Contract and any attached endorsements or riders.

Surrender Charge – The charge we assess when you surrenderassociated with surrendering either some or all of the Contract or make a partial withdrawal of Contract Value during the Initial Index Period.Value.

Surrender Charge Period – The numberperiod of Contract Years beginning on the date a Purchase Payment is credited to the Contracttime during which we may assess a Surrender Charge and apply an MVA if youupon the surrender of the Contract or takewithdrawal of Contract Value from the Contract. The Surrender Charge Period begins on the Contract Issue Date and continues for a partial withdrawal. This period coincides with the Initial Index Period See “fees and charges – Surrender Charge” for more details.of six years.

Surrender Value – The amount you are entitled to receive under thisif you elect to surrender the Contract in the event this Contract is terminated during the Accumulation Period. It is equal

Terminally Ill, Terminal Illness – A life expectancy of 12 months or less due to your Contract Value, less any Surrender Charges and adjusted for any MVA.

illness or accident.

Unadjusted Index ValueU.S. GAAP – The closing valuegenerally accepted accounting principles used in the United States.

Valuation Period – The period beginning at the close of one Business Day and continuing to the close of the Index on a date on which we calculated Index Interest. If the closing value of the Index is not published on that date, we will use the closing value of the Index from the next day on which the closing value of the Index is published.

Written Request – A request in writing and in a form satisfactory to us signed by the Owner and received at our Administrative Office. A Written Request may also include a telephone or fax request for specific transactions, if permitted under our current administrative procedures.succeeding Business Day.

35


 
highlightsHIGHLIGHTS
 

The following is a “summary”summary of the key features of the Contract. This summary does not include all of the information you should consider before purchasing a Contract. You should carefully read the entire Prospectus, which contains more detailed information concerning the Contract and the Company before making an investment decision.

How Your Contract Works

Overview.Your Contract is an individual or joint owned, single premium deferred modified guaranteed index annuity contract. There are two periods to your Contract, anContract: An Accumulation Period and a Payout Period. Your Contract can help you save for retirement because it can allowby allowing your Contract Value to earn interest from the Risk Control Accounts and/or Declared Rate Account on a tax-deferred basis and you can later elect to receive retirement incomeby providing the opportunity for life or a period of years.guaranteed lifetime payments. You generally will not pay taxes on your earnings until you withdraw them.

Note: When you purchase the Contract, you are not buying shares in a securities index or shares of stock.

During the Accumulation Period of your Contract, you allocate your Contract Value tobetween the Allocation Options. There are two types of Allocation Options: a Declared Rate Account and Risk Control Accounts, where interestAccounts. Each of these options is described below.

The portion of your Contract Value allocated to the Declared Rate Account is credited interest daily. The applicable daily interest rate is the rate that, when compounded, equals the Interest Rate.
The portion of Contract Value allocated to a Risk Control Account is credited with interest, if any, each Contract Year based in part on the investment performance of an external Index (currently the S&P 500 Index, the Russell 2000 Index, or the MSCI EAFE Index), subject to an Index Rate Cap and Index Rate Floor that is unique to each Risk Control Account. The S&P 500 Index is a stock market index based on the market capitalizations of 500 leading companies publicly traded in the U.S. stock market, as determined by Standard & Poor’s. The Russell 2000 Index is a stock market index that measures performance of the 2,000 smallest companies in the Russell 3000 Index, which is made up of 3,000 of the largest US-traded stocks. The MSCI EAFE Index is a stock market index which is designed to measure the equity market performance of developed markets outside of the U.S. and Canada. The Indices can go up or down based on the stock prices of the companies that comprise the applicable Index. None of the Indices include dividends paid on the stocks comprising the Index and therefore do not reflect the full investment performance of the underlying stocks. We set the Index Rate Caps prior to the Contract Issue Date and prior to each Contract Anniversary for the subsequent Contract Year. We will forward advance written notice to you of any change in the Index Rate Cap at least two weeks prior to the Contract Anniversary. The Index Rate Floor associated with each Risk Control Account will not change during the life of your Contract. The Index Rate of Return is determined on each Contract Anniversary and is measured over the Contract Year. Index interest is calculated on each Contract Anniversary. Because Index Interest is calculated at a single point in time you may experience negative or flat performance even though the Index experienced gains through some, or most, of the Contract Year.

6


The guaranteed lifetime withdrawal benefit (GLWB) provides GLWB Payments based on a percentage of your GLWB Benefit Base for the life of a Covered Person(s) as described in more detail in the “Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit” section of this Prospectus. You may continue to withdraw Contract Value after GLWB Payments begin. GLWB Payments must start on a Contract Anniversary and can begin on or after the first Contract Anniversary, as early as Age 50 of the Index (currently the S&P 500 Composite Stock Price Index)Covered Person (or younger Covered Person if there are two Covered Persons), subject to an Index Interest Rate Cap and Floor that is unique to each Risk Control Account. The S&P 500 Index is a stock market index based on the market capitalizations of 500 leading companies publicly traded in the U.S. stock market,or as determined by Standard & Poors. The Index can go up or down based on the stock priceslate as Age 95 of the 500 companies that comprise the Index. The Index does not include dividends paid on the stocks comprising the Index and therefore does not reflectCovered Person (or younger Covered Person if there are two Covered Persons). Once GLWB Payments begin you must take the full investment performance ofGLWB Payment amount unless the underlying stocks. We set the Index Interest Rate Caps at the Contract Issue Date and upon each Contract Anniversary. Credited Index Interest may be less than zero, depending on the Risk Control Account you elect. Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit is terminated.

The Accumulation Period begins on the Contract Issue Date and continues until the Payout Date.

During the Payout Period of your Contract, you can elect to receive income payments by applying Contract Value to the Income Payment Options offered in your Contract. The Payout Period begins onUpon reaching the Payout Date, and continues whilethe Covered Person(s) become the Annuitant(s). Unless the Owner chooses to surrender the Contract, income payments are paid.will be equal to the GLWB Payment. Upon the death of all Annuitants we will pay the Beneficiary an amount equal to the Contract Value immediately prior to the annuitization less the total of the income payments that have been paid by us.

Please call your registered representativefinancial professional or the Company at 1-800-798-5500 if you have questions about how your Contract works.

Purchase Payment
. You may purchase the Contract with a single initial Purchase Payment of $5,000 or more.at least $10,000. A Purchase Payment of $1,000,000that equals or moreexceeds $1 million requires our prior approval. We do not allow any payments under the Contract after the initial Purchase Payment. Multiple Contracts owned by the same individual where the sum of the Purchase Payments exceed $1,000,000equals or exceeds $1 million also require our prior approval.

Allocation OptionsOptions.
There are two Risk Control Accounts, the Secure Account and the Growth Account,Allocation Levels for your Contract, among which you may allocate all or a portion of your Purchase Payment and Contract Value. Both Risk Control Accounts are available as allocation options during the Initial Index Period. Under your Contract, you choose the duration of the Initial Index Period. We currently offer Initial Index Periods with durations of 5, 6, 7 or 10 years, but may reduce or increase the durations offered from time to time for new contracts that we issue. After the Initial Index Period, only the Secure Account will be available as an allocation option under the Contract. The Growth Account is not available after the Initial Index Period. For Contracts sold in the state of California, neither RiskValue: Level A (Allocation Option Level), and Level R (Risk Control Account Level), each is available after the Initial Index Period. After the Initial Index Period, the Owner must select either an Income Payment Option or a lump sum payment of Contract Value.described below.

At Level A, the allocation is split between the available Allocation Options which include the Declared Rate Account, and Risk Control Accounts that use one of the following reference Indices, the S&P 500 Index, the Russell 2000 Index, and the MSCI EAFE Index;
At Level R, the allocation only applies to Risk Control Accounts, and the allocation is split among Risk Control Accounts with the same reference Index.

4


You may allocate your Purchase Payment to either or both Risk Control Accounts during the Initial Index Period, subject to the following restrictions. You must specify the percentage of your Purchase Payment to be allocated to each Risk Control Accountapplicable Allocation Level on the Contract Issue Date. The amount you direct to a particular Risk Control Accountan Allocation Option at Level A must be in whole percentages from 0% to 100% of the Purchase Payment and your total allocation must equal 100% of the Purchase Payment.. If you do not indicate your allocations on the application, our Administrative Office will attempt to contact your adviser and/or you for clarification. We will not issue the Contract without your allocation instructions.

PleaseIn the event you select a Risk Control Account option, please note that at any time the Index Interest Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account is less than the bailout rate specified in the Bailout Provision (as shown on your contract data page,Contract Data Page), we may, at our discretion, restrict transferallocations into that Risk Control Account. (See “accessSee “Access to your moneyYour Money – Bailout Provision” in this Prospectus for more details.)

TheIn addition, as it relates to the Risk Control Accounts, the Index Interest Rate Floor is the minimum index interest rate that we may useIndex Rate of Return used as part of the Accumulation Credit Factor calculation for determining the value of a Risk Control Account, prior to determine Creditedthe deduction of the Contract Fee and GLWB Rider Fee. The Index Interest.Rate Floor will not change during the life of your Contract. The Secure Account has an Index Interest Rate Floor of 0% and the Growth Account has an Index Rate Floor of -10%. Credited Index Interest for any Contract Year can never be below 0%. ThisFor the Secure Account, this means that any negative investment performance of the Index over the one-year period used in determining Credited Index Interest would not reduce your Contract Value at the end of a Contract Year. The Secure Account provides your Contract Value the most protection from negative investment performance of the Index.

The Index Interest Rate Cap is the maximum index interest rate that we may use to determine Credited Index Interest. The Index Interest Rate CapYear; and for the Secure Account will always be positive and will never be less than the minimum Index Interest Rate Cap for the Secure Account equal to 1.0%.

On the other hand, the Growth Account, has an Index Interest Rate Floor of -10%. Credited Index Interest for any Contract Year can never be below -10%. Thisthis means that any negative investment performance of the Index over the one-year period used in determining Credited Index Interest could result in negative Credited Index Interest being credited that would not reduce your Contract Value at the end of the Contract Year. However, any negative Credited Index Interest would not reduce your Contract Value in a Contract Year by more than 10% regardless of whether the even if such

7


negative investment performance is worse than -10%. However, as noted on the cover page of this Prospectus, you could lose more than 10% of your investment in a Risk Control Account due to the application of Surrender Charges, Contract fees, negative Market Value Adjustments, the GLWB Rider Fee, and federal tax penalties.

Moreover, the Index Rate Cap is the maximum Index Rate of Return used as part of the Accumulation Credit Factor calculation for determining the value of a Risk Control Account, prior to the deduction of the Contract Fee and GLWB Rider Fee. The portion of the Purchase Payment allocated to a Risk Control Account on the Contract Issue Date will be subject to the Index overRate Caps in effect on the one-year period was less than -10%Contract Issue Date.

On the first Contract Anniversary and any subsequent Contract Anniversary, we will declare an Index Rate Cap which we guarantee for the next Contract Year. We will notify you of any such change to the Index Rate Cap at least two weeks prior to the Contract Anniversary. The Index Rate Caps will always be positive and will range between 1% and 75%. In return for accepting some risk of loss to your Contract Value allocated to the Growth Account,Accounts, the Index Interest Rate CapCaps declared for the Growth Account wouldwill be higher than the Index Interest Rate Cap declared for the Secure Account for the same Initialperiod and reference Index, Period which allows the potential for a higher positive Credited Index Interest to be applied to yourincrease in Contract Value allocated tofor the Growth Account.

The same Index Interest Rate Capwill be used for each Risk Control Account for the Growth Account will always be positive and will never be less thanduration of the minimum Index Interest Rate Cap forAllocation Option Period. However, if the Growth Account equal to 1.0%.

We reserve the right to add or substitute the Index. We will substitute the Index if thepublication of an Index is discontinued, or calculation of the Index is materially changed.changed, we will substitute a suitable Index that will be used for the remainder of the Allocation Option Period and will notify you of the change in advance. If we substitute thean Index, the performance of the new Index may differ from the original Index. This,Index, which may, in turn, may affect the Credited Index Interest you earn.index interest credited and your Contract Value.

Right to Examine
The Contract provides for an initial “right to examine” period. The OwnerWe may rejectoffer additional Risk Control Accounts with the Contract for any reason by forwarding the Contract to us with a Written Requestsame or additional Indices at our Administrative Office within 10 daysdiscretion. We may also discontinue a Risk Control Account, effective as of receiving it, or such longer period as the state in which your Contract was issued may require.

If you exercise this “Right to Examine”, the Contract will terminate andan Allocation Option Maturity Date. In any case, we will refund your Purchase Payment. Some states may require that we refundnotify you of the Contract Value, which reflects interest, positiveaddition or negative, based on changes in the Index. The state in which your Contract is issueddiscontinuation of a Risk Control Account. Such a change will determine which method we use. If your Contract is an IRA under the Internal Revenue Code, we will refund your Purchase Payment. Refunds will not be subject to a Surrender Charge or MVA and willany applicable regulatory approval that may be paid within seven Business days following our receiptrequired.

The portion of the Contract.

5


Rebalancing / Reallocation
Upon each Contract Anniversary, after Credited Index Interest has been applied,Purchase Payment allocated to the Automatic Rebalance Program will reallocate your Contract Value between the Risk Control Accounts based on your most recent allocation instructions that we have on file or the allocation appliedDeclared Rate Account on the Contract Issue Date if no additional allocation change requests have been made.

You may change your allocation of Contract Value between Risk Control Accounts. There are no limits onwill be credited with the number of requests that you can make. Any such change will takeInterest Rate in effect on the next Contract Anniversary. Your requestIssue Date. On the first Allocation Option Maturity Date and any subsequent Allocation Option Maturity Date, we will declare an Interest Rate which we guarantee for the new Allocation Option Period of six years. We will notify you of any such change to change your allocation instructions must be received at our Administrative Officethe Interest Rate at least two Business Daysweeks prior to your Contract Anniversary for the instructions to be effective for that Contract Anniversary. If we do not receive your Written Request in time for the next Contract Anniversary, your instructions will be effective the following Contract Anniversary.

Please note that at any time the IndexAllocation Option Maturity Date. The Interest Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account iswill never be less than the bailout rate specifiedMinimum Interest Rate on your contract data page, we may, at our discretion, restrict transfers into that Risk Control Account and may not reallocatethe Contract Issue Date.

Rebalancing / Reallocation. We will automatically rebalance your Contract Value between Risk Control Accounts underAllocation Options to return your Contract Values to the Automatic Rebalance Program. See “access to your money – Bailout Provision” for more details.Allocation Levels on file with us. Any new allocation change request will supersede any prior allocation instructions.

Withdrawal Options
Options.
The Contract offers the following liquidity features during the Accumulation Period:

 
Annual Free annual withdrawal amountWithdrawal Amount – Each Contract Year, beginning in Contract Year 2, you may withdraw up to 10% of your Contract Value determined as of the beginning of the Contract Year free of anywithout incurring a Surrender Charge or MVA. One timeMarket Value Adjustment. Any unused Annual Free Withdrawal Amount will not carry over to any subsequent Contract Year.
Partial Withdrawal Option – You may make partial withdrawals during the Accumulation Period by Authorized Request. Partial withdrawals will be permitted in the first Contract year for purposes of meeting requirements set forth by the Internal Revenue Code. The free annual withdrawal amount may be larger for certain Qualified Contracts to satisfy minimum distribution requirements set forth in the Internal Revenue Code.
Partial withdrawal option – You may take up to two withdrawals each Contract Year beginning in Contract Year 2 to the beginning of the Payout Period. We do not allow withdrawals in Contract Year 1, with the exception to allow for requirements set forth by the Internal Revenue Code. Amounts withdrawnprocessed Pro Rata from your Contract Value in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount in Contract Year 2 through the end of the Initial Index Period, will be subject to aall Allocation Options. Any applicable Surrender Charge and MVA.Market Value Adjustment will affect the amount available for a partial withdrawal. A partial withdrawal may be considered an Excess Withdrawal and impact your Death Benefit and GLWB Payment. If a partial withdrawal would

8


cause the Surrender Value to be less than $2,000, we will treat your request as a full surrender. Before processing the full surrender, we will attempt to contact you or your financial professional to provide the opportunity for you to take a lower amount to maintain a Surrender Value of at least $2,000. If we are unable to contact you on the Business Day we receive your request, we will process the full surrender.
 
Full surrender option – You may surrender your Contract at any time prior to beginningduring the Payout Period.Accumulation Period by Authorized Request. Upon full surrender, Credited Index Interest, a Surrender Charge and an MVAMarket Value Adjustment may apply.

Withdrawals and surrenders are subject to income taxes, and if taken before the owner is age 59½, tax penalties may apply. See “Federal Income Tax Matters” on page __ and “Access to Your Money” on page __ for more details. Withdrawals will also reduce the Death Benefit and may reduce GLWB Payments.

Surrender Charge.  The Surrender Charge Period begins on the Contract Issue Date and continues for a period of six years. The maximum Surrender Charge is 9% of Contract Value withdrawn (See “Fees and Expenses” on page __).

Market Value Adjustment. The Market Value Adjustment (MVA)
For partialapplies to withdrawals and upon full surrender of Contract Value in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount during the Initial Index Period, we will apply an MVA.and is calculated separately for each Allocation Option. The MVAMarket Value Adjustment can increase or decrease your amount withdrawn or the Surrender Value, depending on how economic indicators have changed since your Contract was issued (see “market value adjustment” sectionAllocation Option Start Date. See “Market Value Adjustment” for more details).details. You may lose a portion of your principal and previously credited interest due to the MVA.Market Value Adjustment. The Market Value Adjustment is not assessed upon the following:

Withdrawals under the Nursing Home or Hospital waiver or Terminal Illness Withdrawal waiver;
Required minimum distributions that are withdrawn under an automatic withdrawal program provided by the Company;
The Annual Free Withdrawal Amount;
Withdrawals on an Allocation Option Maturity Date;
Death Benefit proceeds;
GLWB Payment withdrawals; and
Contract Value applied to an Income Payout Option.

Bailout Provision. We will set a single Bailout Rate for all Risk Control Accounts under the Secure Account option and a single Bailout Rate for all Risk Control Accounts under the Growth Account option. The Bailout Rate for Risk Control Accounts under the Secure Account option may range from 1.5% to 10% while the Bailout Rate for Risk Control Accounts under the Growth Account option may range from 2.0% to 25%. The Bailout Rates will be prominently displayed on your Contract Data Page and will not change during the life of your Contract.

If the Index Rate Cap for a Risk Control Account is set below the Bailout Rate for that Risk Control Account, you may withdraw the Risk Control Account Value from that Risk Control Account during the 30-day period following the Contract Anniversary by Authorized Request. A Market Value Adjustment and Surrender Charge will not apply to such withdrawal. Your Authorized Request to withdrawal Risk Account Control Account Value must be received in Good Order during this 30-day period. If the request is not received during this 30-day period or the request is not in Good Order, no withdrawal will occur.

If the Bailout Rate equals the Index Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account, you will not be eligible to withdraw your Risk Control Account Value under the Bailout Provision. For example, if the Bailout Rate for the Secure Account is set at 1.50% and the Index Rate Cap for the Secure Account is set at 1.50%, you would not be eligible to withdraw under the Bailout Provision.

At any time, the Index Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account is less than the Bailout Rate specified on your Contract Data Page, we may, at our discretion, restrict allocations into that Risk Control Account.

9


See “Access to Your Money – Bailout Provision” for more details.

Income Options. You have several income options to choose from during the Payout Period. Upon reaching the anticipated Payout Date, income payments will equal the GLWB Payment unless the Owner elects to surrender the Contract.

Death Benefit.  The Death Benefit during the Accumulation Period is equal to the greater of Contract Value or the Purchase Payment adjusted for withdrawals as of the date the Death Benefit is payable. We do not apply a Surrender Charge or Market Value Adjustment in determining the Death Benefit payable.

Right to Examine. You may cancel your Contract and receive either your Purchase Payment or your Contract Value depending upon applicable state law (See Right to Examine on page __).

Contract Charges

An investment in the Contract involves certain fees and expenses, including the Contract Fee, Surrender Charge
For partial withdrawalsCharges, and surrenders during the Initial Index Period, we deduct a Surrender ChargeGLWB Rider Fee. The Contract Fee is equal to a percentage0.75% of the value allocated to the Risk Control Account Allocation Options. The Contract Fee does not apply to the Declared Rate Account Allocation Option. The GLWB Rider Fee is equal to 0.50% of the average daily GLWB Benefit Base for the prior Contract Year. The GLWB Fee is deducted Pro Rata from the Contract Value withdrawn that is in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount (see the “fees and charges” section for more details). We will deduct the Surrender Charge before we apply any MVA. For an example of how we calculate the amount you receive when you make a partial withdrawal during the Initial Index Period, see Examples 1 and 2 in “appendix a” to this Prospectus.

6


Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment Hardship Waivers
We will not deduct a Surrender Charge or apply an MVA to a partial withdrawal or surrender made in the case of the following life events:

Confinement to a Nursing Home or Hospital for at least 180 consecutive days; or
Diagnosis of a terminal illness where life expectancy is 12 months or less.

There are waiting periods and other restrictions that apply to these waivers, which are discussed in greater detail in the “access to your money” section.

Bailout Provision
We will set a bailout rate for each Risk Control Account. The bailout rate will be prominently displayedAllocation Option on your contract data page attached to the front of the cover page of the Contract Anniversary. For a full description of all such fees and will not change duringexpenses, please see the Initial Index Period. If the Index Interest Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account is set below the bailout rate for that Risk Control Account, the Bailout Provision allows you to make a withdrawalsection of some or all of the Contract Value attributable to that Risk Control Account during the Initial Index Period without incurring any Surrender Chargethis Prospectus entitled “Fees and without the application of any MVA during the 30-day period following a Contract Anniversary. However, if you are age 59½ or younger at the time of such withdrawal, a 10% tax penalty may apply. At any time the Index Interest Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account is less than the bailout rate specified on your contract data page, we may, at our discretion, restrict transfers into that Risk Control Account. See “access to your money – Bailout Provision” for more details.
Expenses”.

Change of Annuitant Endorsement Charge

If you change the Annuitant within the first two Contract Years, we reserve the right to assess a fee to offset the expenses incurred. This fee will not exceed $150 and will be assessed on a pro-rata basis proportional to your Contract Value in the Risk Control Accounts.

Income Options
You have several income options to choose from during the Payout Period. Income payments will start on the Payout Date, and continue based on the option you elect.

Death Benefit
The Contract provides a Death Benefit during the Accumulation Period. The Death Benefit is equal to the Contract Value adjusted for Credited Index Interest as of the date Death Benefits are payable. We do not apply the Surrender Charge or MVA in determining the Death Benefit payable.

Benefits of Your Contract

Your Contract offers you several benefits.

Tax Deferral Your Contract provides for tax-deferred growth. This may allow your Contract Value to grow faster because you earn interest on Contract Value that otherwise may have been paid in taxes. Your Contract Value may earn interest. The interest would compound within the Contract and the Contract Value you may have otherwise paid in taxes earns interest. Credited Index Interest earned generally is not taxed until it is withdrawn. We will apply any Credited Indexed Interest earned at the time of a partial withdrawal or surrender. You may use the Contract with certain tax qualified retirement plans, including in Roth IRA accounts. If your Contract is used with a Roth IRA or other Roth account in a tax qualified retirement plan, Credited Index Interest may not be taxed even when distributed. Please note, however, that tax qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral or other tax benefit; the purchase of this Contract does not provide additional tax benefits beyond those provided in the qualified plan.
Free Annual Withdrawals after First Contract Year – You may take a maximum of two free annual withdrawals from your Contract Value each Contract Year after the first Contract Year

7


during the Initial Index Period. In each such Contract Year, you may withdraw up to 10% of Contract Value determined as of the beginning of the Contract Year without the application of a Surrender Charge or MVA on those amounts. Note that taxes and other penalties may apply to free annual withdrawals and withdrawals may be restricted under certain Qualified Contracts.
Death Benefit Your Contract provides a Death Benefit. Death Benefit proceeds become payable to the Beneficiary upon our receipt of Due Proof of Death of the Owner during the Accumulation Period (or the first Owner to die if there are Joint Owners).
Protection from Outliving your IncomeYour Contract provides you with the opportunity to receive income payments during the Payout Period. Annuitizing your Contract converts your Contract Value into a stream of income which can be based on your life expectancy. Depending upon the type of income benefit option you choose, annuitization of your Contract can provide you with an income stream that you cannot outlive.

Risk Factors

Your Contract also has various risks associated with it. We list these risk factors below, as well as other important information you should know before purchasing a Contract.

Index Interest Crediting Risk If the Index declines, it may or may not reduce your Contract Value in a Risk Control Account. This depends on the Risk Control Account to which you allocated your Contract Value. Nevertheless, you always assume the investment risk that no Credited Index Interest will be added to your Contract Value at the end of a Contract Year. You also bear the risk that sustained declines in the Index may result in Credited Index Interest not being credited to your Accumulated Value for a prolonged period. If your Contract Value is allocated to the Growth Account, you also assume the risk that we may credit negative Credited Index Interest. This means that Contract Value allocated to the Growth Account may decline. In addition, you assume the risk that the Index Interest Rate Cap, the maximum index interest rate that we may use to determine Credited Index Interest and which is set annually, can be reduced to as little as 1.0%.
Please note that in an increasing interest rate environment, the MVA could reduce the amount received to less than the protection provided by the Index Interest Rate Floor.
Liquidity Risk We designed your Contract to be a long-term investment that you may use to help save for retirement. Your Contract is not designed to be a short-term investment. While you are always permitted to take two partial withdrawals from the Contract each Contract Year after Contract Year 1 and to surrender the Contract at any time, a surrender in Contract Year 1 and partial withdrawals and surrenders in Contract Year 2 through the end of the Initial Index Period in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount will be subject to a Surrender Charge and MVA (if applicable). We may defer payments made under this Contract for up to six months if the insurance regulatory authority of the state in which we issued the Contract approves such deferral.
Market Risk The historical performance of the Index should not be taken as an indication of the future performance of the Index. While the trading prices of the underlying stocks comprising the Index will determine the level of the Index, it is impossible to predict whether the level of the Index will fall or rise. Trading prices of the underlying stocks comprising the Index will be influenced by complex and interrelated economic, financial, regulatory, geographic, judicial, political and other factors that can affect the capital markets generally and the equity trading markets on which the underlying common stocks are traded, and by various circumstances that can influence the levels of the underlying common stocks in a specific market segment or the level of a particular underlying stock.

8Index Rate of Return Risk.If you are invested in a Risk Control Account and the relevant Index declines, it may or may not reduce your Risk Control Account Value. This depends on the Risk Control Account to which you allocated your Contact Value. Nevertheless, you always assume the investment risk that no index interest will be credited and therefore the Index Rate of Return will not increase your Accumulation Credit Factor (and, ultimately, your Risk Control Account Value). You also bear the risk that sustained declines in the relevant Index may cause the Index Rate of Return to not increase your Accumulation Credit Factor (and, ultimately, your Risk Control Account Value) for a prolonged period. If your Risk Control Account Value is allocated to the Growth Account, you also assume the risk of a negative Index Rate of Return (crediting negative index interest), which means your Accumulation Credit Factor and, ultimately, the Risk Control Account Value allocated to the Growth Account, will decline. In addition, you assume the risk that the Index Rate Cap can be reduced to as little as 1.0%.

Please note that in an increasing interest rate environment, the Market Value Adjustment could reduce the amount received to less than the protection provided by the Index Rate Floor. Ownership of a Contract does not provide ownership rights of the securities that are constituents of the Index.

Liquidity Risk. We designed your Contract to be a long-term investment that you may use to help save for retirement and provide lifetime income. Your Contract is not designed to be a short-term investment. While you are permitted to take partial withdrawals from the Contract or fully surrender the Contract during the Accumulation Period by Authorized Request, such withdrawals may be subject to a Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment and may impact your Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit and Death Benefit. We may defer payments made under this Contract for up to six months if the insurance regulatory authority of the state in which we issued the Contract approves such deferral.

Loss of Principal Risk. Investment in the Risk Control Growth Account could result in a loss of principal and previously credited interest. Although investment losses in the Growth Account are subject to an Index Interest Rate Floor of -10%, losses of as much as -10% in one year and possibly greater than -10%

10


Risk That We May Eliminate or Substitute an IndexThere is no guarantee that the Index will be available during the entire time you own your Contract. We may replace currently available indices if they are discontinued or there is a material change in the calculation of the Index. If we substitute the Index, the performance of the new Index may differ from the original Index. This, in turn, may affect the Credited Index Interest you earn and affect how you want to allocate Contract Value between available Risk Control Accounts. We will not substitute the Index until the new Index has been approved by the insurance department in your state. If we substitute the Index and you do not wish to allocate your contract Value to the Risk Control Accounts available under the Contract, you may surrender your contract, but you may be subject to a Surrender Charge and an MVA, which may result in a loss of principal and Credited Index Interest.
We will notify you in your annual report of any addition of an index or substitution or removal of the Index or otherwise in writing where it is necessary to provide advance written notification of the change prior to your Contract Anniversary. See “Addition or Substitution of an Index” for more details.
Note: When you purchase the Contract, you are not buying shares in a securities index or shares of stock.
Risk Control Account Transfer Restriction – At any time the Index Interest Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account is less than the bailout rate specified on your contract data page, we may, at our discretion, restrict transfers into that Risk Control Account. In that event, you may not be able to reallocate your Contract Value between the Secure Account and the Growth Account. See “access to your money – Bailout Provision” for more details.
Creditor and Solvency Risk Our General Account assets support the guarantees under the Contract and are subject to the claims of our creditors. As such, the guarantees under the Contract are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability, and therefore, to the risk that we may default on those guarantees. You need to consider our financial strength and claims-paying ability in meeting the guarantees under the Contract. You may obtain information on our financial condition by reviewing our financial statements included in this Prospectus. Additionally, information concerning our business and operations is set forth in the section of this Prospectus entitled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.”

over multiple years could result in a loss of previously credited interest and a loss of principal. Withdrawals and surrenders could also result in a loss of previously credited interest or principal even if performance has been positive because of Surrender Charges, the Market Value Adjustment, and the fees deducted.

Market Risk.  The historical performance of an Index relating to a Risk Control Account should not be taken as an indication of the future performance of the Index. The performance of an Index will be influenced by complex and interrelated economic, financial, regulatory, geographic, judicial, political and other factors that can affect the capital markets generally, and by various circumstances that can influence the performance of securities in a particular market segment.

Risk That We May Eliminate or Substitute an Index - There is no guarantee that the Index will be available during the entire time you own your Contract. We may replace currently available indices if they are discontinued or there is a material change in the calculation of the Index. If we substitute the Index, the performance of the new Index may differ from the original Index. This, in turn, may affect the credited index interest you earn and affect how you want to allocate Contract Value between available Risk Control Accounts. We will not substitute the Index until the new Index has been approved by the insurance department in your state. If we substitute the Index and you do not wish to allocate your Contract Value to the Risk Control Accounts available under the Contract, you may surrender your Contract, but you may be subject to a Surrender Charge and an MVA, which may result in a loss of principal and credited index interest. A surrender of the Contract may also be subject to taxes and tax penalties.

If an Index is substituted in the middle of a Contract Year, we will calculate index interest up to the date the first Index terminates. Index interest will then be calculated from the date the new Index is used until the Contract Anniversary and the two index interest amounts will be added together to determine the credited index interest for the Contract Year.

We will notify you in your annual report of any addition of an index or substitution or removal of the Index or otherwise in writing where it is necessary to provide advance written notification of the change prior to your Contract Anniversary. See “Addition or Substitution of an Index” for more details.

Note: When you purchase the Contract, you are not buying shares in a securities index or shares of stock. The Index does not reflect dividends paid on the stocks comprising the Index, and, therefore, the calculation of the performance of the Index under the Contract does not reflect the full investment performance of the underlying securities.

Risk Control Account Allocation Restriction. At any time, the Index Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account is less than the Bailout Rate specified on your Contract Data Page, we may, at our discretion, restrict allocations into that Risk Control Account. See “Access to Your Money – Bailout Provision” for more details.

Creditor and Solvency Risk. Our General Account assets support the guarantees under the Contract and are subject to the claims of our creditors. As such, the guarantees under the Contract are subject to our financial strength and claims-paying ability, and therefore, to the risk that we may default on those guarantees. You need to consider our financial strength and claims-paying ability in meeting the guarantees under the Contract. You may obtain information on our financial condition by reviewing our financial statements included in this Prospectus. Additionally, information concerning our business and operations is set forth in the section of this Prospectus entitled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.”

Other Important Information You Should Know

No Ownership Rights You have no ownership rights in the underlying stocks comprising the Index. Purchasing the Contract is not equivalent to investing in the underlying stocks comprising the Index. As the Owner of the Contract, you will not have any ownership interest or rights in the underlying stocks comprising the Index, such as voting rights, dividend payments, or other distributions.
No Affiliation with Index or Underlying Stocks We are not affiliated with the sponsor of the Index or the underlying stocks comprising that Index. Consequently, the Index and the issuers of the underlying stocks comprising the Index have no involvement with the Contract.
Possible Tax Law Changes There always is the possibility that the tax treatment of the Contract could change by legislation or otherwise. We have the right to modify the Contract in response to legislative changes that could diminish the favorable tax treatment that Owners receive. You should consult a tax adviser with respect to legislative developments and their effect on the Contract.

9No Ownership Rights You have no ownership rights in the underlying stocks comprising the reference Indexes. Purchasing the Contract is not equivalent to investing in the underlying stocks comprising the

11


Indexes. As the Owner of the Contract, you will not have any ownership interest or rights in the underlying stocks comprising the Indexes, such as voting rights, dividend payments, or other distributions.

No Affiliation with Index or Underlying Stocks We are not affiliated with the sponsors of the Indexes or the underlying stocks comprising the Indexes. Consequently, the Indexes and the issuers of the underlying stocks comprising the Indexes have no involvement with the Contract.

Possible Tax Law Changes There always is the possibility that the tax treatment of the Contract could change by legislation or otherwise. We have the right to modify the Contract in response to legislative changes that could diminish the favorable tax treatment that Owners receive. You should consult a tax adviser with respect to legislative developments and their effect on the Contract.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit

The Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit is automatically included with your Contract and provides GLWB Payments for the lifetime of the Covered Person(s). The Covered Person(s) must be an Eligible Person(s) based on the single life or joint life option you select on the Contract Issue Date. An Eligible Person(s) may be you, your Spouse, or the Annuitant, depending upon who owns the Contract. See the “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period” section for more details. There are restrictions on who can become a Covered Person. Also, joint life GLWB Payments are not available for non-natural owners. Please refer to the “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period” section in this Prospectus for more information regarding these restrictions.

GLWB Payments begin on a Contract Anniversary. Once GLWB Payments begin, the full amount of the GLWB Payment must be taken each year. GLWB Payments continue during the life of the Covered Person(s) unless the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Rider is terminated. Please see the “Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit” section of this prospectus for information on when the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terminates. We assess a fee for the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit as discussed in the “Fees and Expenses” section of the Prospectus. You may continue to make withdrawals and the Death Benefit is still payable after GLWB Payments begin.

The annual GLWB Payment is equal to the GLWB Percentage multiplied by the GLWB Benefit Base. The GLWB Percentage is determined on the GLWB Payment Start Date and is equal to the Base Withdrawal Percentage plus the Annual Increase Percentage multiplied by the number of completed Contract Years from the Contract Issue Date until the GLWB Payment Start Date for a maximum of 10 years.

The Base Withdrawal Percentage and Annual Increase Percentage are determined based on your election of either single life or joint life option rates using the Age of the younger Covered Person(s) on the Contract Issue Date. The Base Withdrawal Percentage and Annual Increase Percentage are stated in the GLWB Supplement which accompanies this Prospectus.

The GLWB Benefit Base is initially equal to the Purchase Payment. On each Contract Anniversary, unless the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit Rider is terminated, if the current Contract Value is greater than the current GLWB Benefit Base, the GLWB Benefit Base will be reset to equal the current Contract Value.

Once established, the GLWB Payment can only decrease if you take an Excess Withdrawal. An Excess Withdrawal is the portion of a withdrawal that, when added to other withdrawals taken during the Contract Year, is greater than the total GLWB Payment for the current Contract Year. If an Excess Withdrawal causes the Contract Value to be less than $2,000, your Contract will terminate and GLWB Payments will cease. Before processing the full surrender, we will attempt to contact you or your financial professional to provide the opportunity for you to take a lessor withdrawal to maintain a Surrender Value of at least $2,000. If we are unable to contact you on the Business Day we receive your request, we will process the full surrender.

12


 
getting started – the Accumulation PeriodFEES AND EXPENSES
 

The following information describes the fees and expenses you will pay when buying, owning, and surrendering the Contract.

Surrender Charge(1)  (as a percentage of Contract Value withdrawn)

Contract Year Surrender Charge Percentage 
1 9% 
2 9% 
3 8% 
4 7% 
5 6% 
6 5% 
7+ 0% 

Contract Annual Expenses

Contract Fee (assessed as a percentage of Contract Value in the Risk Control Account)(2) .........0.75%

GLWB Rider Fee (assessed as a percentage of the GLWB Benefit Base)(3) ...................0.50%

Other Expenses

Premium Tax(4) (as a percentage of the Purchase Payment) ......................................N/A


(1) We deduct a Surrender Charge from each withdrawal during the Surrender Charge Period that exceed the Annual Free Withdrawal Amount. We do not assess a Surrender Charge on withdrawals made under the Nursing Home or Hospital Waiver or Terminal Illness Waiver.
(2) We assess the Contract Fee against Contract Value held in the Risk Control Accounts. The Contract Fee assessed against Contract Value held in the Risk Control Accounts is equal on an individual or joint owned, singleannual basis to the annual Contract Fee percentage multiplied by the Accumulation Credit Factor for each Risk Control Account at the start of the Contract Year. The Contract Fee reduces the Accumulation Credit Factor for each Risk Control Account in which you are invested, thereby reducing the amount of interest credited, if any, to Contract Value in the Risk Control Accounts. We do not assess a Contract Fee against Contract Value held in the Declared Rate Account.
(3) The GLWB Fee is equal on an annual basis to the GLWB Rider Fee percentage multiplied by the average daily value of the GLWB Benefit Base for the prior Contract Year. The GLWB Rider Fee will be deducted Pro Rata from the Contract Value in all Allocation Options on the Contract Anniversary. We will not assess the GLWB Rider Fee if the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terminates.
(4) Premium tax is not currently deducted, but we reserve the right to in the future. State premium deferred annuity. taxes currently range from 0% to 3.5% of the Purchase Payment.

Surrender Charge

We describe yourdeduct a Surrender Charge from each withdrawal during the Surrender Charge Period that exceeds the Annual Free Withdrawal Amount. The Surrender Charge schedule is expressed as a percentage of the Contract Value as shown in the Surrender Charge table.

The Surrender Charge, if any, is calculated using the following formula:

Surrender Charge amount = W x SC%, where

13


W = amount of withdrawal that is in excess of the Annual Free Withdrawal Amount remaining for that Contract Year
SC% = applicable Surrender Charge percentage based on the Contract Year in which the withdrawal occurs.

For an example of how we calculate the Surrender Charge, see Appendix A to this Prospectus.

We will not assess the Surrender Charge on:

Withdrawals under the Nursing Home or Hospital Waiver or Terminal Illness Waiver;
Required minimum distributions that are withdrawn under the automatic withdrawal program provided by the Company;
Your Annual Free Withdrawal Amount;
Death Benefit proceeds;
Amounts withdrawn after the Surrender Charge Period;
Contract Value applied to an Income Payout Option; and
GLWB Payment withdrawals.

Surrender Charges offset promotion, distribution expenses, and investment risks born by the Company. To the extent Surrender Charges are insufficient to cover these risks and expenses, the Company will pay for the costs that it incurs out of the Contract Fees it collects and from its General Account.

For information on the Annual Free Withdrawal Amount and Surrender Charge waivers, see “Access to Your Money.”

Other Information

We assume investment risks and costs in providing the guarantees under the Contract. These investment risks include the risks we assume in providing the Index Rate Floors for the Risk Control Accounts, the Interest Rate for the Declared Rate Account, the surrender rights available under the Contract, the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit, the Death Benefit and the income payments. We must provide the rates and benefits set forth in your Contract below. Contracts issuedregardless of how our General Account investments that support the guarantees we provide perform. To help manage our investment risks, we engage in certain risk management techniques. There are costs associated with those risk management techniques. You do not directly pay the costs associated with our risk management techniques. However, we take those costs into account when we set rates and guarantees under your state may provide different featuresContract.

GETTING STARTED – THE ACCUMULATION PERIOD

The Prospectus describes all material rights, benefits and benefits than those described in this Prospectus. Aobligations under the Contract. All material difference may include the length of the right to examine period, the amount of and ability to waive the Surrender Charge, the Payout Date, or the availability of certain Income Payment Options. In addition, certain benefit options may not be available in all states. We will include any such state variations in the Contract are described in Appendix B to this Prospectus and in your Contract. Please review Appendix B for any variations from standard Contract provisions that may apply to your Contract based on the state in which your Contract was issued. Your registered representativefinancial professional can provide you with more information about those state variations.

Purchasing a Contract

We offer the Contract to individuals, certain retirement plans, and other entities. To purchase a Contract, you and the Annuitant must be at least Age 21 and no older than ageAge 85.

We sell the Contract through registered representativesfinancial professionals who are also are agents of the Company. To start the purchase process, you must submit an application to your registered representative.financial professional. The Purchase Payment must either be paid at the Company’s Administrative Office or delivered to your registered representative.financial professional. Your registered representativefinancial professional will then forward your completed application and Purchase Payment (if

14


applicable) to us. After we receive a completed application, Purchase Payment, and all other information necessary to process a purchase order in Good Order, we will begin the process of issuing the Contract. ThereContract on the next Contract Issue Date available. The selling firm’s determination of whether the Contract is suitable for you may be delays indelay our processing of your application because of delays in receipt of your application from the selling firm or because of delays in determining whether your Contract is suitable to you.application. Any such delays will affect when we issue your Contract. If the application for a Contract is properly completed and is accompanied by all the information necessary to process it, including payment of the Purchase Payment, the Purchase Payment will be allocated to the Allocation Options you choose on the next available Contract Issue Date.

IMPORTANT: You may use the Contract with certain tax qualified retirement plans (“IRAs”IRA”). The Contract includes attributes such as tax deferral on accumulated earnings. Qualified retirement plans provide their own tax deferral benefit; the purchase of this Contract does not provide additional tax deferral benefits beyond those provided in the qualified retirement plan. Accordingly, if you are purchasing this Contract through a qualified retirement plan, you should consider purchasing the Contract for its other features such as Credited Index Interest that is locked-in each Contract Year, and other non-tax related benefits. Please consult a tax adviser for information specific to your circumstances to determine whether the Contract is an appropriate investment for you.

If mandated by applicable law, including Federal laws designed to counter terrorism and prevent money laundering, we may be required to reject your Purchase Payment. We may also be required to provide additional information about you or your Contract to government regulators. In addition, we may be required to block an Owner’s Contract and thereby refuse to honor any request for transfers, partial withdrawals, surrender, GLWB Payments, income payments, and Death Benefit payments, until instructions are received from the appropriate government regulator.

Tax-Free “Section 1035” Exchanges

You can generally exchange one annuity contract for another in a “tax-free exchange” under Section 1035 of the Internal Revenue Code. Before making an exchange, you should compare both contracts carefully. Remember that if you exchange another contract for the one described in this Prospectus, you might have to pay a Surrender Charge or negative Market Value Adjustment on the existing contract. If the exchange does not qualify for Section 1035 tax treatment, you may have to pay federal income tax, including a possible penalty tax, on your old contract. There will be a new Surrender Charge Period for this Contract and other charges may be higher (or lower) and the benefits may be different. There may be delays in our processing of the exchange. You should not exchange another contract for this one unless you determine, after knowing all the facts that the exchange is in your best interest. In general, the person selling you this Contract will earn a commission from us.

10


Owner

The Owner meansis the owner namedperson(s) (or entity) who own(s) the Contract and, in the application or any successorcase of a natural person(s), whose death determines whether the Death Benefit is payable. While the Owner is living, the Owner is also the person(s) (or entity) who receives income payments during the Payout Period while the Annuitant is also living. If there are multiple Owners, each Owner will have equal ownership of the Contract and all references to Owner will mean Joint Owners. Joint Owners are only allowed if ownership has been assigned. the Owner and Joint Owner are Spouses. Additionally, Joint Owners are only allowed for non-qualified annuities.

The Owner names the Annuitant or Joint Annuitants. If the Owner is not a natural person, a Joint Owner and Joint Annuitant cannot be named. All rights under the Contract may be exercised by the Owner, subject to the rights of any other Owner and any irrevocably namedIrrevocable Beneficiary.

Any change Assignment of the Contract by the Owner is not permitted unless the state in which the Contract is issued requires us to provide the Owner the right to assign the Contract, as identified in Appendix B to this Prospectus. In that case, the Owner must provide us with advance Written Notice of the assignment and the assignment is subject to our acceptanceapproval, unless those requirements are inconsistent with the law of the state in which the Contract is issued.

15


The Owner may request to change the Owner at any time before the Payout Date. If a Joint Owner is changed (or is named), the Joint Owner must be the Owner’s Spouse. If an Owner is added or changed, the amount that will be paid upon the death of the new Owner will be impacted as described in the “Death Benefit” section in this Prospectus. The Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit may also be impacted as described in the “Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit” section in this Prospectus. Any change of Owner must be made by Authorized Request and weis subject to our acceptance. We reserve the right to refuse such change on a non-discriminatory basis. Unless otherwise specified by the Owner, such change, if accepted by us, will take effect as of the date the Authorized Request was signed. We are not liable for any payment we make or action we take before we receive the Authorized Request.

If an Owner who is a natural person dies during the Annuitant’s lifetime, theAccumulation Period, your Beneficiary is entitled to thea Death Benefit. The Death Benefit becomes payable at the death of the Owner (if there are Joint Owners, the Death Benefit will become payable after the firstIf you have a Joint Owner, dies). If an Owner is not a natural person and the Annuitant dies before the Payout Date, the Death Benefit will be payable toavailable when the Beneficiary.first Joint Owner dies. If you havethere is a surviving Owner and he or she is the Spouse of the deceased, the surviving Spouse will be treated as the sole primary Beneficiary, and any questions concerning the criteria you should use when choosing Annuitants under the Contract, consult your registered representative.other designated Beneficiary will be treated as a contingent Beneficiary.

Divorce

In the event of divorce, the former spouseSpouse must provide a copy of the divorce decree (or a qualified domestic relations order if it is a qualified plan) to us. The terms of the decree/order must identify the Contract and specify how the Contract Value should be allocated among the former spouses.Spouses.

BeneficiaryAnnuitant

You name a Beneficiary when you apply forThe Annuitant is the natural person(s) whose life (or lives) determines the income payment amount payable under the Contract. AtIf the Owner is a natural person, the Owner may change the Annuitant at any time provided it is at least 30 days before the Payout Date by Authorized Request. Unless otherwise specified by the Owner, such change will take effect as of the date the Authorized Request was signed. We are not liable for any payment we make or action we take before we receive the Authorized Request. If you change the Annuitant, the Payout Date will not change. If the Owner is not a natural person, the Annuitant cannot be changed. The Annuitant does not have any rights under the Contract.

Eligible Person

An Eligible Person(s) is the natural person(s) who can be selected as the Covered Person(s) under the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit. Eligible Person(s) are determined on the Contract Issue Date.

If there is a sole Owner of the Contract:
The Owner is an Eligible Person.
If the Owner and the sole primary Beneficiary are Spouses, the sole primary Beneficiary is also an Eligible Person.
If you select single life GLWB Payments, the Owner must be designated as the Covered Person.
If there are Joint Owners:
Both Owners are Eligible Persons.
The Owners must be Spouses.
If you select single life GLWB Payments, either Owner can be designated as the Covered Person.
If the Owner is not a natural person:
The Annuitant is an Eligible Person.
The Annuitant must be designated as the Covered Person.
A joint Annuitant is not permissible.
Joint GLWB Payments cannot be selected.

16


Covered Person

The Covered Person(s) is the natural person(s) whose Age and lifetime we base GLWB Payments on for the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit. The Covered Person(s) must be selected on the Contract Issue Date. If one Covered Person is selected, you have elected single life option rates. If two Covered Persons are selected, you have elected joint life option rates. After the Contract Issue Date, you cannot request to add, remove or replace a Covered Person, even if you add or change an Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary except as described in this Prospectus.

If a Covered Person is no longer an Owner, Joint Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary as required, we will remove that person from the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit and they will no longer be a Covered Person. Once we remove a Covered Person from the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit, the Covered Person cannot be reinstated.

If at any time joint Covered Persons are no longer Spouses, you must send us notice of the divorce by Authorized Request. Upon receipt of such notice, we will remove one former Spouse from the Contract as a Covered Person as indicated by the divorce or settlement decree, as applicable.

If a Covered Person is removed and one Covered Person still remains, the following will occur:

If the Covered Person was removed before the GLWB Payment Start Date, joint GLWB Payments will not be available and single life option rates will be used.
If the Owner is a natural person and joint GLWB Payments have already started, we will continue to pay joint GLWB Payments to the Owner as long as the remaining Covered Person is living.
If a Covered Person is removed and there is no other Covered Person remaining, the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit will terminate and GLWB Payments will cease.

Beneficiary

The Beneficiary is the person(s) (or entity) named by you to receive the proceeds payable upon your death. If there are Joint Owners and an Owner dies before the Payout Date, the surviving Spouse Owner will be treated as the sole primary Beneficiary and any other designated Beneficiary will be treated as a contingent Beneficiary. Prior to the Payout Date, if no Beneficiary survives the Owner, the proceeds will be paid to the Owner’s estate. If there is more than one Beneficiary, each Beneficiary will receive an equal share of the Death Benefit, unless otherwise specified by the Owner. If there are joint Owners and we are unable to determine that one of the joint Owners predeceased the other, we will treat the joint Owners as having died simultaneously. In that case, one-half of the Death Benefit will be payable to each Joint Owner’s estate.

You may change the Beneficiary by a Writtenan Authorized Request sent to us, or you may name one or more Beneficiaries. A change of Beneficiary will take effect on the date the WrittenAuthorized Request was signed. If there are multipleJoint Owners, each Owner must sign the WrittenAuthorized Request. In addition, any irrevocableIrrevocable Beneficiary or assignee must sign the WrittenAuthorized Request. Any change is subject toWe are not liable for any payment we make or other actionsaction we tooktake before we received the request to change the Beneficiary at our Administrative Office.

Before the Payout Date, if no Beneficiary survives the Owner, we will pay the Death Benefit proceeds to the Owner’s estate (if Joint Owners, the surviving Owner will receive the Death Benefit proceeds).Authorized Request.

Use care when naming Beneficiaries. If you have any questions concerning the criteria you should use when choosing Beneficiaries, consult your registered representative.financial professional.

Right to Examine

You may cancel your Contract and return it to your registered representativefinancial professional or to us within a certain number of days after you receive the Contract and receive a refund of either the Purchase Payment you paid less

17


withdrawals or your Contract Value, depending uponon the state in which your Contract was issued. However, ifIf the Contract Value exceeds your Purchase Payment you will receive the Contract Value regardless of where the Contract was issued. If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Contract Value unless the state in which the Contract was issued requires that the Purchase Payment less withdrawals be returned. If your Contract is an IRA, under the Internal Revenue Code, we will refund the greater of your Purchase Payment.Payment less withdrawals or your Contract Value. Generally, you must return your Contract within 10 days of receipt (30 days if it is a replacement contract), but some states may permit a longerdifferent period for you to return your Contract. Refunds will not be subject to a Surrender Charge or Market Value Adjustment and will be paid within seven days following the date of cancellation. State variations are described in Appendix B to this Prospectus.

 
allocating your Purchase PaymentALLOCATING YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENT
 

Purchase Payment

If the application for a Contract is in Good Order, which includes our receipt of the Purchase Payment, we will issue the Contract on the next available Contract Issue Date. Contract Issue Date’s offered by the Company are currently the 10th and 25th of each month unless those days fall on a non-Business Day. In that case, we issue the Contract on the next Business Day.

The minimum initial Purchase Payment for a Non-Qualified or Qualified Contract is $5,000. Our approval is required for a$10,000. A Purchase Payment that equals or exceeds $1 million requires our prior approval. Multiple Contracts owned by the same individual where the sum of $1,000,000the Purchase Payments equals or more. We do not allow any paymentsexceeds $1 million also require our prior approval.

Purchase Payment and Allocation

There are two Allocation Levels available under the Contract, after the initial Purchase Payment.

11


among which you may allocate your Purchase Payment Allocationand Contract Value: Level A (Allocation Option Level), and Level R (Risk Control Account Level).

At Level A, the allocation is split between the available Allocation Options which include the Declared Rate Account and Risk Control Accounts that use one of the following reference Indices, the S&P 500 Index, the Russell 2000 Index, and the MSCI EAFE Index;
At Level R, the allocation only applies to Risk Control Accounts, and the allocation is split among Risk Control Accounts with the same reference Index.

You must specify the percentage of your Purchase Payment to be allocated to each Risk Control AccountAllocation Level on the Contract Issue Date. The amount you direct to a particular Risk Control Accountan Allocation Level must be in whole percentages from 1%0% to 100% of the Purchase Payment and your total allocation must equal 100% of the Purchase Payment. You may allocate your Purchase Paymentat each Allocation Level. The maximum percentage that can be allocated to eithereach Allocation Option or both Risk Control Accounts.

We will only issue the Contract on the 10th and 25th of each month (an “Issue Date”)Account is 100%. If we receive your Purchase Payment and all necessary paperwork to process your Contract before the Issue Date, we will deposit your Purchase Payment in our General Account. We then will transfer your Purchase Payment, based on the allocation you specified, to the Risk Control AccountsThe maximum percentage is established on the Contract Issue Date. YourDate and will not change during the life of the Contract.

The Purchase Payment will beginbe allocated on the Contract Issue Date to earn Index Interest, if any, only after it has been allocatedthe Allocation Options (according to the allocation instructions on file with us for Level A and Level R) as of your Allocation Option Start Date. Your initial Allocation Option Start Date is the Contract Issue Date.

Transactions that are scheduled to occur on a day that the Accumulation Credit Factor for a Risk Control Account(s).Account is not available will be processed on the next Business Day at the Accumulation Credit Factor for the Risk Control Account next determined.

18


Automatic Rebalancing

automatic rebalance program

Each Contract Anniversary, duringDuring the Initial IndexAccumulation Period, we will automatically rebalance your Contract Value among the Riskbetween Level A (Allocation Option Level) and Level R (Risk Control AccountsAccount Level) based on your most recent allocation instructions that we have on file or the allocation applied on the Contract Issue Date if you have not made any additional allocation change requests. This means, for example, that if your allocation instructions require that 50% of your Contract Value be allocated to the Secure Account and 50% of your Contract Value be allocated to the Growth Account, we will transfer your Contract Values between those Accounts on the Contract Anniversary so that 50% of your Contract Value has been allocated to both the Secure Account and Growth Account following the transfer.

You may change your allocation of Contract Value between the Risk Control Accounts once each Contract Year.Anniversary. Any new allocation change request will supersede any prior allocation change requests you made. There

For example, assume Level A allocations are no limits80% to Risk Control Accounts that use the S&P 500 Index as a reference Index and 20% to the Declared Rate Account. Assume Level R allocations for the S&P 500 Index are 40% to the Secure Account and 60% to the Growth Account. If on the number of requestsContract Anniversary the total Contract Value is $100,000, then after rebalancing, $80,000 will be allocated to Risk Control Accounts that you can make. However,use the S&P 500 Index (80% x $100,000) and $20,000 will be allocated to the Declared Rate Account (20% x $100,000). Then, within Risk Control Accounts that use the S&P 500 Index, $32,000 will be allocated to the Secure Account (40% x $80,000) and $48,000 will be allocated to the Growth Account (60% x $80,000).

Your Authorized Request to change your latestallocation instructions will take effect on the next Contract Anniversary. Your request must be received at our Administrative Office at least twoone Business DaysDay prior to yourthe Contract Anniversary for the new instructions to be effective fortake effect as of that Contract Anniversary.date. If we do not receive your Written Request in time forsuch request at least one Business Day prior to the next Contract Anniversary, your change in allocation instructions will not be effective onuntil the followingnext Contract Anniversary.

Please note that at any time the Index Interest Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account is less than the bailout rate specified in the Bailout Provision (as shown on your contract data page,the Contract Data Page), we may, at our discretion, restrict transfersallocations into that Risk Control Account and may not reallocate your Contract Value between Risk Control Accounts under the Automatic Rebalance Program. (See “accessAccount. See “Access to your moneyYour Money – Bailout Provision” for more details.)

 
contract valueCONTRACT VALUE
 

On the Contract Issue Date, your Contract Value equals the Purchase Payment. Each Risk Control Account is established by an allocation of a portion or all of your Purchase Payment to that Account. After the Contract Issue Date, during the Accumulation Period, your Contract Value will equal the sum of thetotal Risk Control Account Values.Value plus the total Declared Rate Account Value.

12Allocation Option Maturity Date

On the Allocation Option Maturity Date, you may make a withdrawal of your Contract Value by Authorized Request, without incurring a Market Value Adjustment or Surrender Charge. If you intend to make a withdrawal from the Contract, an Authorized Request must be received by us at least one Business Day prior to the Allocation Option Maturity Date, otherwise the request is not in Good Order and no withdrawal will occur based on such request. In that case, your Contract Value will be allocated to a new Allocation Option for another six-year term.

Withdrawals on the Allocation Option Maturity Date may be considered Excess Withdrawals and may impact your GLWB Benefit Base, GLWB Payment, and Death Benefit.

19


 
risk control accountsDECLARED RATE ACCOUNT OPTION
 

You may allocate your Purchase Payment to one or both of the two Risk Control AccountsThe Declared Rate Separate Account is a non-registered Separate Account in which we currently make available, the Secure Account and the Growth Account. We hold reserves for our guarantees attributable to annuity contracts that offer declared rate accounts. The assets in the Index InterestDeclared Rate Floor and Cap guarantees for amounts allocatedSeparate Account are equal to the Risk Control Accountsreserves and other liabilities of the contracts supported by the Declared Rate Separate Account and are not chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business that we conduct. We have the right to transfer to our General Account any assets of the Declared Rate Separate Account that are in the Separate Account.excess of such reserves and other Contract liabilities. Our General Account assets are also available to meet the guarantees under the Contract, including the Declared Rate Separate Account, as well as our other general obligations. The guarantees in this Contract are subject to the Company’s financial strength and claims-paying ability.

You may allocate all or a portion of your Purchase Payment and Contract Value to the Declared Rate Account. Contract Value allocated to the Declared Rate Account becomes part of the Declared Rate Account Value and is credited with interest at the end of each business day. The applicable daily interest credited, when compounded, equals the Interest Rate. The Interest Rate is available two weeks in advance of the Allocation Option Start Date and will not change for the duration of the Allocation Option Period. We may declare a new Interest Rate for the Allocation Option Start Date for each subsequent Allocation Option Period of six years. We will apply Credited Indexnotify you of such change prior to the Allocation Option Start Date. The Interest Rate declared will never be less than the Minimum Interest Rate. The Minimum Interest Rate will not change during the life of the Contract.

We do not assess a Contract Fee against Contract Value held in the Declared Rate Account. The GLWB Rider Fee and any other fees will be assessed Pro Rata.

Declared Rate Account Value

The Contract Value for the Declared Rate Account Allocation Option is equal to:

The amount initially allocated or transferred to the Declared Rate Account plus the interest subsequently credited to that amount; less
Any withdrawals (including any Surrender Charge and negative Market Value Adjustment); less
A transfer as part of automatic rebalancing; less
The Pro Rata portion of any applicable fees or charges under the Contract; plus
Any positive Market Value Adjustment from a withdrawal.

RISK CONTROL ACCOUNT OPTION

The Risk Control Separate Account is a non-registered Separate Account in which we hold reserves for our guarantees attributable to annuity contracts that offer risk control accounts. The assets in the Risk Control Separate Account are equal to the reserves and other liabilities of the contracts supported by the Risk Control Separate Account and are not chargeable with liabilities arising out of any other business that we conduct. We have the right to transfer to our General Account any assets of the Risk Control Separate Account that are in excess of such reserves and other Contract liabilities. Our General Account assets are also available to meet the guarantees under the Contract, including the Risk Control Separate Account, as well as our other general obligations. The guarantees in this Contract are subject to the Company’s financial strength and claims-paying ability.

You may allocate all or a portion of your Purchase Payment and Contract Value to the Risk Control Accounts we make available. The portion of the Contract Value allocated to a Risk Control Account on a Contract Anniversarybecomes part of the Risk Control Account Value and is credited with interest based in part on the percentage changeinvestment performance of external indices. Currently, we offer two types of Risk Control Accounts: a Secure Account and a Growth Account. We hold reserves in the Risk Control Separate Account for amounts allocated to the Risk Control Accounts in support of the guarantees associated with the Index duringRate Floor and Index Rate Cap Your Risk Control Account Value reflects, in part, the Contract Year just completed,performance of the reference Index, subject to the interest rate calculation methodology,applicable Index Interest Rate Cap and Index Interest Rate Floor. In the case of a partial withdrawal, surrender, annuitization or death of the Owner that occurs during a Contract Year on a date other than a Contract Anniversary, we will apply Credited Index Interest to your Contract Value allocated toWhen funds are

20


withdrawn from a Risk Control Account based onprior to the percentage change in the Index from the beginningContract Anniversary for a surrender, partial withdrawal, transfer, annuitization or payment of the Contract YearDeath Benefit, index interest is calculated up to the date of withdrawal as described below.

The performance of each Index associated with the partial withdrawal, surrender, annuitization or death, as applicable, subject to the interest rate calculation methodology, Index Interest Rate Cap and Index Interest Rate Floor. Please note that the IndexRisk Control Accounts does not include dividends paid on the stocks comprising the Index, and therefore, the performance of the Index does not reflect the full performance of those underlying securities. The Index Rate of Return is determined on each Contract Anniversary and is measured over the Contract Year. Because index interest is calculated on a single point in time you may experience negative or flat performance even though the Index experienced gains through some, or most, of the Contract Year.

Risk Control Account Value

Your Contract Value allocated to the Risk Control Accounts for any Valuation Period is equal to the sum of your Risk Control Account Value in each Risk Control Account. The Risk Control Account Value for each Risk Control Account is equal to:

The number of that Risk Control Account’s Accumulation Credits credited to you; multiplied by
The Accumulation Credit Factor for that Risk Control Account at the end of the Valuation Period for which the determination is being made.

Accumulation Credit Factors. The Accumulation Credit Factor for each Risk Control Account is arbitrarily set initially at $10 as of each Allocation Option Start Date. Thereafter, the Accumulation Credit Factor for the Risk Control Account at the end of each Valuation Period is determined by multiplying (a) by (b) and subtracting (c) (i.e., a x b – c), where:

(a)=  The Accumulation Credit Factor for the Risk Control Account at the start of the Contract Year; and
(b)=  The Index Rate of Return (defined below); and
(c)=  The Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee (defined below) multiplied by the number of days that have passed since the last Contract Anniversary.

The Index Rate of Return for each Risk Control Account on any Business Day is equal to the change in the Index for the current Contract Year, adjusted for the Index Rate Cap or Index Rate Floor. Specifically, it is calculated as (A / B), where:

A = Adjusted Index Value (defined below) as of the current Business Day; and
B = The Initial Index Value as of the start of the current Contract Year. If an Allocation Option Start Date or Contract Anniversary does not fall on a Business Day, the Initial Index Value for the next Business Day will be used.

We use the Index Rate of Return to determine the interest we credit, if any, to the Risk Control Account Value.

The “Adjusted Index Value” is the Closing Index Value adjusted for the Index Rate Cap or Index Rate Floor for the current Contract Year. The Adjusted Index Value is calculated each time the Index Rate of Return is calculated. This can be as frequently as daily and occurs on each Contract Anniversary or on any date when a partial withdrawal, GLWB Payment, surrender, Death Benefit or annuitization is processed. The Closing Index Value is the closing value of an Index as of a Business Day. If the closing value of the Index is not published on that date, we will use the closing value of the Index from the next day on which the closing value of the Index is published. The Adjusted Index Value for each Risk Control Account is calculated as follows:

21


If the Closing Index Value is greater than the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Cap), then the Adjusted Index Value will equal the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Cap).
If the Closing Index Value is less than the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Floor), then the Adjusted Index Value will equal the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Floor).
If the Closing Index Value is less than the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Cap) but more than the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Floor), then the Adjusted Index Value will equal the Closing Index Value.

For example, assume the following:
Initial Index Value = 2,000
Index Rate Cap = 15%
Index Rate Floor = -10%
At the time the Index Rate of Return is calculated, the Adjusted Index Value will be:
Scenario 1: Closing Index Value is greater than Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Cap)
oClosing Index Value = 2,400
o2,400 is greater than 2,300 (2,000 x (1 + 0.15)) so the Adjusted Index Value is equal to 2,300.
Scenario 2: Closing Index Value is less than Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Floor)
oClosing Index Value = 1,700
o1,700 is less than 1,800 (2,000 x (1 – 0.10)) so the Adjusted Index Value is equal to 1,800.
Scenario 3: Closing Index Value is less than Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Cap) but more than Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Floor)
oClosing Index Value = 2,200
o2,200 is less than 2,300 (2,000 x (1 + 0.15)) and greater than 1,800 (2,000 x (1 – 0.10)) so the Adjusted Index Value is equal to 2,200.

The Adjusted Index Value will never exceed the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Cap) and will never be lower than the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Rate Floor).

The Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee is calculated as (a) the Contract Fee divided by (b) the number of days in the Contract Year multiplied by (c) the Accumulation Credit Factor for the Risk Control Account at the start of the Contract Year (i.e. a / b x c).

For example, assume the following:

Contract Fee = 0.75%
Number of days in the Contract Year = 365
Accumulation Credit Factor for the Risk Control Account at the start of the Contract Year = 10.00

Then, the Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee = 0.75% / 365 x 10.00 = 0.000205479.

22


Accumulation Credits. In order to establish a Risk Control Account, the Purchase Payment or Contract Value transferred to the Risk Control Accounts is converted into Accumulation Credits. The number of Accumulation Credits credited to each Risk Control Account is determined by dividing the dollar amount directed to each Risk Control Account by the Accumulation Credit Factor as of the end of the Valuation Period for which the Purchase Payment or Contract Value transfer is received.

We will redeem Accumulation Credits from a Risk Control Account upon (i) partial withdrawal or full surrender (including any applicable Surrender Charge and negative Market Value Adjustment); (ii) a transfer from the Risk Control Account as part of automatic rebalancing; (iii) payment of the Death Benefit; (iv) the Payout Date; (v) the deduction of the GLWB Rider Fee; (vi) and GLWB Payments. We redeem Accumulation Credits as of the end of the Valuation Period (or effective date of the transfer) in which we receive your request for surrender or partial withdrawal or your Beneficiary’s request for payment of the Death Benefit in Good Order unless you or your Beneficiary specify a later date.

Setting the Index Rate Cap and the Index Rate Floor for the Secure Account and the Growth Account. We consider various factors in determining the Index Rate Caps and Index Rate Floors, including investment returns available at the time that we issue the Contract, the costs of our risk management techniques, sales commissions, administrative expenses, regulatory and tax requirements, general economic trends, and competitive factors. We determine the Index Rate Cap and the Index Rate Floor at our sole discretion. We set the Index Rate Cap on each Contract Anniversary for the subsequent Contract Year and guarantee the Index Rate Cap for the duration of the Contract Year. We guarantee the Index Rate Floor for the life of your Contract. We will forward advance written notice to Owners of any change in the Index Rate Cap for the subsequent Contract Year at least two weeks prior to Contract Anniversary. This notice will describe the Owner’s right to transfer Contract Value between Allocation Options and the right to exercise the Bailout Provision, if applicable. The Index Rate Cap will always be positive and will be subject to a guaranteed minimum of 1% and a maximum of 75%.

The Index Rate Floor is the minimum Index Rate of Return used as part of the Accumulation Credit Factor calculation for determining the value of a Risk Control Account prior to deduction of the Contract Fee. This rate will not change during the life of your Contract. The Secure Account has an Index Rate Floor of 0%, and the Growth Account has an Index Rate Floor of-10%. Although negative investment performance is limited by the Index Rate Floor, you could lose more than 10% due to the Contract Fee, the GWLB Rider Fee, Surrender Charges, a negative Market Value Adjustment, and federal income tax penalties.

Examples. The following three examples illustrate how investment performance of the underlying stocks.reference Index of the Secure and Growth Account is applied in crediting interest to the Risk Control Accounts through the Accumulation Credit Factor based on different levels of Index performance. The change in the value of the Accumulation Credit Factor reflects the application of the Index Rate of Return and a reduction for the Contract Fee. No withdrawals are assumed to occur under these examples and all values are determined on Contract Anniversaries. The examples assume the Index Rate Caps remain unchanged since Contract issue. The examples illustrate hypothetical circumstances solely for the purpose of demonstrating Risk Control Account calculations and are not intended as estimates of future performance of the Index.

Example 1: This example illustrates how interest would be credited based on the return of the Index and subject to the Index Rate Cap and Index Rate Floor. In this example, the return on the Index is greater than the Index Rate Cap and Index Rate Floor.

Assume the following information:
As of the Allocation Option Start Date:
Allocation Option Start Date: 10/10/2017
Initial Index Value: 1,000
Contract Fee: 0.75%
S&P 500 Secure Account
oAccount Value: $75,000

23


oAccumulation Credit Factor: $10
oAccumulation Credits: 7,500
oIndex Rate Floor: 0.00%
oIndex Rate Cap: 6.00%
S&P 500 Growth Account
oAccount Value: $25,000
oAccumulation Credit Factor: $10
oAccumulation Credits: 2,500
oIndex Rate Floor: -10.00%
oIndex Rate Cap: 15.00%
As of the Contract Anniversary:
Contract Anniversary: 10/10/2018
Closing Index Value: 1,200
Days in Contract Year: 365

Step 1: Calculate the Adjusted Index Value
The Initial Index Value is 1,000 and the Closing Index Value is 1,200. The Closing Index Value is greater than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the result of 1 plus the Index Rate Cap for both the Secure and Growth Accounts. Therefore, the Adjusted Index Value equals the Initial Index Value multiplied by the result of 1 plus the Index Rate Cap. For the Secure Account, this is calculated as 1,000 multiplied by the result of 1 plus 0.06 which equals 1,060. For the Growth Account, this is calculated as 1,000 multiplied by the result of 1 plus 0.15 which equals 1,150.

Step 2: Calculate the Index Rate of Return
The Index Rate of Return is equal to the Adjusted Index Value divided by the Initial Index Value. For the Secure Account, this is calculated as 1,060 divided by 1,000 which equals 1.06 (6% increase from Initial Index Value). For the Growth Account, this is calculated as 1,150 divided by 1,000 which equals 1.15 (15% increase from Initial Index Value).

Step 3: Calculate the Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee
The Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee is equal to the Contract Fee divided by the number of days in the Contract Year multiplied by the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year. For both the Secure and Growth Accounts, this is equal to 0.75% divided by 365 multiplied by $10 which equals $0.000205479.

Step 4: Calculate the Accumulation Credit Factor
The Accumulation Credit Factor is equal to the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year multiplied by the Index Rate of Return less the result of the Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee multiplied by the number of days that have passed since the last Contract Anniversary. For the Secure Account, this is equal to $10 multiplied by 1.06 less the result of $0.000205479 multiplied by 365 which equals $10.53. For the Growth Account, this is equal to $10 multiplied by 1.15 less the result of $0.000205479 multiplied by 365 which equals $11.43.

Step 5: Calculate the Risk Control Account Value.
The Risk Control Account Value is equal to the number of Accumulation Credits multiplied by the ending Accumulation Credit Factor. For the Secure Account, this is equal to 7,500 multiplied by $10.53 which equals $78,937.50. For the Growth Account, this is equal to 2,500 multiplied by $11.43 which equals $25,562.50. This is an increase of $3,937.50 for the Secure Account ($78,937.50 – $75,000 = $3,937.50) and an increase of $3,562.50 for the Growth Account ($25,562.50 – $25,000 = $3,562.50).

Example 2: This example illustrates how interest would be credited based on the return of the Index and subject to the Index Rate Cap and Index Rate Floor. In this example, the return on the Index is less than the Index Rate Cap and greater than the Index Rate Floor.

Assume the following information:

24


As of the Allocation Option Start Date:
Allocation Option Start Date: 10/10/2017
Initial Index Value: 1,000
Contract Fee: 0.75%
S&P 500 Secure Account
oAccount Value: $75,000
oAccumulation Credit Factor: $10
oAccumulation Credits: 7,500
oIndex Rate Floor: 0.00%
oIndex Rate Cap: 6.00%
S&P 500 Growth Account
oAccount Value: $25,000
oAccumulation Credit Factor: $10
oAccumulation Credits: 2,500
oIndex Rate Floor: -10.00%
oIndex Rate Cap: 15.00%
As of the Contract Anniversary:
Contract Anniversary: 10/10/2018
Closing Index Value: 1,030
Days in Contract Year: 365

Step 1: Calculate the Adjusted Index Value
The Initial Index Value is 1,000 and the Closing Index Value is 1,030. The Closing Index Value is less than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the result of 1 plus the Index Rate Cap, but it is more than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the result of 1 plus the Index Rate Floor for both the Secure and Growth Accounts. Therefore, the Adjusted Index Value equals the Closing Index Value which is 1,030.

Step 2: Calculate the Index Rate of Return
The Index Rate of Return is equal to the Adjusted Index Value divided by the Initial Index Value. For the Secure Account, this is calculated as 1,030 divided by 1,000 which equals 1.03 (3% increase from Initial Index Value). For the Growth Account, this is calculated as 1,030 divided by 1,000 which equals 1.03 (3% increase from Initial Index Value).

Step 3: Calculate the Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee
The Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee is equal to the Contract Fee divided by the number of days in the Contract Year multiplied by the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year. For both the Secure and Growth Accounts, this is equal to 0.75% divided by 365 multiplied by $10 which equals $0.000205479.

Step 4: Calculate the Accumulation Credit Factor
The Accumulation Credit Factor is equal to the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year multiplied by the Index Rate of Return less the result of the Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee multiplied by the number of days that have passed since the last Contract Anniversary. For the Secure Account, this is equal to $10 multiplied by 1.03 less the result of $0.000205479 multiplied by 365 which equals $10.225. For the Growth Account, this is equal to $10 multiplied by 1.03 less the result of $0.000205479 multiplied by 365 which equals $10.225.

Step 5: Calculate the Risk Control Account Value.
The Risk Control Account Value is equal to the number of Accumulation Credits multiplied by the ending Accumulation Credit Factor. For the Secure Account, this is equal to 7,500 multiplied by $10.225 which equals $76,687.50. For the Growth Account, this is equal to 2,500 multiplied by $10.225 which equals $25,562.50. This is an increase of $1,687.50 for the Secure Account ($76,687.50 – $75,000 = $1,687.50) and an increase of $562.50 for the Growth Account ($25,562.50 – $25,000 = $562.50).

25


Example 3: This example illustrates how interest would be credited based on the return of the Index and subject to the Index Rate Cap and Index Rate Floor. In this example, the return on the Index is less than the Index Rate Floor.

Assume the following information:

As of the Allocation Option Start Date:
Allocation Option Start Date: 10/10/2017
Initial Index Value: 1,000
Contract Fee: 0.75%
S&P 500 Secure Account
oAccount Value: $75,000
oAccumulation Credit Factor: $10
oAccumulation Credits: 7,500
oIndex Rate Floor: 0.00%
oIndex Rate Cap: 6.00%
S&P 500 Growth Account
oAccount Value: $25,000
oAccumulation Credit Factor: $10
oAccumulation Credits: 2,500
oIndex Rate Floor: -10.00%
oIndex Rate Cap: 15.00%
As of the Contract Anniversary:
Contract Anniversary: 10/10/2018
Closing Index Value: 850
Days in Contract Year: 365

Step 1: Calculate the Adjusted Index Value
The Initial Index Value is 1,000 and the Closing Index Value is 850. The Closing Index Value is less than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the result of 1 plus the Index Rate Floor for both the Secure and Growth Accounts. Therefore, the Adjusted Index Value equals the Initial Index Value multiplied by the result of 1 plus the Index Rate Floor. For the Secure Account, this is calculated as 1,000 multiplied by the result of 1 plus 0.00 which equals 1,000. For the Growth Account, this is calculated as 1,000 multiplied by the result of 1 plus -0.10 which equals 900.

Step 2: Calculate the Index Rate of Return
The Index Rate of Return is equal to the Adjusted Index Value divided by the Initial Index Value. For the Secure Account, this is calculated as 1,000 divided by 1,000 which equals 1.00 (0% increase from the Initial Index Value). For the Growth Account, this is calculated as 1,000 divided by 900 which equals 0.90 (10% decrease from Initial Index Value).

Step 3: Calculate the Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee
The Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee is equal to the Contract Fee divided by the number of days in the Contract Year multiplied by the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year. For both the Secure and Growth Accounts, this is equal to 0.75% divided by 365 multiplied by $10 which equals $0.000205479.

Step 4: Calculate the Accumulation Credit Factor
The Accumulation Credit Factor is equal to the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year multiplied by the Index Rate of Return less the result of the Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee multiplied by the number of days that have passed since the last Contract Anniversary. For the Secure Account, this is equal to $10 multiplied by 1.00 less the result of $0.000205479 multiplied by 365 which equals $9.925. For the Growth Account, this is equal to $10 multiplied by 0.90 less the result of $0.000205479 multiplied by 365 which equals $8.925.

26


Step 5: Calculate the Risk Control Account Value.
The Risk Control Account Value is equal to the number of Accumulation Credits multiplied by the ending Accumulation Credit Factor. For the Secure Account, this is equal to 7,500 multiplied by $9.925 which equals $74,437.50. For the Growth Account, this is equal to 2,500 multiplied by $8.925 which equals $22,312.50. This is a decrease of $562.50 for the Secure Account ($74,437.60 – $75,000 = -$562.50) and a decrease of $2,687.50 for the Growth Account ($22,312.50 – $25,000 = -$2,687.50).

Addition or Substitution of an Index. The same Index will be used for each Risk Control Account for the duration of the Allocation Option Period. However, there is no guarantee that the Index will be available during the entire time you own your Contract. If: (i) the Index is discontinued, or (ii) the calculation of that Index is materially changed, we may substitute a suitable Index that will be used for the remainder of the Allocation Option Period. If we substitute an Index, the performance of the new Index may differ from the original Index. This, in turn, may affect the interest credited to the Risk Control Account and the interest you earn under the Contract. We will not substitute an Index until that Index has been approved by the insurance department in your state.

We reserve the right to add or substitute the Index. If we substitute the Index, the performance of the new Index may differ from the original Index. This, in turn, may affect the Credited Index Interestinterest you earn.

In the unlikely event that we substitute the Index, we will attempt to add a suitable alternative index as a replacementthat is substantially similar to the Index being replaced on the same day that we remove the Index. If a change in an Index is made during a Contract Year, Index interest will be calculated from the Contract Anniversary until the date that the Index ceased to be available and that interest credit will be added to or subtracted from the interest credit calculated for the substitute Index from the date of substitution until the next Contract Anniversary. If we are unable to do so, so thatsubstitute a new Index at the same time as an Index ceases to be available there ismay be a brief interval between the date on which we remove the Index and add a suitable alternative index as a replacement,replacement. In this situation, your Contract Value will continue to be allocated to the Risk Control Accounts. However, any Credited Index Interest we may credit to your Contract Value for that Contract Year will not reflect changes in the value of the Index or the replacement index during that interim period. If you take a partial withdrawal, GLWB Payment, surrender or annuitize the Contract, or die during the interim period, we will apply Credited Index Interest to your Contract Value allocated to a Risk Control Accounts based on the percentage change in the Index from the beginning of the Contract Year to the date on which the Index became unavailable under the Contract, subject to the interest rate calculation methodology, Index Interest Rate Cap and Index Interest Rate Floor.Contract.

After the Initial Index Period, only the Secure Account will be available for the allocation of your Contract Value.

Your Contract Value allocated to a Risk Control Account (“Risk Control Account Value”) equals:

Your Risk Control Account Value as of the last Contract Anniversary; plus
Any Credited Index Interest applied to Risk Control Account Value during the current Contract Year; minus
Gross Withdrawals from your Risk Control Account Value (the sum of all partial withdrawals taken since the last Contract Anniversary, which includes all Surrender Charges and adjusted for any MVA).

Your Risk Control Account Value as of the last Contract Anniversary equals your Risk Control Account Value at the beginning of the current Contract Year.

13


Interest Rate Calculation Methodology.  Each Risk Control Account uses an annual point-to-point interest rate calculation methodology to determine the amount of Credited Index Interest. Under the annual point-to-point method, the Credited Index Interest, if any, is measured based on the percentage change in the Index over a Contract Year, a one year period. Credited Index Interest is subject to an:

Index Interest Rate Cap, which is the maximum rate that we will use in the calculation of Credited Index Interest; and
Index Interest Rate Floor, which is the minimum interest rate that we will use in the calculation of Credited Index Interest.

Credited Index Interest. We use Credited Index Interest to calculate Contract Value. We calculate Credited Index Interest on each Contract Anniversary and at the time of partial withdrawal, surrender, death and annuitization. Credited Index Interest is based on two factors: the Credited Index Interest Rate and your Risk Control Account Value. Specifically, Credited Index Interest equals the Credited Index Interest Rate multiplied by your Risk Control Account Value as of the last Contract Anniversary. Examples of how the Credited Index Interest Rate and Credited Index Interest are calculated are set forth on pages 16 and 17 of the Prospectus.

The Credited Index Interest Rate for a Risk Control Account equals:

(A/B) – 1 where:

A = the Adjusted Index Value as of the current date; and

B = the later of the Adjusted Index Value as of the last partial withdrawal taken in the current Contract Year. If no partial withdrawals have been taken in the current Contract Year, this will be equal to the Initial Index Value.

You can find the Credited Index Interest applied to your Contract Value on the annual statement that we will forward to you following your Contract Anniversary. You may also find the Credited Index Interest that has accrued to your Contract Value prior to a Contract Anniversary by calling the Customer Service Center toll-free telephone number (800.798.5500) or by viewing on-line at http://eservice.cunamutual.com.

Adjusted Index Value. The Adjusted Index Value depends on the Unadjusted Index Value (or the last Adjusted Index Value in the case where one or more partial withdrawals are made in a Contract Year). The Adjusted Index Value is calculated each time Credited Index Interest is calculated. This can be as frequently as daily and occurs on each Contract Anniversary or on any date when a partial withdrawal, surrender, Death Benefit or annuitization is processed. Unadjusted Index Value for a day on which we calculate Index Interest is the closing value of the Index on that date. If the closing value of the Index is not published on that date, we will use the closing value of the Index from the next day on which the closing value of the Index is published if you made no partial withdrawals during a Contract Year, we would calculate the Adjusted Index Value as follows:

If the Unadjusted Index Value is greater than the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Interest Rate Cap), then the Adjusted Index Value will equal the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Interest Rate Cap).

If the Unadjusted Index Value is less than the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Interest Floor), then the Adjusted Index Value will equal the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Interest Rate Floor).

If the Unadjusted Index Value is less than the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Interest Rate Cap) but more than the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Interest Rate Floor), then the Adjusted Index Value will equal the Unadjusted Index Value.

14


For example, assume the following:
Initial Index Value = 1,000
Index Interest Rate Cap = 15%
Index Interest Rate Floor = -10%
At the time Credited Index Interest is calculated, the Adjusted Index Value will be:
Scenario 1: Unadjusted Index Value = 1,200
o1,200 is greater than 1,150 (1,000 x (1 + 0.15)) so the Adjusted Index Value is equal to 1,150.
Scenario 2: Unadjusted Index Value = 850
o850 is less than 900 (1,000 x (1 – 0.10)) so the Adjusted Index Value is equal to 900.
Scenario 3: Unadjusted Index Value = 1,100
o1,100 is less than 1,150 (1,000 x (1 + 0.15)) and greater than 900 (1,000 x (1 – 0.10)) so the Adjusted Index Value is equal to 1,100.

The Adjusted Index Value will never exceed the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Interest Rate Cap) and will never be lower than the Initial Index Value multiplied by (1 + Index Interest Rate Floor).

Setting the Index Interest Rate Cap and the Index Interest Rate Floor. We consider various factors in determining the Index Interest Rate Caps and Index Interest Rate Floors, including investment returns available at the time that we issue the Contract, the costs of our risk management techniques, sales commissions, administrative expenses, regulatory and tax requirements, general economic trends, and competitive factors. We determine the Index Interest Rate Cap and the Index Interest Rate Floor at our sole discretion. We set the Index Interest Rate Cap at the beginning of each Contract Year and guarantee the Index Interest Rate Cap for the duration of the Contract Year. We guarantee the Index Interest Rate Floor for the life of your Contract.

Secure Account

If you choose to allocate all or a portion of your Purchase Payment or Contract Value to the Secure Account, we will determine Credited Index Interest based on the percentage change in the value of the Index from the Initial Index Value to the Contract Anniversary (or date of partial withdrawal, surrender, annuitization, or date of death of the Owner), subject to an Index Interest Rate Cap and an Index Interest Rate Floor.

Index Interest Rate Cap for the Secure Account. The Index Interest Rate Cap is the maximum rate that we will use in the calculation of Credited Index Interest. The initial Index Interest Rate Cap is shown on your contract data page. On the first Contract Anniversary and on any subsequent Contract Anniversary, we will declare an Index Interest Rate Cap which we guarantee for the next Contract Year. We will forward advance written notice to you of the Index Interest Rate Cap at least fifteen days prior to the start of that Contract Year. The notice will also describe your right to transfer Contract Value between the Secure Account and the Growth Account and your right to exercise the Bailout Provision, if applicable. The Index Interest Rate Cap for the Secure Account will always be positive and will never be less than the minimum Index Interest Rate Cap for the Secure Account equal to 1.0%.

Index Interest Rate Floor for the Secure Account. The Index Interest Rate Floor for the Secure Account is zero. As a result, Credited Index Interest will never be less than zero and your Contract Value in the Secure Account will never be reduced by the application of Credited Index Interest.

15


Growth Account

If you choose to allocate all or a portion of your Purchase Payment or Contract Value to the Growth Account, we will determine Credited Index Interest based on the percentage change in the value of the Index from the Initial Index Value to the Contract Anniversary (or date of partial withdrawal, surrender, annuitization, or date of death of the Owner), subject to an Index Interest Rate Cap and an Index Interest Rate Floor. The Growth Account is not available after the Initial Index Period Expiration Date.

Index Interest Rate Cap for the Growth Account. The Index Interest Rate Cap is the maximum rate that we will use in the calculation of Credited Index Interest. The initial Index Interest Rate Cap is shown on your contract data page. On the first Contract Anniversary and on any subsequent Contract Anniversary, we will declare an Index Interest Rate Cap which we guarantee for the next Contract Year. We will forward advance written notice to you of the Index Interest Rate Cap at least fifteen days prior to the start of that Contract Year. The notice will also describe your right to transfer Contract Value between the Secure Account and the Growth Account and your right to exercise the Bailout Provision, if applicable. The Index Interest Rate Cap for the Growth Account will always be positive and will never be less than the minimum Index Interest Rate Cap for the Growth Account equal to 1.0%.

Index Interest Rate Floor for the Growth Account. The Index Interest Rate Floor for the Growth Account is -10%. This means that your Credited Index Interest could be negative, but it will never be less than -10% regardless of whether the investment performance of the Index during the Contract Year is less than -10%. If the Credited Index Interest is negative, your Contract Value in the Growth Account would be reduced by the application of such negative Credited Index Interest.

The following three examples illustrate how we credit Index Interest to the Secure and Growth Accounts based on different levels of index performance. No withdrawals are assumed to occur under these examples.

Example 1:       This example illustrates the calculation of Credited Index Interest when Index performance is greater than the Index Interest Rate Cap and the Index Interest Rate Floor.

Assume the following information:

Prior Contract Anniversary:

9/30/2016

Initial Index Value:

1,000
Secure Account Value:$75,000

Index Interest Rate Floor:

0.00%

Index Interest Rate Cap:

4.00%
Growth Account Value:$25,000

Index Interest Rate Floor:

-10.00%

Index Interest Rate Cap:

14.00%
Contract Anniversary:9/30/2017
Unadjusted Index Value:1,200

The return on the Index is equal to the Unadjusted Index Value divided by the Initial Index Value minus 1. In this example, the return on the Index is 20% [(1.200/1.000)-1]. This is greater than the Index Interest Rate Cap and above the Index Interest Rate Floor for both the Secure and Growth Accounts. Thus, Index Interest for both Accounts is set at the cap level. Contract Value allocated to the Secure Account is credited with 4% Index Interest and Contract Value allocated to the Growth Account is credited with 14% Index Interest.

16


Example 2:       This example illustrates the calculation of Credited Index Interest when Index performance is less than the Index Interest Rate Cap and greater than the Index Interest Rate Floor.

Assume the following information:

Prior Contract Anniversary:

9/30/2016

Initial Index Value:

1,000
Secure Account Value:$75,000

Index Interest Rate Floor:

0.00%

Index Interest Rate Cap:

4.00%
Growth Account Value:$25,000

Index Interest Rate Floor:

-10.00%

Index Interest Rate Cap:

14.00%
Contract Anniversary:9/30/2017
Unadjusted Index Value:1,030

The return on the Index is equal to the Unadjusted Index Value divided by the Initial Index Value minus 1. In this example, the return on the Index is 3% [(1.030/1.000)-1]. This is below the Index Interest Rate Cap and above the Index Interest Rate Floor for both the Secure and Growth Accounts. Thus, Index Interest for both accounts is equal to the return on the Index. Contract Value allocated to the Secure Account is credited with 3% Index Interest and Contract Value allocated to the Growth Account is credited with 3% Index Interest.

Example 3:       This example illustrates the calculation of Credited Index Interest when Index performance is less than the Index Interest Rate Floor.

Assume the following information:

Prior Contract Anniversary:

9/30/2016

Initial Index Value:

1,000
Secure Account Value:$75,000

Index Interest Rate Floor:

0.00%

Index Interest Rate Cap:

4.00%
Growth Account Value:$25,000

Index Interest Rate Floor:

-10.00%

Index Interest Rate Cap:

14.00%
Contract Anniversary:9/30/2017
Unadjusted Index Value:800

The return on the Index is equal to the Unadjusted Index Value divided by the Initial Index Value minus 1. In this example, the return on the Index is -20% [(800/1.000)-1]. This is below the Index Interest Rate Floor for both the Secure and Growth Accounts. Thus, Index Interest for both Accounts is equal to the Index interest Rate Floor for each Risk Control Account. Contract Value allocated to the Secure Account is credited with 0% Index Interest and Contract Value allocated to the Growth Account is credited with -10% Index Interest. This results in negative Credited Index Interest of -$2,500 being applied to the Contract Value in the Growth Account and thus is a decline in the Contract Value allocated to the Growth Account of $2,500. No Credited Index Interest would be applied to Contract Value in the Secure Account and thus the Contract Value in the Secure Account remains unchanged.

The Company retains the right to change the current Index Interest Rate Cap for both the Secure and Growth Accounts at its discretion, subject to the minimum Index Interest Rate Cap of 1.0%. The Company would consider the following factors when determining whether to make such a change:

17


significant changes in derivative, equity and/or fixed income instrument valuations;
increases in hedging costs that have a material impact on the Company’s ability to offer the Contract;
derivative market changes that materially impact availability and structure of hedging instruments;
significant negative fixed income instrument default experience realized by the Company;
meaningful changes in Company and/or Contract cost structure due to regulatory or other business management concerns; and
material unanticipated Owner experience.

Addition or Substitution of an Index. There is no guarantee that the Index will be available during the entire time you own your Contract. If: (i) the Index is discontinued, or (ii) the calculation of an Index is changed substantially, we may substitute a suitable similar broad based U.S. stock market index for the original Index. If we substitute an index, the performance of the new Index may differ from the original Index. This, in turn, may affect the Credited Index Interest you earn. We will not substitute an index until that index has been approved by the insurance department in your state. The selection criteria for a suitable alternative Index includes the following:

A sufficiently large market in exchange traded and/or over-the-counter options, futures and similar derivative instruments based on the index to allow the company to hedge Credited Index Interest Rates;
The Index should be recognized as a broad based index that tracks the U.S. stock market if it is replacing an index such as the S&P 500 Index; and
The publisher of the index must allow the Company to use the index in contract and other materials for a reasonable fee.

Please note that we may add or substitute an Index associated with the Risk Control Accounts by sending you written notice at your last known address stating the effective date on which the Index will be added or substituted. We will send you the notice in theyour annual report unless earlier written notice is necessary.

 
market value adjustment (“MVA”)MARKET VALUE ADJUSTMENT
 

The Market Value Adjustment is calculated separately for withdrawals from the Risk Control Accounts and Declared Rate Account. The following amounts may be withdrawn without incurring a Market Value Adjustment:

Withdrawals under the Nursing Home or Hospital waiver or Terminal Illness Withdrawal waiver;
Required minimum distributions that are withdrawn under an automatic withdrawal program provided by the Company;
The Annual Free Withdrawal Amount;
Withdrawals on an Allocation Option Maturity Date;
Death Benefit proceeds;
GLWB Payment withdrawals; and
Amounts applied to an Income Payout Option.

27


If you surrender your Contract or take a partial withdrawal in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount during the Initial IndexAccumulation Period, we will apply the MVAMarket Value Adjustment to the amount being surrendered or withdrawn in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount.withdrawn. No MVAwithdrawals or surrenders can be taken once Contract Value has been allocated to an Income Payout Option, therefore no Market Value Adjustment will apply after the end of the Initial IndexAccumulation Period.

Note:
The MVA will either increase or decrease the amount you receive from a partial withdrawal or your Surrender Value. You may lose a portion of your principal due to the MVA regardless of the Risk Control Account to which you allocated Contract Value. You directly bear the investment risk associated with an MVA. You should carefully consider your income needs before purchasing the Contract.

IMPORTANT: The Market Value Adjustment will either increase or decrease the amount you receive from a partial withdrawal or your Surrender Value. You may lose a portion of your principal and previously credited interest due to the Market Value Adjustment regardless of the Allocation Options to which you allocated Contract Value. You directly bear the investment risk associated with a Market Value Adjustment. You should carefully consider your income needs before purchasing the Contract.

Purpose of the MVAMarket Value Adjustment

The MVAMarket Value Adjustment is an adjustment that may be made to the amount you receive in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount if you surrender the Contract during the Initial Index Period or take a partial withdrawal in excess offrom the free annual withdrawal amountRisk Control Accounts or Declared Rate Account during the Initial IndexAccumulation Period. Withdrawals on an Allocation Option Maturity Date will not be assessed a Market Value Adjustment. In general, if interest rate levels have increased at the time of surrender or partial withdrawal over their levels at the time we issuedAllocation Option Start Date, the Contract, the MVAMarket Value Adjustment will be negative. Similarly,Conversely, in general, if interest rate levels have decreased at the time of surrender or partial withdrawal over their levels at the time we issuedAllocation Option Start Date, the Contract, the MVAMarket Value Adjustment will be positive.

The MVAMarket Value Adjustment reflects, in part, the difference in yield of the Constant Maturity Treasury rate for a period consistent with the Allocation Option Period beginning on the Allocation Option Start Date and the yield of the Constant Maturity Treasury rate for a period starting on the date of surrender or partial withdrawal and ending on the Allocation Option Maturity Date. The Constant Maturity Treasury rate is a rate representing the average yield of various Treasury securities. The calculation also reflects in part the difference between the effective yield of the Constant Maturity Treasury rate, a rate representing the average yieldBank of various Treasury securities, on the Contract Issue Date for a duration equal to the Initial Index Period and the effective yield of the Constant Maturity Treasury rate for a duration equal to the remaining length of the Initial Index Period at the time of

18


surrender or partial withdrawal. In addition, the MVA reflects in part the difference between the effective yield of the BofA America/Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year USU.S. Corporate Constrained Index, Asset Swap Spread (the “Bank of America/Merrill Lynch Index”), a rate representative of investment grade corporate debt credit spreads in the U.S., on the Contract IssueAllocation Option Start Date and the effective yield of the BofA Bank of America/Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US Corporate Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread at the time of surrender or partial withdrawal. The greater the difference in those effective yields, respectively, the greater the effect the MVAMarket Value Adjustment will have. We will increase the amount you will be paid from a partial withdrawal by the amount of any positive MVA, and in the case of a surrender of the Contract, we will increase your Surrender Value by the amount of any positive MVA. Conversely, we will decrease the amount you will be paid from a partial withdrawal by the amount of any negative MVA, and in the case of a surrender of the Contract, we will decrease your Surrender Value by the amount of any negative MVA.

In general, if the Constant Maturity Treasury rate and BofA Bank of America/Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US Corporate Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread have increased at the time of surrender or partial withdrawal over their levels at the time we issuedAllocation Option Start Date, the Contract, the MVAMarket Value Adjustment will be negative and will decrease the Surrender Value or amount you receive from a partial withdrawal. Similarly, if the Constant Maturity Treasury rate and BofA Bank of America/Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US Corporate Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread have decreased at the time of surrender or partial withdrawal over their levels at the time we issuedAllocation Option Start Date, the Contract, the MVAMarket Value Adjustment will be positive and will increase the Surrender Value or amount you receive from a partial withdrawal.

The Company uses both the Constant Maturity Treasury rate and BofA Bank of America/Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US Corporate Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread in determining any MVAMarket Value Adjustment since together both indices represent a broad mix of investments whose values may be affected by changes in market interest rates.

The amount of the MVA also reflects in part the Credited Index Interest Rate determined at the time of surrender or partial withdrawal. We use the Credited Index Interest Rate to either decrease orwill increase the amount of the MVA. If the Credited Index Interest Rate is positive, we divide the amount of theyou will be paid from a partial withdrawal subject to the MVA by the Credited Index Interest Rate plus 1 which will decrease the amount subject to the market value adjustment factor and therefore reduce the amount of any positive or negative MVA. Conversely, ifMarket Value Adjustment, and in the Credited Index Interest Rate is negative, we divide the amountcase of a surrender of the withdrawal subject to the MVA by the Credited Index Interest Rate plus 1 whichContract, we will increase the amount subject to the market value adjustment factor and therefore increaseyour Surrender Value by the amount of any positive or negative MVA. If the Credited Index Interest Rate is 0%,Market Value Adjustment. Conversely, we dividewill decrease the amount of theyou will be paid from a partial withdrawal subject to the MVA by the Credited Index Interest Rate plus 1 which will not change the amount subject to the market value adjustment factor and therefore will not change the amount of any positive or negative MVA. IfMarket Value Adjustment, and in the Index has increased sincecase of a surrender of the date on whichContract, we determinedwill decrease your Surrender Value by the Initial Indexamount of any negative Market Value for the Current Contract Year, the Credited Index Interest Rate will be positive. If the Index has decreased since the date on which we determined the Initial IndexAdjustment.

28


The Market Value for the Current Contract Year, the Credited Index Interest Rate will be negative.

The MVAAdjustment helps us offset our costs and risks of owning fixed income investments and other investments we use to back the guarantees under your Contract from the date we issue the ContractAllocation Option Start Date to the time of a surrender or partial withdrawal.

Application and WaiverMarket Value Adjustment Formula

ForA withdrawal may be adjusted (increased or decreased) by the Market Value Adjustment. The Market Value Adjustment is calculated separately for each Allocation Option and Risk Control Account, we will calculateAccount. On any given Business Day, it is calculated using the MVA as of the date we receive your Written Request for surrender or partial withdrawal in Good Order at our Administrative Office. If the MVA is positive, we will increase your Surrender Value or amount you receive from a partial withdrawal by the amount of the positive MVA. If the MVA is negative, we will decrease the Surrender Value or amount you receive from a partial withdrawal by the amount of the negative MVA.

We will not apply an MVA to:
following formula:

 1.free annual withdrawal amounts;MVA = W x (MVAF – 1)
   
 2.Death Benefit proceeds;Where W = amount of withdrawal that is in excess of the Annual Free Withdrawal Amount for that Contract Year.
   
 3.partial withdrawals that qualify for the Nursing Home or Hospital waiver or terminal illness waiver, described in this Prospectus;

19


4.withdrawals under the Bailout Provision;
5.partial withdrawals taken as required minimum distributions under the Internal Revenue Code that are withdrawn under a systematic withdrawal program we provide;
6.partial withdrawals or a surrender after the Initial Index Period; and
7.income payments during the Payout Period.

MVA Formula

An MVA is equal to the amount of the partial withdrawal or surrender in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount (W) divided by 1 plus the Credited Index Interest Rate (IIR*) then multiplied by the market value adjustment factor (MVAF) minus 1 or (W/(1+IIR*))x(MVAF -1).

Where:

IIR* = Credited Index Interest Rate equal to (A/B) – 1 where:
A = The Adjusted Index Value; and
B = The Initial Index Value for the current Contract Year.
MVAF = ((1 + I + K)/(1 + J + L)) ^N where:^N
   
 II =The Constant Maturity Treasury rate as of the Allocation Option Start Date for a maturity consistent with the Initial IndexAllocation Option Period (shown on your contract data page);of six years.
   
 JJ =The Constant Maturity Treasury rate as of the date of withdrawal for a maturity consistent with the remaining lengthnumber of years (whole and partial) in the Initial Index Period;Allocation Option Period (each Allocation Option Period is six years).
   
 K(If there is no corresponding maturity=The Bank of Constant Maturity Treasury rate then the linear interpolationAmerica/Merrill Lynch Index as of the Constant Maturity Treasury Rates Index with maturities closest to N will be used to determine I and J.)Allocation Option Start Date.
   
 LK =The BofA Bank of America/Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US Corporate Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread as of the Contract Issue Date (shown on your contract data page);date of withdrawal.
   
 NL = The BofA Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US Corporate Constrained Index, Asset Swap Spread as of the withdrawal date; and
N = The number of years (whole and partial) from the current date of withdrawal until the end of the Initial Index Period.Allocation Option Maturity Date.

We determine I based on the Initial Index Period you have chosen.Allocation Option Period. For example, if you choose the 10-year Initial Indexfor an Allocation Option Period at issue, thenof six years, I would correspondcorresponds to the 10-year6-year Constant Maturity Treasury rate aton the time we issue the Contract.Allocation Option Start Date. We determine J when you take a partial withdrawal or surrender. For example, for an Allocation Option Period of six years, if you chose the 10-year Initial Index Period at issue and surrender the Contract 2two years into the Initial IndexAllocation Option Period, J would correspond to the Constant Maturity Treasury rate consistent with the time remaining in the Initial IndexAllocation Option Period or 8of four years (8(4 = 106 - 2). For I and J where there is no Constant Maturity Treasury rate declared, we will use linear interpolation between declaredof the Constant Maturity ratesRates Index with maturities closest to I and J to determine I and J.

The value of K and L on any Business Day will be equal to the closing value of the BofA Bank of America/Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US Corporate Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread on the previous Business Day.

If the publication of any component of the Market Value Adjustment Indicesindices is discontinued or if the calculation of the Market Value Adjustment Indicesindices is changed substantially, we may substitute a new index for the discontinued or substantially changed index, subject to approval by the insurance department in your state. Before we substitute ana Market Value Adjustment index, we will notify you in writing of the substitution.

For examples of how we calculate MVAs,Market Value Adjustments, see “appendix a”“Appendix A” to this Prospectus.

2029


 
surrender valueSURRENDER VALUE
 

If you surrender the Contract, you will receive the Surrender Value.Value, as of the Business Day, we received your Authorized Request in Good Order. The Surrender Value is equal to your Contract Value at the end of the Valuation Period in which we receive your Authorized Request, less any applicable Contract Fee, GLWB Rider Fee, and Surrender Charges (described under the “fees and charges” section below),Charge, and adjusted for any MVA.applicable Market Value Adjustment.

Upon payment of the Surrender Value, the Contract is terminated, and we have no further obligation under the Contract or Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit. We may require that the Contract be returned to our Administrative Office prior to making payment. The Surrender Value will not be less than the amount required by applicable state law. We will pay you the amount you request in connection with a full surrender by reducing Contract Value in the Declared Rate Account and redeeming Accumulation Credits from the Risk Control Accounts, if applicable.

 
fees and charges

We assess the following fees and charges under the Contract.

Surrender Charge

If you surrender the Contract during the Accumulation Period or make a partial withdrawal of your Contract Value during the Initial Index Period, we may assess a Surrender Charge. Surrender Charges offset promotion, distribution expenses, and investment risks born by the Company.

The amount of the Surrender Charge depends on the Initial Index Period that you have chosen, the length of time you have owned your Contract, and the amount you withdraw. The Surrender Charge amount is computed as a percentage of the amount withdrawn in excess of the free annual withdrawal amount. The Surrender Charge rates are as follows:

5-Year, 6-Year, 7-Year, and 10-Year Initial Index Periods

If You Choose the
5-Year Period:
If You Choose the
6-Year Period:
If You Choose the
7-Year Period:
If You Choose the
10-Year Period:
19%19%19%19%
29%29%29%29%
38%38%38%38%
47%47%47%47%
56%56%56%56%
6+0%65%65%65%
  7+0%74%74%
    8+0%83%
      92%
      101%
      11+0%

It is important to note that we only assess the Surrender Charge and apply an MVA during the Initial Index Period. Therefore, when choosing your Initial Index Period, you should carefully consider the length of time you would like to be subject to the Surrender Charge and MVA. For more information on the MVA, see “market value adjustment.”

An Initial Index Period should be chosen based on an Owner’s specific investment, liquidity and retirement planning needs. For example, if you would like the potential to earn the highest positive Credited Index Interest under the Contract for as long as possible and do not foresee the need to make withdrawals from the Contract, you may want to consider the 10-Year Initial Index Period and allocate Contract Value to the Growth Account. In general, the Index Interest Rate Cap for either the Secure Account or the Growth Account increases with the duration of the Initial Index Period. In addition, in general, the Index Interest Rate Cap for the Growth Account will exceed the Index Interest Rate Cap for the Secure Account for the same Initial Index Period. Also, it is important to keep in mind that the Growth Account is only available during the Initial Index Period.

21


Conversely, if you would like the potential to earn positive Credited Index Interest but also want to preserve your Contract Value and foresee the need to make withdrawals in six or more years, you may want to consider the 5-Year Initial Index Period and allocate Contract Value to the Secure Account.

We will deduct the Surrender Charge from your withdrawal proceeds. We will deduct the Surrender Charge before we apply any MVA to your withdrawal proceeds. For an example of how we calculate the amount you receive when you make a partial withdrawal during the Initial Index Period, see Examples 1 and 2 in “appendix a” to this Prospectus.

We will not assess the Surrender Charge on:

free annual withdrawal amounts;
Death Benefit proceeds;
partial withdrawals that qualify for the Nursing Home or Hospital waiver or terminal illness waiver, described in this Prospectus;
withdrawals under the Bailout Provision;
partial withdrawals taken as required minimum distributions under the Internal Revenue Code that are withdrawn under a systematic withdrawal program we provide;
partial withdrawals or a surrender after the Initial Index Period; and
income payments during the Payout Period.

After the first Contract Anniversary and during the Initial Index Period, we will provide you with a free annual withdrawal amount each year. We also may waive the Surrender Charge in certain circumstances. For information on free annual withdrawals and Surrender Charge waivers, see “access to your money.”

Change of Annuitant Endorsement Charge

If you change the Annuitant within the first two Contract Years, we reserve the right to assess a fee to offset the expenses incurred. This fee will not exceed $150 and will be assessed on a pro-rata basis proportional to your Contract Value in the Risk Control Accounts.

Other Information

We assume investment risks and costs in providing the guarantees under the Contract. These investment risks include the risks we assume in providing the floors to the Index Interest credited to the Risk Control Accounts, the surrender rights available under the Contract, the Death Benefit and the income benefits. We must provide the rates and benefits set forth in your Contract regardless of how our General Account investments that support the guarantees we provide perform. To help manage our investment risks, we engage in certain risk management techniques. There are costs associated with those risk management techniques. You do not directly pay the costs associated with our risk management techniques. However, we take those costs into account when we set rates and guarantees under your Contract.

22


access to your moneyACCESS TO YOUR MONEY
 

Partial Withdrawals

At any time afterduring the first Contract Anniversary and before the Payout DateAccumulation Period you may make two partial withdrawals eachby Authorized Request in Good Order. The minimum partial withdrawal amount is $100. Withdrawals will be processed Pro Rata from the Contract Year. To makeValue in all Allocation Options. Any applicable Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment will affect the amount available for a partial withdrawal. We will pay you the amount you request in connection with a partial withdrawal you must submit a Written Requestby reducing Contract Value in Good Orderthe Declared Rate Account and redeeming Accumulation Credits from the appropriate Risk Control Accounts, if applicable.

Partial withdrawals for less than $25,000 and changes to our Administrative Office.systematic withdrawals are permitted by telephone and in writing. The written consent of all Owners and irrevocable Beneficiaries must be obtained before we will process the partial withdrawal. Your partial withdrawal request must specify the amount that is to be withdrawn either as a total dollar amount or as a percentage of Contract Value. If a Writtenan Authorized Request in Good Order is received by 3:4:00 Central StandardP.M. Eastern Time, it will be processed that day. If a Writtenan Authorized Request in Good Order is received after 3:4:00 Central StandardP.M. Eastern Time, it will be processed on the next Business Day. We will take theIf a partial withdrawal pro-rata fromwould cause your ContractSurrender Value into be less than $2,000, we will treat your request for partial withdrawal as a request for full surrender of your Contract. Before processing the Risk Control Accounts basedfull surrender, we will attempt to contact you or your financial professional to provide the opportunity for you to take a lower amount to maintain a Surrender Value of at least $2,000. If we are unable to contact you on the Business Day we receive your Contract Value as ofrequest, we will process the date we received your Written Request in Good Order at our Administrative Office.full surrender.

Partial withdrawals taken during the Initial Index Period may be subject to Surrender Charges and an MVA (see “feesa Market Value Adjustment. See “Fees and charges”Expenses” and “Market Value Adjustment”).Adjustment.” Partial withdrawals may also be subject to income tax and, if taken before age 59½, an additional 10% federal penalty tax. You should consult your tax adviser before taking a partial withdrawal. See “federal income tax matters.“Federal Income Tax Matters.

Free annual withdrawal amount. After the first Contract Anniversary, we will provide you with a free annual withdrawal amount each year during the Initial Index Period. As long as the partial withdrawals you take during a Contract Year do not exceed the free annual withdrawal amount, we will not assess a Surrender Charge or apply an MVA.

The free annual withdrawal amount for a Contract Year equalsAnnual Free Withdrawal Amount. Your Annual Free Withdrawal Amount is equal to 10% of your Contract Value calculated as of the start of the Contract Year. If you makeValue at the beginning of the Contract Year and represents the amount that can be withdrawn without incurring a partial withdrawal of less than the free annual amount, the remaining free annual withdrawal amount will be applied to any subsequent partial withdrawal which occurs during the sameSurrender Charge or Market Value Adjustment in a Contract Year. Any remaining free annual withdrawal amountunused Annual Free Withdrawal Amount will not carry over to aany subsequent Contract Year. Partial annuitization will count toward

The Annual Free Withdrawal Amount is subtracted from full surrenders for purposes of calculating the free annual withdrawal amount.

If a partial withdrawal would cause your Surrender Value to be less than $2,000, we will treat your request for partial withdrawal as a request for full surrender of your Contract.Charge.

Waiver of Surrender Charges. We will not deduct awaive the Surrender Charge or apply an MVAand Market Value Adjustment in the case of a partial withdrawal or surrender where the Owner or Annuitant qualifies for the Nursing Home or Hospital waiver or terminal illnessTerminal Illness waiver, as described below. Before granting the waiver, we may request a second opinion or examination of the Owner or Annuitant by one of our examiners. We will bear the cost of such second opinion or examination. YouEach waiver may exercise this waiverbe exercised only once during the time you own the Contract.one time.

30


 
Nursing Home or Hospital Waiver.Waiver. We will not deduct a Surrender Charge or apply an MVAassess a Market Value Adjustment in the case of a partial withdrawal or surrender where any Owner or Annuitant is confined to a licensed Nursing Home or Hospital and has been confined to such Nursing Home or Hospital for at least 180 consecutive days after the latter of the Contract Issue Date or the date of change of the Owner or Annuitant. We may require verification of confinement to the Nursing Home or Hospital.Hospital, and such verification must be signed by the administrator of the facility. 
    
 The conditions that must be met are that:
 othe confinement in a Nursing Home or Hospital is recommended by a Physician who is duly licensed by the state to treat the injury or sickness causing the confinement and who is not an employee of the Nursing Home or Hospital where any Annuitant or Owner is confined; and

23


oan additional free annual withdrawal amount request, accompanied by written proof of confinement and the Physician’s recommendation, is received by us no later than 90 days following the date that the qualifying confinement has ended.
Terminal Illness Waiver. We will not deduct a Surrender Charge or apply an MVAa Market Value Adjustment in the case of a partial withdrawal or surrender where any Owner or Annuitant is diagnosed with a terminal illness and has a life expectancy of 12 months or less.less due to illness or accident. As proof, we may require a determination of the terminal illness.Terminal Illness. Such determination must be signed by the licensed physician making the determination after the latter of Contract Issue Date or the date of change of the Owner or Annuitant. The physician may not be a member of your or the Annuitant’s immediate family.

Please see your Contract for more information.

The laws of your state may limit the availability of the Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment waivers and may also change certain terms and/or benefits under the waivers. You should consult your ContractAppendix B to this Prospectus for further details on these variations. Also, even if you do not pay a Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment because of the waivers, you still may be required to pay taxes or tax penalties on the amount withdrawn. You should consult a tax adviser to determine the effect of a partial withdrawal on your taxes.

NOTE: We do not pro-rate Credited Index Interest, the Index Interest Rate Floor or the Index Interest Rate Cap in the event of the death of the Owner during or after the Initial Index Period.

Surrenders

At any time before the Payout Date and before the death of the Owner, youYou may surrender your Contract for the Surrender Value described above in “surrender value.”at any time during the Accumulation Period by Authorized Request. If a Writtenan Authorized Request in Good Order is received by 3:before 4:00 Central StandardP.M. Eastern Time on a Business Day, it will be processed that day. If a Writtenan Authorized Request in Good Order is received at or after 3:4:00 Central StandardP.M. Eastern Time on a Business Day or on a non-Business Day, it will be processed on the next Business Day.

To surrender your Contract, you must make a Writtenan Authorized Request in Good Order to our Administrative Office. The consent of all Owners and irrevocable Beneficiaries must be obtained before the Contract is surrendered.

Surrender Charges and a MVAMarket Value Adjustment may apply to your Contract surrender. The GLWB Rider Fee will be assessed upon surrender of the Contract. See “market value adjustment”“Market Value Adjustment” and “fees“Fees and charges.”Expenses”. A surrender may also be subject to income tax and, if taken before age 59½, an additional 10% federal penalty tax. You should consult a tax adviser before requesting a surrender. See “federal income tax matters.“Federal Income Tax Matters.

Partial Withdrawal and Surrender Restrictions

Your right to make partial withdrawals and surrender the Contract is subject to any restrictions imposed by any applicable law or employee benefit plan.

Right to Defer Payments

We may defer payments we make under this Contractreserve the right to postpone payment for up to six months after we receive your Authorized Request in Good Order, subject to obtaining prior written approval by the state insurance commissioner if required by the insurance regulatory authoritylaw of the state in which we issued the Contract approves such deferral. WeContract. In the event we postpone payment, we will applypay interest toon the deferred payments,proceeds if required by state law, calculated at the effective annual rate and for the time period required under state law.

We do not pro-rate Credited Index Interest, the Index Interest Rate Floor or the Index Interest Rate Cap.

2431


Bailout Provision

We will set a single bailout rateBailout Rate for all Risk Control Accounts under the Secure Account option and a single bailout rateBailout Rate for all Risk Control Accounts under the Growth Account option. The bailout ratesBailout Rates will be prominently displayed on your contract data page attached to the front of the cover page of the Contract Data Page and will not change during the Initial Index Period. life of your Contract.

The Bailout Provision allows you to make a withdrawal of the Contract Value attributable to a Risk Control Account without incurring any Surrender Charge and without the application of any MVA.Market Value Adjustment. Specifically, if the Index Interest Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account is set below the bailout rateBailout Rate for that Risk Control Account, the Bailout Provision allows you to make a withdrawal of some or all of the Contract Value attributable to that Risk Control Account during the Initial Index Period without incurring any Surrender Charge and without the application of any MVAMarket Value Adjustment during the 30-day period following the Contract Anniversary. We must receive your WrittenAuthorized Request for a withdrawal of Contract Value under the Bailout Provision in Good Order during the 30-day period following the Contract Anniversary. With respect to such withdrawal, your Contract Value will be reduced by the amount of the withdrawal. At any timeIf the request is not received during this 30-day period or the request is not in Good Order, no withdrawal will occur.

When the Index Interest Rate Cap for your Risk Control Account is less than the bailout rateBailout Rate specified on your contract data page, we may, at our discretion, restrict transferallocations into that Risk Control Account.

Withdrawals taken under the Bailout Provision may have tax consequencesconsequences.. The tax treatment of a withdrawal under the Bailout Provision depends on whether the Contract is a Non-Qualified Contract or a Qualified Contract. Generally, for a withdrawal from a Non-Qualified Contract, the amount received will be treated as ordinary income subject to tax up to an amount equal to the excess (if any) of the Contract Value immediately before the distribution over the Owner’s investment in the Contract. If the Contract is a Qualified Contract, a portion of the withdrawal is taxable as ordinary income, based on the ratio of the “investment in the contract” to the individual’s total account balance or accrued benefit under the retirement plan. If taken prior to age 59½, a withdrawal from either a Non-Qualified or a Qualified Contract may be subject to an additional 10% federal tax penalty. See discussion of “Withdrawals” and “Penalty Tax on Certain Withdrawals” under “Federal Income Tax Matters.”

 
GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT

The Contract automatically includes the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit. The Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit provides for GLWB Payments to be made each year for the life of a Covered Person(s) in the form of partial withdrawals without reducing the value of GLWB Payments in future years. The GLWB Payment is the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal amount. If you do not begin GLWB Payments before all Covered Person(s) die or are removed from the Contract, the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terminates, and you will not receive any payments under the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit.

GLWB Payments can begin on the first Contract Anniversary or the Contract Anniversary following the 50th birthday of the youngest Covered Person, whichever is later. If you begin GLWB Payments before age 59½ the GLWB Payments may be subject to a 10% additional federal tax. The GLWB Payment Start Date must be on a Contract Anniversary. Requests to start receiving the GLWB Payment as of a Contract Anniversary must be received at least one Business Day prior to the desired GLWB Payment Start Date.

The full GLWB Payment must be taken each year after the GLWB Payment Start Date. The Owner elects how to receive the GLWB Payments, either as monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, or annual payments. If the scheduled payment date does not fall on a Business Day, we will make the payment on the next Business Day.

GLWB Payments continue during the life of the Covered Person(s) unless the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit is terminated. Under the single life option, GLWB Payments will cease on the date of death of the Covered Person. Under the joint life option, GLWB Payments will continue until the date of death of the second Covered Person.

32


We may require proof that the Covered Person(s) is living upon the date of any GLWB Payment while the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit is in effect.

GLWB Rider Fee

The GLWB Rider Fee is shown in the “Fees and Expenses” section. The GLWB Rider Fee will be deducted Pro Rata from the Contract Value in all Allocation Options on the Contract Anniversary. The GLWB Rider Fee will be deducted prior to any other transactions on the Contract Anniversary. No Surrender Charge or Market Value Adjustment will be applied as a result of the deduction of the GLWB Rider Fee.

The GLWB Rider Fee will terminate on the earliest of:

The date the Contract Value is equal to zero; or
The date the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terminates.
Termination of the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit
The Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit will terminate and all rights under the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit will terminate upon the date any of the follow occur:
The death of all Covered Persons;
Payment of a Death Benefit;
All Covered Persons are removed from the Contract;
The Contract is surrendered or otherwise terminated; or
The Contract Value is applied to an Income Payout Option.

On the date the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terminates we will deduct any GLWB Rider Fee that was accrued but not yet deducted as the final GLWB Rider Fee.

Changes to the Covered Person(s)

After the Contract Issue Date, you cannot add, remove or replace a Covered Person, even if you add or change an Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary except as described in this Prospectus. If a Covered Person is no longer an Owner, Joint Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary as required above, we will remove that person from the Contract and they will no longer be a Covered Person. Once we remove a Covered Person, the Covered Person cannot be reinstated. If at any time joint Covered Persons are no longer Spouses, you must send us notice of the divorce by Authorized Request. Upon receiving such notice, we will remove one former Spouse from the Contract as a Covered Person as indicated by the divorce or settlement decree, as applicable.

If a Covered Person is removed and there is a remaining Covered Person, the following will occur:

If the Covered Person was removed before the GLWB Payment Start Date, joint GLWB Payments will not be available
If the Owner is a natural person and joint GLWB Payments have already started, we will continue to pay joint GLWB Payments to the Owner as long as the remaining Covered Person is living.

If a Covered Person is removed and there is no Covered Person remaining, the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit will terminate and GLWB Payments will cease.

GLWB Payments

The GLWB Payment is the guaranteed lifetime withdrawal amount. The annual GLWB Payment is equal to the GLWB Percentage multiplied by the GLWB Benefit Base. The GLWB Payment will only decrease if you take an Excess Withdrawal.

33


GLWB Percentage:The GLWB Percentage is determined on the GLWB Payment Start Date and will not change. It is calculated using the following formula:

GLWB Percentage = B + I x Y, where
B = The Base Withdrawal Percentage.
I = The Annual Increase Percentage.
Y = The number of completed Contract Years from the Contract Issue Date until the GLWB Payment Start Date, subject to the Maximum Annual Increase Period of 10 years.

The Base Withdrawal Percentage and Annual Increase Percentage are determined based on your election of single life or joint life option rates using the Age of the younger Covered Person(s) on the Contract Issue Date.

We establish the Base Withdrawal Percentage and Annual Increase Percentage on the Contract Issue Date and will not change them for the life of the Contract. The Base Withdrawal Percentage and the Annual Increase Percentage are stated in the GLWB Supplement which accompanies this Prospectus.

GLWB Benefit Base: The GLWB Benefit Base is initially equal to the Purchase Payment. On each Contract Anniversary, unless the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit is terminated, if the current Contract Value is greater than the current GLWB Benefit Base, the GLWB Benefit Base will be reset to equal the current Contract Value.

The GLWB Benefit Base will be impacted by Excess Withdrawals as described later in this section.

Example of the GLWB Payment Calculation:

Assume the following:
There is one Covered Person.
On the Contract Issue Date, the Covered Person is Age 55.
The Base Withdrawal Percentage is equal to 3.0% for the single life option for a 55-year-old.
The Annual Increase Percentage is 0.40% for the single life option for a 55-year-old.
The Contract Issue Date is 7/25/2019.
The GLWB Payment Start Date is 7/25/2026.
The GLWB Benefit Base is $250,000.

The GLWB Percentage equals the Base Withdrawal Percentage of 3.0% plus the Annual Increase Percentage of 0.40% multiplied by the number of completed Contract Years from the Contract Issue Date until the GLWB Payment Start Date, subject to the Maximum Annual Increase Period. The number of Completed Contract Years is 7, which is less than the maximum of 10, so 7 will be used in the calculation. Therefore, the GLWB Percentage = 3.0% + 0.40% x 7 = 5.8%.

The annual GLWB Payment is equal to the GLWB Percentage of 5.8% multiplied by the GLWB Benefit Base of $250,000. Therefore, the annual GLWB Payment = 5.8% x $250,000 = $14,500.

Treatment of GLWB Payment Withdrawals

GLWB Payments are treated as a withdrawal from the Contract Value and are taken Pro Rata from the Allocation Options at the time of the withdrawal. GLWB Payments reduce the Contract Value, the Surrender Value, and the Death Benefit by the amount of the GLWB Payment.

34


While the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit is in effect, the Contract will not terminate if a GLWB Payment causes the Surrender Value to be less than $2,000.

GLWB Payments are not subject to Surrender Charge or Market Value Adjustment. The GLWB Payment will count toward the Annual Free Withdrawal Amount. We deduct each GLWB Payment and any additional RMD payment proportionally from each Allocation Option.

If a GLWB Payment causes the Contract Value to be zero, we will continue to pay the GLWB Payments until the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terminates and the frequency of the GLWB Payments will remain the same as what was previously elected. In that event, the Allocation Options will no longer be available for investment.

If the date of birth of the Covered Person(s) is misstated, the GLWB Payment will be adjusted based on the correct date of birth of the Covered Person(s). Any underpayment will be added to the next payment. Any overpayment will be subtracted from future payments. No interest will be credited or charged to any underpayment or overpayment adjustments.

Impact of Excess Withdrawals on the GLWB Payment

An Excess Withdrawal is the portion of a withdrawal that, when added to other withdrawals during the current Contract Year, is greater than the total GLWB Payment for the current Contract Year. Excess Withdrawals will proportionally reduce the GLWB Benefit Base and the Death Benefit by the ratio of the Excess Withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately prior to the Excess Withdrawal. Excess Withdrawals include withdrawals prior to the GLWB Payment Start Date and deductions for any applicable Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment. Excess Withdrawals do not include amounts we withdraw for the GLWB Rider Fee.

Any portion of a withdrawal taken after the GLWB Payment Start Date that is not an Excess Withdrawal will be treated as a GLWB Payment. If a withdrawal is made after the GLWB Payment Start Date, the remaining GLWB Payment for the current Contract Year will be adjusted to reflect the withdrawal. If the withdrawal when added to the amount of all withdrawals during the current Contract Year (including GLWB Payments) is greater than the GLWB Payment for the current Contract Year, no further GLWB Payments will be made during that Contract Year. Otherwise, the remaining GLWB Payment for the current Contract Year is equal to the GLWB Payment reduced by the amount of all withdrawals during the current Contract Year (including prior GLWB Payments).

If an Excess Withdrawal reduces the Contract Value to less than $2,000, the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit will terminate and GLWB Payments will cease.

Examples of GLWB Benefit Base Calculation after an Excess Withdrawal:

Example 1. This example assumes the Contract Value is greater than the GLWB Benefit Base at the time of the withdrawal.

Assume the following information:
The GLWB Benefit Base prior to the withdrawal is $100,000.
The total withdrawal is $20,000.
The GLWB Payment is $5,000.
The Excess Withdrawal (including Surrender Charges and Market Value Adjustments) is $15,000.
The Contract Value at the time of the withdrawal is $110,000.

Step 1: Calculate the ratio of the withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal:
Ratio = Excess Withdrawal / (Contract Value immediately prior to the Excess Withdrawal) = $15,000 / $110,000 = 0.136364

35


Step 2: Calculate the reduction to GLWB Benefit Base:
Reduction to the GLWB Benefit Base = Ratio x GLWB Benefit Base prior to the withdrawal = 0.136364 x $100,000 = $13,636.40

Step 3: Calculate the GLWB Benefit Base adjusted for Excess Withdrawals:
GLWB Benefit Base adjusted for Excess Withdrawals = GLWB Benefit Base prior to withdrawal – Reduction to GLWB Benefit Base = $100,000 - $13,636.40 = $86,363.60

Example 2. This example assumes the Contract Value is less than the GLWB Benefit Base at the time of the withdrawal.

Assume the following information:
The GLWB Benefit Base prior to the withdrawal is $100,000.
The total withdrawal is $20,000.
The GLWB Payment is $5,000.
The Excess Withdrawal (including Surrender Charges and Market Value Adjustments) is $15,000.
The Contract Value at the time of the withdrawal is $85,000.

Step 1: Calculate the ratio of the withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal:
Ratio = Excess Withdrawal / (Contract Value immediately prior to the Excess Withdrawal) = $15,000 / $85,000 = 0.176471

Step 2: Calculate the reduction to GLWB Benefit Base:
Reduction to the GLWB Benefit Base = Ratio x GLWB Benefit Base prior to the withdrawal = 0.176471 x $100,000 = $17,647.10

Step 3: Calculate the GLWB Benefit Base adjusted for Excess Withdrawals:
GLWB Benefit Base adjusted for Excess Withdrawals = GLWB Benefit Base prior to withdrawal – Reduction to GLWB Benefit Base = $100,000 - 17,647.10 = $82,352.90

As illustrated in Example 2, the GLWB Benefit Base calculation may result in a reduction in the GLWB Benefit Base that is significantly larger than the withdrawal amount.

GLWB Supplement Information

The Base Withdrawal Percentage and Annual Increase Percentage are stated in the GLWB Supplement you receive when you purchase your Contract and are in effect when your Contract is issued. We cannot change these terms for your Contract once they are established.

You should not purchase this Contract without first obtaining the applicable GLWB Supplement. Please contact us at 1-800-798-5500, or contact your financial professional, to obtain the current GLWB Supplement. We will also file any changes to the GLWB Supplement on EDGAR at www.sec.gov under file number 333-XXXXXX. No new GLWB Supplement that supersedes a prior GLWB Supplement will become effective unless written notice of effectiveness of the new GLWB Supplement is given at least seven calendar days in advance.

Required Minimum Distribution Withdrawals

If the Contract is an Individual Retirement Annuity (IRA), GLWB Payments may be used to satisfy your Required Minimum Distribution (RMD) requirements. A withdrawal taken to satisfy RMD requirements prior to the GLWB Payment Start Date will be treated as Excess Withdrawals and will reduce the GLWB Benefit Base.

A withdrawal taken to satisfy RMD requirements after the GLWB Payment Start Date will not be treated as an Excess Withdrawal and Surrender Charges and Market Value Adjustments will not apply.

36


The RMD requirement for the Contract is calculated by the Company based on the calendar year taken. The portion of the withdrawal that is treated as an RMD may not be greater than the RMD of the current calendar year less any amount previously withdrawn. For calendar years after the Contract Value is reduced to zero, the GLWB Payments will be treated as the RMD payments with respect to the Contract.

Spousal Continuation of the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit

If the sole primary Beneficiary is the surviving Spouse of the deceased Owner, the surviving Spouse may elect to continue the Contract as the new Owner. This benefit may only be exercised one time. If the Spouse elects to continue the Contract as the new Owner, the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit will remain in effect if the surviving Spouse is a Covered Person. If this condition is not met, the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit will terminate, and we will no longer assess the GLWB Rider Fee.

If the surviving Spouse elects to continue the Contract and the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit remains in effect, the following will occur:
If the spousal continuation election is before the GLWB Payment Start Date, joint GLWB Payments will not be available to the surviving Spouse.
If the spousal continuation election is after the GLWB Payment Start Date, we will continue to pay joint GLWB Payments to the surviving Spouse as long as the surviving Spouse is living.

DEATH BENEFIT
 

Death of the Owner during the Accumulation Period

If the Owner dies beforeduring the Payout DateAccumulation Period (if there are joint Owners,owners, the Death Benefit will become payable, after the first joint Owner dies), a Death Benefit will become payable to the Beneficiary. We will pay the Death Benefit after we receive the following at our Administrative Office in a form and manner satisfactory to us:

 Due Proof of Death of the Owner while the Contract is in force;
 
 ourOur claim form from each Beneficiary, properly completed; and
 
 anyAny other documents we require.

TheIf you die during the Accumulation Period, your Beneficiary is entitled to a Death Benefit. If you have a Joint Owner, the Death Benefit will equal your Contract Value adjusted forbe available when the applicationfirst Joint Owner dies.

If there is a surviving Owner and that Owner is the Spouse of the deceased Owner, the surviving Spouse will be treated as the sole primary Beneficiary, and any Credited Index Interest onother designated Beneficiary will be treated as a contingent Beneficiary.

A Beneficiary must make an election within 60 days of the date we receive Due Proof of Death.Death of the Owner(s). The following Death Benefit options are available:

Option A: If the sole primary Beneficiary is the surviving Spouse of the deceased Owner, the surviving Spouse may elect to continue the Contract as the new Owner. An individual who does not meet the definition of Spouse may not be able to continue the Contract for that person’s lifetime. The individual must receive the proceeds of the Contract and any attached endorsements or riders within the time period specified in section 72(s) of the IRC.

Option B: If the Beneficiary is a natural person, the Death Benefit proceeds will be applied in accordance with IRC section 72(s) under one of the Income Payout Options. The income payments must be made for the Beneficiary’s life or a period not extending beyond the Beneficiary’s life expectancy. Payments must commence within one year of the date of the Owner’s death.

Option C: A Beneficiary may elect to receive, at any time, the Death Benefit proceeds in a single lump sum not to extend beyond five years from the date of the Owner’s death.

Unless Option A or B is elected within 60 days of the date we receive Proof of Death or within one year of the date of the Owner’s Death, whichever is earlier, the entire interest in the Contract will be paid under Option C.

37


Death of the Annuitant during the Accumulation Period

If an Annuitant dies during the Accumulation Period and there is a surviving Owner who is a natural person, the following will occur:
If there is a surviving Joint Annuitant, the surviving Joint Annuitant will become the Annuitant.
If there is no Joint Annuitant, the Owner(s) will become the Annuitant(s).
If an Annuitant dies during the Accumulation Period and the Owner is not a natural person, the following will occur:
If any Annuitant dies during the Accumulation Period, the death of any Annuitant will be treated as the death of the Owner and Death Benefit proceeds must be distributed in accordance with Option B.
Unless Option B is elected within 60 days of the date we receive Proof of Death or within one year of the date of the Owner’s Death, whichever is earlier, Death Benefit proceeds will be paid in accordance with Option C.

Death Benefit Proceeds

Death Benefit proceeds are payable upon our receipt of Proof of Death (Owner’s death or Annuitant’s death if the Owner is not a natural person), and proof of each Beneficiary’s interest, which includes required documentation and proper instructions from each Beneficiary. If we receive Due Proof of Death by 3:before 4:00 Central StandardP.M. Eastern Time, we will determine the amount of the Death Benefit as of that day. If we receive Due Proof of Death at or after 3:4:00 Central StandardP.M. Eastern Time, we will determine the amount of the Death Benefit as of the next Business Day.

No Surrender Charges or MVA The Death Benefit proceeds will apply to the Death Benefit. NOTE: We do not pro-rate Credited Index Interest, the Index Interest Rate Floor or the Index Interest Rate Cap in the event of the death of the Contract Owner during or after the Initial Index Period.

25


Within 60be paid within 7 days after we receive Dueour receipt of Proof of Death the Beneficiary must elect the payment method for theand proof of each Beneficiary’s interest.

The Death Benefit. Those options are described below. We will pay the Death Benefit in a manner that complies with the requirements of Section 72(s) or 401(a)(9) of the Internal Revenue Code, as applicable.

Death of Annuitant While the Owner is Living

If the Annuitant dies during the Accumulation Period whileis equal to the Ownercurrent Contract Value on the date Death Benefit proceeds are payable or the Purchase Payment adjusted for withdrawals, whichever is living and no joint Annuitant has been named,greater. The Death Benefit terminates on the Ownerearlier of the termination of the Contract or when the entire Contract is applied to an Income Payout Option. Withdrawals will become the Annuitant, until and unless we receive notice. If there are joint Annuitants, when an Annuitant dies, the surviving joint Annuitant will become the sole Annuitant.

If the Owner is not a natural person and the last surviving Annuitant dies before the Payout Date,proportionally reduce the Death Benefit will be payableby the ratio of the withdrawal to the Beneficiary.Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal. Withdrawals include deductions for any applicable Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment.

Examples of Death Benefit Payment Optionsafter a Withdrawal:

The following rules apply toExample 1. This example assumes the paymentContract Value is greater than the Purchase Payment at the time of the Death Benefit under a Non-Qualified Contract:withdrawal.

Assume the following information:
Spouses If
Purchase Payment = $100,000
Withdrawal (including Surrender Charges and Market Value Adjustments) = $20,000; no other withdrawals have been taken
Contract Value at the sole Beneficiary is the surviving spousetime of the deceased Owner, then he or she may choose to continue the Contract and become the new Owner. At the death of the surviving spouse, this provision may not be used again, even if that surviving spouse remarries. In that case, the rules for non-spouses will apply. A surviving spouse may also elect to receive the Death Benefit proceeds in a lump sum, apply the proceeds to an Income Payment Option, or receive the Death Benefit proceeds within five years of the date of the Owner’s death.withdrawal = $115,000
    
Step 1: Calculate the Death Benefit that would be payable immediately prior to the withdrawal:
Non-Spouses If
Death Benefit payable immediately prior to the Beneficiary is notwithdrawal = The greater of Purchase Payment and Contract Value
Death Benefit payable immediately prior to the surviving spousewithdrawal = The greater of the deceased Owner, then this Contract cannot be continued. Instead, upon the death of any Owner, the Beneficiary must choose one of the following:$100,000 and $115,000 = $115,000
    
Step 2: Calculate ratio of the withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal:
 ReceiveRatio = Withdrawal / (Contract Value immediate prior to the Death Benefit in one lump sum following our receipt of Due Proof of Death;withdrawal)
Ratio = $20,000 / $115,000 = 0.173913

38


Step 3: Calculate reduction to Purchase Payment:
Reduction to Purchase Payment = Ratio x (Purchase Payment prior to withdrawal)
Reduction to Purchase Payment = 0.173913 x $100,000 = $17,391.30
    
Step 4: Calculate Purchase Payment adjusted for withdrawals:
 Receive the Death Benefit (if the Beneficiary is a natural person) pursuantPurchase Payment adjusted for withdrawals = Purchase Payment prior to one of the Incomewithdrawal – Reduction to Purchase Payment Options. Payments under an Income
Purchase Payment Option must begin within 1 year of the Owner’s death and must not extend beyond a period certain equal to the Beneficiary’s life expectancy; oradjusted for withdrawals = $100,000 – $17,391.30 = $82,608.70
    
Step 5: Calculate the Contract Value after the withdrawal:
 ReceiveContract Value immediately after the withdrawal = Contract Value at the time of the withdrawal – withdrawal
Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal = $115,000 – $20,000 = $95,000
Step 6: Calculate the Death Benefit within five yearsthat would be payable immediately after the withdrawal
Death Benefit payable immediately after the withdrawal = The greater of Purchase Payment adjusted for withdrawals and Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal
Death Benefit payable immediately after the withdrawal = The greater of $82,608.70 and $95,000 = $95,000
The withdrawal of $20,000 reduced the Death Benefit payable by $20,000 (i.e. $115,000 - $95,000)
Example 2. This example assumes the Contract Value is less than the Purchase Payment at the time of the datewithdrawal.
Assume the following information:
Purchase Payment = $100,000
Withdrawal (including Surrender Charges and Market Value Adjustments) = $20,000; no other withdrawals have been taken
Contract Value at the time of withdrawal = $85,000
Step 1: Calculate the Death Benefit that would be payable immediately prior to the withdrawal:
Death Benefit payable immediately prior to the withdrawal = The greater of Purchase Payment and Contract Value
Death Benefit payable immediately prior to the withdrawal = The greater of $100,000 and $85,000 = $100,000
Step 2: Calculate ratio of the Owner’s death.withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal:
Ratio = Withdrawal / (Contract Value immediate prior to the withdrawal)
Ratio = $20,000 / $85,000 = 0.2352941
Step 3: Calculate reduction to Purchase Payment:
Reduction to Purchase Payment = Ratio x (Purchase Payment prior to withdrawal)
Reduction to Purchase Payment = 0.2352941 x $100,000 = $23,529.41
Step 4: Calculate Purchase Payment adjusted for withdrawals:
Purchase Payment adjusted for withdrawals = Purchase Payment prior to withdrawal – Reduction to Purchase Payment
Purchase Payment adjusted for withdrawals = $100,000 – $23,529.41 = $76,470.59
Step 5: Calculate the Contract Value after the withdrawal:
Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal = Contract Value at the time of the withdrawal – withdrawal
Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal = $85,000 – $20,000 = $65,000

Upon receipt of Due Proof39


Step 6: Calculate the Death Benefit that would be payable immediately after the withdrawal
Death Benefit payable immediately after the withdrawal = The greater of Purchase Payment adjusted for withdrawals and Contract Value immediately after the withdrawal
Death Benefit payable immediately after the withdrawal = The greater of $76,470.59 and $65,000 = $76,470.59
The withdrawal of $20,000 reduced the Death Benefit payable by $23,529.41 (i.e. $100,000 - $76,470.59)

As illustrated in Example 2, the Death Benefit calculation may result in a reduction in the Beneficiary must instruct us howDeath Benefit that is significantly larger than the withdrawal amount.

A Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment will not apply to treatDeath Benefit proceeds. The Death Benefit amount will not be less than the amount required by state law in which the Contract was delivered

We will pay interest on lump sum Death Benefit proceeds if required by state law. Interest, if any, will be calculated at the rate and for the time period required by state law.

So far as permitted by law, the Death Benefit proceeds will not be subject to any claim of the distribution rules discussed above. Other minimum distribution rulesBeneficiary’s creditors.

If an Owner is added or changed, except in the case of spousal continuation, the amount that will be paid upon the death of the new Owner is equal to the Contract Value on the date Death Benefit proceeds are payable. There is no impact on the Death Benefit if an Owner is removed.

Spousal Continuation

If the sole primary Beneficiary is the surviving Spouse of the deceased Owner, the surviving Spouse may elect to continue the Contract as the new Owner. This benefit may only be exercised one time.

Effective on the Continuation Date, we will set the Contract Value equal to the Death Benefit proceeds that would have been payable to the Spouse as the designated Beneficiary. This value is known as the spousal continuation amount.

Any addition to the Contract Value as a result of the Death Benefit proceeds will not be considered a Purchase Payment and will be allocated to the Contract Value on a Pro Rata basis.

On or after the Continuation Date, the amount that will be paid as Death Benefit proceeds is equal to the greater of:

The current Contract Value on the date the Death Benefit proceeds are payable; or
The spousal continuation amount adjusted for withdrawals since the Continuation Date.

Withdrawals will proportionally reduce the spousal continuation amount by the ratio of the withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal. Withdrawals include deductions for any applicable Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment.

A Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment will not apply to Qualified Contracts.Death Benefit proceeds. The Death Benefit proceeds will not be less than the amount required by state law in which the Contract was delivered.

See the “Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit” section in this Prospectus for impact of Spousal Continuation on the Covered Person(s) and the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit.

40


Death of Owner or Annuitant After the Payout Date

We must be notified immediately of the death of an Annuitant or Owner. Proof of Death will be required upon the death of an Annuitant or Owner. We are not responsible for any misdirected payments that result from the failure to notify us of any such death.

If an Annuitant dies during the Payout Period, remaining income payments or Death Benefit proceeds, if any, will be distributed as provided by the Income PaymentPayout Option in effect. The Income Payout Option in effect will determine whether additional income payments or a Death Benefit apply.

If an Owner dies afterduring the start of income payout,Payout Period, any remaining income payments will be distributed at least as rapidly as provided by the Income PaymentPayout Option in effect.

26Interest on Death Benefit Proceeds


Interest will be paid on lump sum Death Benefit proceeds if required by state law. Interest, if any, will be calculated at the rate and for the time period required by state law.

Abandoned Property Requirements

Every state has unclaimed property laws which generally declare annuity contracts to be abandoned after a period of inactivity of three to five years from the date the Death Benefit is due and payable. For example, if the payment of a Death Benefit has been triggered, but, if after a thorough search, we are still unable to locate the Beneficiary, or the Beneficiary does not come forward to claim the Death Benefit in a timely manner, the Death Benefit will be paid to the abandoned property division or unclaimed property office of the state in which the Beneficiary or you last resided, as shown on our books and records, or to our state of domicile. The “escheatment” is revocable, however, and the state is obligated to pay the Death Benefit (without interest) if your Beneficiary steps forward to claim it with the proper documentation. To prevent such escheatment, it is important that you update your Beneficiary designations, including addresses, if and as they change. To make such changes, please contact us by writing to us or calling us at our Administrative Office.

 
income paymentsINCOME PAYMENTSthe Payout PeriodTHE PAYOUT PERIOD
 

Payout Date

When you purchase the Contract, we will set the Payout Date as the Contract Anniversary following the Annuitant’s 95th birthday. If there are Joint Annuitants, we will set the Payout Date based on the ageAge of the oldest Joint Annuitant. For Contracts sold in the state of California, the Payout Date begins one month after the Contract Anniversary of the Initial Index Period. Please refer to the data page of your Contract for details.

You may change the Payout Date by sending a Writtenan Authorized Request in Good Order to our Administrative Office provided: (i) the request is made while an Owner is living; (ii) the request is received at our Administrative Office at least 30 days before the anticipated Payout Date; and (iii) the requested Payout Date is at least two years after the Contract Issue Date.Date; and (iv) the requested Payout Date is no later than the anticipated Payout Date as shown on your Contract Data Page. Any such change is subject to any maximum maturity ageAge restrictions that may be imposed by lawlaw.

Upon reaching the Payout Date, the Covered Person(s) become the Annuitant(s). Unless the Owner chooses to surrender the Contract, income payments will be equal to the GLWB Payment.

Upon the death of all Annuitants, we will pay the Beneficiary an amount equal to the Contract Value immediately prior to the annuitization less the total of the income payments paid.

41


Payout Period

The Payout Period is the period of time that begins on the Payout Date and continues until we make the last payment as provided by the Income Payout Option chosen. On the first day of the Payout Period, the Contract Value will be applied to the Income Payout Option you selected. A Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment will not apply to proceeds applied to an Income Payout Option. You cannot extend pastchange the Annuitant’s 95th birthdayAnnuitant or Owner on or after the original Payout Date.Date for any reason.

Terms of Income Payments

We use fixed rates of interest to determine the amount of fixed income payments payable under the Income PaymentPayout Options. IncomeFixed income payments will vary; however, dependingare periodic payments from us to the Owner, the amount of which is fixed and guaranteed by us. The amount of each payment depends on the numberform and duration of Annuitants livingthe Income Payout Option chosen, the Age of the Annuitant, the gender of the Annuitant (if applicable), the amount applied to purchase the income payments and the applicable income purchase rates in the Contract. The income purchase rates in the Contract are based on the Payout Date.a minimum guaranteed interest rate of 1%. We may, in our discretion and on a non-discriminatory basis, make income payments in an amount based on a higher interest rate. Once income payments begin, you cannot change the terms or method of those payments. We do not apply a Surrender Charge or MVAMarket Value Adjustment to income payments.

If there is one Annuitant living on the Payout Date, we will apply your Contract Value to provide for a Life Income Option with a 10-Year Guaranteed Period Certain, unless you have elected an Income Payment Option before the Payout Date or we are otherwise required under the Internal Revenue Code. If there are two Annuitants living on the Payout Date, we will apply your Contract Value to a Joint and Last Survivor Life Income Option with a 10-Year Guaranteed Period Certain unless you have elected an Income Payment Option before the Payout Date or we are otherwise required by the Internal Revenue Code. We describe the Life Income Option and the Joint and Last Survivor Life Income Option under “income payment options” below.

We will make the first income payment on the Payout Date. We may require proof of age and sexgender (if the Income Payout Option rate is based on gender) of the Annuitant/Joint Annuitants before making the first income payment. To receive income payments, the Annuitant/Joint Annuitant must be living on the Payout Date and on the date that each subsequent payment is due as required by the terms of the Income PaymentPayout Option. We may require proof from time to time that this condition has been met.

27


 
income payment optionsINCOME PAYOUT OPTIONS
 

Election of an Income PaymentPayout Option

You and/or the Beneficiary may elect to receive one of the Income PaymentPayout Options described under “Options” below. The Income PaymentPayout Option and distribution, however, must satisfy the applicable distribution requirements of Section 72(s) or 401(a)(9) of the Internal Revenue Code, as applicable.

The election of an Income PaymentPayout Option must be made by WrittenAuthorized Request. The election is irrevocable after the payments commence. The PayeeOwner may not assign or transfer any future payments under any option.

The amount applied under each option must be at least $2,500, or the amount required to provide an initial monthly income payment of $20.

We will make income payments monthly, quarterly, semiannually, or annually.annually for the Installment Option. Life Income and Joint Survivor options allow monthly income payments. We will also furnish the amount of such payments on request. Payments that are less than $20 will only be made annually.

If you do not specifyselect an Income PaymentPayout Option, we will make monthly payments on the following basis, unless the Internal Revenue Code requires that we pay in your application,some other manner in order for the default payment optionContract to qualify as an annuity or to comply with Section 401(a)(9), in which case we will be Option 2 – Life Income Optioncomply with a 10-year guaranteed period. those requirements;

The Covered Person(s) becomes the Annuitant(s). Income payments will be equal to the GLWB Payment.
Upon the death of all Annuitants, we will pay the Beneficiary an amount equal to the Contract Value immediately prior to the annuitization less the total of the income payments paid.

42


You may change this payment optionyour Income Payout Option any time before payments begin on the Payout Date.

Income Payout Options

We offer the following Income Payment Options.Payout Options described below. The frequency and duration of income payments will affect the amount you receive with each payment. In general, if income payments are expected to be made over a longer period of time, the amount of each income payment will be less than the amount of each income payment if income payments are expected to be made over a shorter period of time. Similarly, more frequent income payments will result in the amount of each income payment being lower than if income payments were made less frequently for the same period of time.

Option 1 – Installment Option.Option. We will pay monthly income payments for a chosen number of years, not less than 10, nor more than 30. If the Annuitant dies before income payments have been made for the chosen number of years: (a)years, remaining guaranteed income payments will be treated as the death benefit and will be distributed in one of the following two ways: a.) income payments will be continued for the remainder of the period to the Payee;Owner; or (b)b.) the present value of the remaining income payments, computed at the interest rate used to create the Option 1 rates, will be paid to the Payee or to the Owner, if there is no surviving Payee. For purposes of the present value calculation guaranteed rates will be used.Owner.

Option 2 – Life Income Option – Guaranteed Period Certain.Certain. We will pay monthly income payments for as long as the Annuitant lives. If the Annuitant dies before all of the income payments have been made for the guaranteed period certain: (a)certain, remaining guaranteed income payments will be treated as the death benefit and will be distributed in one of the following two ways: a.) income payments will be continued forduring the remainder of the guaranteed period certain to the Payee;Owner; or (b)b.) the present value of the remaining income payments, computed at the interest rate used to create the Option 2 rates, will be paid to the Payee or to the Owner, if there is no surviving Payee. For purposes of the present value calculation guaranteed rates will be used. Owner.

The guaranteed periods are 0 (life income only), 5, 10, 15, or 20 years.

Guaranteed Period Certain choices are:
0 years (life income only);
5 years;
10 years;
15 years; or
20 years.

Option 3 – Joint and Last Survivor Life Income Option – 10-Year Guaranteed Period Certain.Certain. We will pay monthly income payments for as long as either of the Annuitants lives.is living. If at the death of the second surviving Annuitant, income payments have been made for less than 10 years: (a)years, remaining guaranteed income payments will be treated as the death benefit and will be distributed in one of the following two ways: a.) income payments will be continued forduring the remainder of the guaranteed period certain to the Payee;Owner; or (b)b.) the present value of the remaining income payments, computed at the interest rate used to create the Option 3 rates, will be paid to the Payee orOwner.

Income payment(s) will be made to the Owner,Beneficiary if there is no surviving Payee. For purposes of the present value calculation guaranteed ratesOwner. If there is no surviving Owner or Beneficiary, income payment(s) will be used.made to the Owner’s estate.

The minimum amount which can be applied under all income payout options is the greater of $2,500 or the amount required to provide an initial monthly income payment of $20. We do not allow partial annuitization. We may require due proof of age and gender of any Annuitant on whose life an income payout option is based.

The Income Payout Options described above may not be offered in all states. Any state variations are described in Appendix B to this Prospectus. Further, we may offer other Income PaymentPayout Options. More

43


than one option may be elected. If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, not all options may satisfy required minimum distribution rules. ConsultYou should consult a tax advisor. Option 2 and Option 3 pay monthly income payments. We do allow partial annuitization. Partial annuitization will count toward the free annual withdrawal amount.

28


 
federal income tax mattersFEDERAL INCOME TAX MATTERS
 

The following discussion is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. Each person concerned should consult a competent tax adviser. No attempt is made to consider any applicable state or other income tax laws, any state and local estate or inheritance tax, or other tax consequences of ownership or receipt of distributions under a Contract.

When you invest in an annuity contract, you usually do not pay taxes on your investment gains until you withdraw the money—generally for retirement purposes. If you invest in an annuity as part of an individual retirement plan, pension plan or employer-sponsored retirement program, that is qualified for special tax treatment under the Internal Revenue Code, your contract is called a Qualified Contract. If your annuity is independent of any formal retirement or pension plan, it is termed a Non-Qualified Contract. The tax rules applicable to Qualified Contracts vary according to the type of retirement plan and the terms and conditions of the plan. See “Non-Natural Person” below for a discussion of Non-Qualified Contracts owned by persons such as corporations and trusts that are not natural persons.

Tax Status of the Contracts

Tax law imposes several requirements that annuities must satisfy in order to receive the tax treatment normally accorded to annuity contracts.

Required Distributions. In order to be treated as an annuity contract for Federal income tax purposes, Section 72(s) of the Internal Revenue Code requires any Non-Qualified Contract to contain certain provisions specifying how your interest in the Contract will be distributed in the event of the death of an Owner of the Contract. Specifically, sectionSection 72(s) requires that (a)(i) if any Owner dies on or after the annuity starting date, but prior to the time the entire interest in the Contract has been distributed, the entire interest in the Contract will be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method of distribution being used as of the date of such Owner’s death; and (b)(ii) if any Owner dies prior to the annuity starting date, the entire interest in the Contract will be distributed within five years after the date of such Owner’s death.death unless distributions are made over life or life expectancy, beginning within one year of the death of the Owner. However, if the designated Beneficiary is the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner, the Contract may be continued with the surviving spouse as the new Owner.

The Non-Qualified Contracts contain provisions that are intended to comply with these Internal Revenue Code requirements, although no regulations interpreting these requirements have yet been issued. We intend to review such provisions and modify them if necessary to assure that they comply with the applicable requirements when such requirements are clarified by regulation or otherwise.

Other rules may apply to Qualified Contracts.

Taxation of Non-Qualified Contracts

Non-Natural Person. If a non-natural person (e.g., a corporation or a trust) owns a Non-Qualified Contract, the taxpayer generally must include in income any increase in the excess of the account value over the investment in the Contract (generally, the Purchase Payment or other consideration paid for the Contract) during the taxable year. There are some exceptions to this rule and a prospective Owner that is not a natural person should discuss these with a tax adviser.

The following discussion generally applies to Contracts owned by natural persons.

Withdrawals. When a withdrawal from a Non-Qualified Contract occurs, the amount received will be treated as ordinary income subject to tax up to an amount equal to the excess (if any) of the Contract

44


Value, without adjustment for any applicable Surrender Charge, immediately before the distribution over the Owner’s investment in the Contract (generally, the Purchase PaymentsPayment or other consideration paid for the Contract, reduced by any amount previously distributed from the Contract that was not subject to tax) at that time. The Contract Value immediately before a withdrawal may have to be increased by any positive MVAMarket Value Adjustment that results from a withdrawal. There is, however, no definitive guidance on the proper tax

29


treatment of MVAsMarket Value Adjustments and you may want to discuss the potential tax consequences of an MVAa Market Value Adjustment with your tax adviser. In the case of a surrender under a Non-Qualified Contract, the amount received generally will be taxable only to the extent it exceeds the Owner’s investment in the Contract.

In the case of a withdrawal under a Qualified Contract, a ratable portion of the amount received is taxable, generally based on the ratio of the “investment in the contract” to the individual’s total account balance or accrued benefit under the retirement plan. The “investment in the contract” generally equals the amount of any non-deductible Purchase Payment paid by or on behalf of any individual. In many cases, the “investment in the contract” under a Qualified Contract can be zero.

Penalty Tax on Certain Withdrawals.  In the case of a distribution from a Non-Qualified Contract and Qualified Contract, there may be an imposed federal tax penalty equal to ten percent of the amount treated as income. In general, however, there is no penalty on distributions if they are:

 made on or after the taxpayer reaches age 59½;
  
made on or after the death of an Owner;
  
attributable to the taxpayer’s becoming disabled; or
  
made as part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments for the life (or life expectancy) of the taxpayer.

Other exceptions may be applicable under certain circumstances and special rules may be applicable in connection with the exceptions enumerated above. ExceptionsAdditional exceptions may apply to distributions from a Qualified Contract. You should consult a qualified tax adviser.

Income Payments. Although tax consequences may vary depending on the payout option elected under an annuity contract, a portion of each income payment is generally not taxed and the remainder is taxed as ordinary income. The non-taxable portion of an income payment is generally determined in a manner that is designed to allow you to recover your investment in the contractContract ratably on a tax-free basis over the expected stream of income payments, as determined when income payments start. Once your investment in the contractContract has been fully recovered, however, the full amount of each income payment is subject to tax as ordinary income.

Partial Annuitization. Under a new tax provision enacted in 2010, if part of an annuity contract’s value is applied to an annuity option that provides payments for one or more lives or for a period of at least ten years, those payments may be taxed as annuity payments instead of withdrawals. The payment options under the Contract are intended to qualify for this “partial annuitization” treatment.

Taxation of Death Benefit Proceeds. Amounts may be distributed from a Contract because of your death or the death of the Annuitant. Generally, such amounts are includible in the income of the recipient as follows: (i) if distributed in a lump sum, they are taxed in the same manner as surrender of the Contract, or (ii) if distributed under a payout option, they are taxed in the same way as income payments.

Withholding. Annuity distributions are generally subject to withholding for the recipient’s federal income tax liability. Recipients can generally elect, however, not to have tax withheld from distributions.

Multiple Contracts. All Non-Qualified deferred annuity contracts that are issued by us (or our affiliates) to the same Owner during any calendar year are treated as one annuity contract for purposes of determining the amount includible in such Owner’s income when a taxable distribution occurs.

Further Information. We believe that the Contracts will qualify as annuity contracts for Federal income tax purposes and the above discussion is based on that assumption.

3045


Taxation of Qualified Contracts

The tax rules applicable to Qualified Contracts vary according to the type of retirement plan and the terms and conditions of the plan. Your rights under a Qualified Contract may be subject to the terms of the retirement plan itself, regardless of the terms of the Qualified Contract. Adverse tax consequences may result if you do not ensure that contributions, distributions and other transactions with respect to the Contract comply with the law. This contractContract is available as a Qualified Contractqualified contract as follows.

Individual Retirement Annuities (IRAs), as defined in Section 408 of the Internal Revenue Code, permit individuals to make annual contributions of up to the lesser of a specified dollar amount for the year or the amount of compensation includible in the individual’s gross income for the year. The contributions may be deductible in whole or in part, depending on the individual’s income. Distributions from certain retirement plans may be “rolled over” into an IRA on a tax-deferred basis without regard to these limits. Amounts in the IRA (other than nondeductible contributions) are taxed when distributed from the IRA. A 10% penalty tax generally applies to distributions made before age 59½, unless an exception applies. Distributions that are rolled over to an IRA within 60 days are not immediately taxable, however only one such rollover is permitted each year. Beginning in 2015, an individual can make only one rollover from an IRA to another (or the same) IRA in any 12-month period, regardless of the number of IRAs that are owned. The limit will apply by aggregating all of an individual’s IRAs, including SEP and SIMPLE IRAs as well as traditional and Roth IRAs, effectively treating them as one IRA for purposes of the limit. This limit does not apply to direct trustee-to-trustee transfers or conversation to Roth IRAs.

Roth IRAs, as described in Internal Revenue Code sectionSection 408A, permit certain eligible individuals to contribute to make non-deductible contributions to a Roth IRA in cash or as a rollover or transfer from another Roth IRA or other IRA. A rollover from or conversion of an IRA to a Roth IRA is generally subject to tax and other special rules apply. The Owner may wish to consult a tax adviser before combining any converted amounts with any other Roth IRA contributions, including any other conversion amounts from other tax years. Distributions from a Roth IRA generally are not taxed, except that, once aggregate distributions exceed contributions to the Roth IRA, income tax and a 10% penalty tax may apply to distributions made (1)(i) before age 59½ (subject to certain exceptions), or (2)(ii) during the five taxable years starting with the year in which the first contribution is made to any Roth IRA. A 10% penalty tax may apply to amounts attributable to a conversion from an IRA if they are distributed during the five taxable years beginning with the year in which the conversion was made. Distributions that are rolled over to an IRA within 60 days are not immediately taxable, however only one such rollover is permitted each year. Beginning in 2015, an individual can make only one rollover from an IRA to another (or the same) IRA in any 12-month period, regardless of the number of IRAs that are owned. The limit will apply by aggregating all of an individual’s IRAs, including SEP and SIMPLE IRAs as well as traditional and Roth IRAs, effectively treating them as one IRA for purposes of the limit. This limit does not apply to direct trustee-to-trustee transfers or conversions to Roth IRAs.

Section 457 Plans, while not actually for a qualified plan as that term is normally used, permits individuals to deferred compensation plans with respect to service for state governments, local governments, political subdivisions, agencies, instrumentalities and certain affiliates of such entities, and tax exempt organizations. The Contract can be used with such plans. Under such plans a participant may specify the form of investment in which his or her participation will be made. Under a non-governmental plan, all such investments, however, are owned by and are subject to, the claims of the general creditors of the sponsoring employer.

Other Tax Issues. Qualified Contracts have minimum distribution rules that govern the timing and amount of distributions. You should refer to your retirement plan, adoption agreement, or consult a tax adviser for more information about these distribution rules.

Distributions from Qualified Contracts generally are subject to withholding for the Owner’s federal income tax liability. The withholding rate varies according to the type of distribution and the Owner’s tax status. The Owner will be provided the opportunity to elect not have tax withheld from distributions.

3146


“Eligible rollover distributions” from section 401(a), 403(b), and governmental 457 plans are subject to a mandatory federal income tax withholding of 20%. For this purpose, an eligible rollover distribution is any distribution to an employee (or employee’ spouse or former spouse as Beneficiary or alternate Payee) from such a plan, except certain distributions such as distributions required by the Internal Revenue Code, distributions in a specified annuity form, or hardship distributions. The 20% withholding does not apply, however, to nontaxable distributions or if the employee chooses a “direct rollover” from the plan to a tax-qualified plan, IRA or tax sheltered annuity or to a governmental 457 plan that agrees to separately account for rollover contributions.

Federal Estate Taxes, Gift and Generation-Skipping Transfer Taxes

While no attempt is being made to discuss in detail the Federal estate tax implications of the Contract, a purchaser should keep in mind that the value of an annuity contract owned by a decedent and payable to a Beneficiary by virtue of surviving the decedent is included in the decedent’s gross estate. Depending on the terms of the annuity contract, the value of the annuity included in the gross estate may be the value of the lump sum payment payable to the Contingentcontingent Owner or the actuarial value of the payments to be received by the Beneficiary. Consult an estate planning adviser for more information.

Under certain circumstances, the Internal Revenue Code may impose a “generation skipping transfer (“GST”) tax” when all or part of an annuity contract is transferred to, or a Death Benefit is paid to, an individual two or more generations younger than the Owner. Regulations issued under the Internal Revenue Code may require us to deduct the tax from your Contract, or from any applicable payment, and pay it directly to the IRS. For 2018,2019, the federal estate tax, gift tax and GST tax exemptions and maximum rates are $5,600,000$__________ and 40%__%, respectively.

The potential application of these taxes underscores the importance of seeking guidance from a qualified adviser to help ensure that your estate plan adequately addresses your needs and those of your beneficiaries under all possible scenarios.

Medicare Tax

Distributions from non-qualified annuity policies will be considered “investment income” for purposes of the newly enacted Medicare tax on investment income. Thus, in certain circumstances, a 3.8% tax may be applied to some or all of the taxable portion of distributions (e.g., earnings) to individuals whose income exceeds certain threshold amounts. Please consult a tax advisor for more information.

Same-Sex Spouses

The Contract provides that upon your death, a surviving spouseSpouse may have certain continuation rights that he or she may elect to exercise for the Contract’s Death Benefit and any joint-life coverage under an optional living benefit. All Contract provisions relating to spousal continuation are available only to a person who meets the definition of “spouse” under federal law. The U.S. Supreme Court has held that same-sex marriages must be permitted under state law and that marriages recognized under state law will be recognized for federal law purposes. Domestic partnerships and civil unions that are not recognized as legal marriages under state law, however, will not be treated as marriages under federal law. Consult a tax adviser for more information on this subject.

Annuity Purchases Byby Nonresident Aliens and Foreign Corporations

The discussion above provides general information regarding U.S. federal income tax consequences to annuity purchasers that are U.S. citizens or residents. Purchasers that are not U.S. citizens or residents will generally be subject to U.S. federal withholding tax on taxable distributions from annuity contracts at a 30% rate unless a lower treaty rate applies. In addition, such purchasers may be subject to state and/or municipal taxes and taxes that may be imposed by the purchaser’s country of citizenship or residence. Additional withholding may occur with respect to entity purchasers (including foreign corporations, partnerships and trusts) that are not U.S. residents. Prospective purchasers are advised to consult with a

32


qualified tax adviser regarding U.S., state, and foreign taxation with respect to an annuity contract purchase.

Possible Tax Law Changes

Although the likelihood of legislative changes is uncertain, there is always the possibility that the tax treatment of the Contract could change by legislation or otherwise. Consult a tax adviser with respect to legislative developments and their effect on the Contract.

47


We have the right to modify the Contract in response to legislative changes that could otherwise diminish the favorable tax treatment that annuity contract owners currently receive. We make no guarantee regarding the tax status of any contactthe Contract and do not intend the above discussion as tax advice.

Important Information about the Indices

S&P 500 Index. The Contract is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Standard & Poor’s, a division of the McGraw-Hill companies, Inc. (“S&P”). S&P makes no representation or warranty, express or implied, to the Owners of the Contract or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Contract particularly or the ability of the S&P 500 Index to track general stock market performance. S&P’s only relationship to the Company is the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of S&P and of the S&P 500 Index which is determined, composed and calculated by S&P without regard to the Company or the Contract. S&P has no obligation to take the needs of the Company or the Owners of the Contract into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the S&P 500 Index. S&P is not responsible for and has not participated in the determination of the prices and amount of the Contract or the timing of the issuance or sale of the Contract or in determination or calculation of the equation by which the Contract is to be converted into cash. S&P has no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Contract.

S&P DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY AND/OR THE COMPLETENESS OF THE S&P 500 INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN, AND S&P SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, OR INTERRUPTIONS THEREIN. S&P MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED BY THE COMPANY, OWNERS OF THE PRODUCT, OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FROM THE USE OF THE S&P 500 INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. S&P MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE WITH RESPECT TO THE S&P 500 INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. WITHOUT LIMITING ANY OF THE FOREGOING, IN NO EVENT SHALL S&P HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS), EVEN IF NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

The S&P 500 Index is a stock market index based on the market capitalizations of 500 leading companies publicly traded in the U.S. stock market, as determined by Standard & Poors. The S&P 500 Index can go up or down based on the stock prices of the 500 companies that comprise the Index. The S&P 500 Index does not include dividends paid on the stocks comprising the Index and therefore does not reflect the full investment performance of the underlying stocks.

The S&P 500 Index is a trademark of Standard & Poors or its affiliates and has been licensed for use by the Company.

Russell 2000 Index. The Contract is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Frank Russell Group (“Russell”). Russell makes no representation or warranty, express or implied, to the Owners of the Contract or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Contract particularly or the ability of the Russell 2000 Index to track general stock market performance. Russell only relationship to the Company is in the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of Russell and Russell 2000 Index which is determined, composed and calculated by Russell without regard to the Company or the Contract. Russell has no obligation to take the needs of the Company or the Owners of the Contract into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the Russell 2000 Index. Russell is not responsible for and has not participated in the determination of the prices and amount of the Contract or the timing of the issuance or sale of the Contract or in determination or calculation of the equation by which the Contract is to be converted into cash. Russell has no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Contract.

RUSSELL DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY AND/OR THE COMPLETENESS OF THE RUSSELL 2000 INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN, AND RUSSELL SHALL HAVE NO

48


LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, OR INTERRUPTIONS THEREIN. RUSSELL MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED BY THE COMPANY, OWNERS OF THE PRODUCT, OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FROM THE USE OF THE MSCI INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. MSCI MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE WITH RESPECT TO THE MSCI EAFE INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. WITHOUT LIMITING ANY OF THE FOREGOING, IN NO EVENT SHALL MSCI HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS), EVEN IF NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Russell 2000® is a stock market index that measures performance of the 2,000 smallest companies in the Russell 3000® Index, which is made up of 3,000 of the largest U.S. stocks. The Russell 2000® Index is constructed to provide a comprehensive and unbiased small-cap barometer and is completely reconstituted annually to ensure larger stocks do not affect the performance and characteristics of the true small-cap index.

MSCI EAFE Index. The Contract is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Morgan Stanley Capital International Inc. (“MSCI”). MSCI makes no representation or warranty, express or implied, to the Owners of the Contract or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Contract particularly or the ability of the MSCI EAFE Index to track general stock market performance. MSCI’s only relationship to the Company is in the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of MSCI and of the MSCI EAFE Index which is determined, composed and calculated by MSCI without regard to the Company or the Contract. MSCI has no obligation to take the needs of the Company or the Owners of the Contract into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the MSCI EAFE Index. MSCI is not responsible for and has not participated in the determination of the prices and amount of the Contract or the timing of the issuance or sale of the Contract or in determination or calculation of the equation by which the Contract is to be converted into cash. MSCI has no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Contract.

MSCI DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY AND/OR THE COMPLETENESS OF THE MSCI EAFE INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN AND MSCI SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, OR INTERRUPTIONS THEREIN. MSCI MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED BY THE COMPANY, OWNERS OF THE PRODUCT, OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FROM THE USE OF THE MSCI INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. MSCI MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE WITH RESPECT TO THE MSCI EAFE INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. WITHOUT LIMITING ANY OF THE FOREGOING, IN NO EVENT SHALL MSCI HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS), EVEN IF NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

The MSCI EAFE Index is an equity index which captures large and mid cap representation across developed markets countries around the world, excluding the U.S. and Canada. With 912 constituents, the MSCI EAFE Index covers approximately 85% of the free float-adjusted market capitalization in each country.

The MSCI EAFE Index is a trademark of MSCI or its affiliates and has been licensed for use by the Company.

 
other informationOTHER INFORMATION
 

Distribution of the Contract

We offer the Contract on a continuous basis. We have entered into a distribution agreement with our affiliate, CBSI, for the distribution of the Contract. MEMBERS Life Insurance Company and CBSI are both

49


wholly-owned subsidiaries of CUNA Mutual Investment Corporation. The principal business address of CBSI is 2000 Heritage Way, Waverly, IA 50677. Contracts are sold by licensed insurance agents (the “Selling Agents”) in those states where the Contract may be lawfully sold. Such Selling Agents will be registered representatives of CBSI or other affiliated and unaffiliated broker-dealer firms (the “Selling Broker-Dealers”) registered under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “1934 Act”), who are members of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, Inc. (“FINRA”) and who have entered into the Company’s selling agreements with us and the principal underwriter, CBSI.

We pay CBSI and/or our affiliates pay the Selling Broker-Dealers compensation for the promotion and sale of the Contract. The Selling Agents who solicit sales of the Contract typically receive a portion of the compensation paid by the Company to CBSI and the Selling Broker-Dealers in the form of commissions or other compensation, depending on the agreement between the Selling Broker-Dealer and the Selling Agent. The Selling Agents are also licensed as insurance agents by applicable state insurance authorities and appointed as agents of the Company. Selling Agents who are registered representatives of CBSI or our affiliates are also eligible for various cash benefits, such as bonuses, insurance benefits and financing arrangements, and non-cash items that we may jointly provide with CBSI or our affiliates. Non-cash items include conferences, seminars and trips (including travel, lodging and meals in connection therewith), entertainment, merchandise and other similar items. Sales of the Contracts may help registered representatives of CBSI qualify for such benefits.

The amount and timing of commissions we may pay to Selling Broker-Dealers may vary depending on the selling agreement and the contractContract sold but is not expected to be more than 7.25% of each Purchase Payment. We may also pay asset-based commission (sometimes called trail commissions) in addition to the Purchase Payment.Payment-based commission. We may pay or allow other promotional incentives or payments in the form of cash or other compensation to the extent permitted by FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations.

We also pay compensation to wholesaling broker-dealers or other firms or intermediaries, including payments to affiliates of ours, in return for wholesaling services such as providing marketing and sales support, product training and administrative services to the Selling Agents of the Selling Broker-Dealers. These allowances may be based on a percentage of theeach Purchase Payment.

In addition to the compensation described above, we may make additional cash payments, in certain circumstances referred to as “override” compensationscompensation or reimbursements to Selling Broker-Dealers in recognition of their marketing and distribution, transaction processing and/or administrative services support. These payments are not offered to all Selling Broker-Dealers, and the terms of any particular agreement governing the payments may vary among Selling Broker-Dealers depending on, among other things, the level and type of marketing and distribution support provided. Marketing and distribution support services may include, among other services, placement of the Company’s products on the Selling Broker-Dealers’ preferred or recommended list, increased access to the Selling Broker-Dealers’ registered representatives for purposes of promoting sales of our products, assistance in training and

33


education of the Selling Agents, and opportunities for us to participate in sales conferences and educational seminars. The payments or reimbursements may be calculated as a percentage of the particular Selling Broker-Dealer’s actual or expected aggregate sales of our indexed annuity contracts (including the Contract) and/or may be a fixed dollar amount. Broker-dealers receiving these additional payments may pass on some or all of the payments to the Selling Agent.

You should ask your Selling Agent for further information about what commissions or other compensation he or she, or the Selling Broker-Dealer for which he or she works, may receive in connection with your purchase of a Contract.

Commissions and other incentives or payments described above are not charged directly to you. We intend to recouprecover commissions and other salescompensation, marketing, administrative and other expenses and costs of Contract benefits through the fees and charges deductedimposed under the Contract.

50


Cyber SecurityBusiness Disruption and Cyber-Security Risks

OurWe rely heavily on interconnected computer systems and digital data to conduct our variable and index-linked product business activities. Because our variable and index-linked product business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners, so that our business is potentiallyvulnerable to disruptions from utility outages, and susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from a cyber-attack.information systems failure (e.g., hardware and software malfunctions), and cyber-attacks. These risks include, among other things, the theft, misuse, corruption and destruction of data maintained online or digitally, interference with or denial of service, attacks on websites and other operational disruption and unauthorized release of confidential customerOwner information. Cyber-attacksSuch systems failures and cyber-attacks affecting us, CBSI and intermediaries may adversely affect us and your Contract Value. For instance, systems failures and cyber-attacks may interfere with our processing of Contract transactions, including the processing of orders, impact our ability to calculate Credited Index Interest,Contract Value, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential Ownercustomer or business information, impede order processing, subject us and/or CBSI and intermediaries to regulatory fines and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. There can be no assurance that we, CBSI or CBSIintermediaries will avoid losses affecting your Contract due to cyber-attacks or information security breaches in the future.

Authority to Change

Only the President or Secretary of the Company may change or waive any of the terms of your Contract. Any change must be in writing and signed by the President or Secretary of the Company. You will be notified of any such change, as required by law.

Incontestability

We consider all statements in your application (in the absence of fraud) to be representations and not warranties. We will not contest your Contract.

Misstatement of Age or Gender

If an Annuitant’s or Covered Person(s) date of birth or gender is misstated, we will adjust the income paymentsPayments or GLWB Payments under thisthe Contract to be equal to the payout amount the Contract Value would have purchased based on the individuals correct date of birth. If an Annuitant’s gender has been misstated, and the life income rate type is based on gender, we will adjust the income payments under the Contract to be equal to the payout amount the Contract Value would have purchased based on the Annuitant’s correct date of birth and/or gender. We will add any underpayments to the next payment. We will subtract any overpayment from future payments. We will not credit or charge any interest to any underpayment or overpayment.

Conformity with Applicable Laws

The provisions of the Contract conform to the minimum requirements of the state in which the Contract is delivered (i.e., the “state of issue.issue”). The laws of the state of issue control any conflicting laws of any other state in which the Owner may live on or after the Contract Issue Date. If any provision of your Contract is determined not to provide the minimum benefits required by the state in which the Contract is issued, such provision will be deemed to be amended to conform or comply with such laws or regulations. Further, the Company will amend the Contract to comply with any changes in law governing the Contract or the taxation of benefits under the Contract.

34


Reports to Owners

At least annually, we will mail a report to you at your last known address of record, a report that will state the beginning and end dates for the current report period; your Contract Value Surrenderat the beginning and end of the current report period; the amounts that have been credited and debited to your Contract Value withdrawals made sinceduring the lastcurrent report period, identified by the type of activity the amount represents; the Surrender

51


Value at the end of the current report period; and any other information required by any applicable law or regulation.

You also will receive confirmations of each financial transaction, such as transfers, withdrawals, and surrenders.

Change of Address

You may change your address by writing to us at our Administrative Office. If you change your address, we will send a confirmation of the address change to both your old and new addresses.

Inquiries

You may make inquiries regarding your Contract by writing to us or calling us at our Administrative Office.

 
Corporate History of the CompanyCORPORATE HISTORY OF THE COMPANY
 
[toTo be updated in amendment filing]
by amendment]

MEMBERS Life Insurance Company

We are a wholly-owned indirect subsidiary of CMFG Life Insurance Company (“CMFG Life”) and a direct wholly-owned subsidiary of CUNA Mutual Investment Corporation (“CMIC”). We were formed by CMFG Life on February 27, 1976, as a stock life insurance company under the laws of the State of Wisconsin for the purpose of writing credit disability insurance. The original name of the Company was CUDIS Insurance Society, Inc. On August 3, 1989, the Company’s name changed to CUMIS Life Insurance, Inc., and was subsequently changed to its current name on January 1, 1993. League Life Insurance Company (Michigan) merged into the Company on January 1, 1992 in connection with the concurrent merger of MEMBERS Life Insurance Company (Texas) into the Company. We re-domiciled from Wisconsin to Iowa on May 3, 2007. On February 17, 2012, we amended and restated our Articles of Incorporation to change our purpose to be the writing of any and all of the lines of insurance and annuity business authorized by Iowa Code Chapter 508 and any other line of insurance or annuity business authorized by the laws of the State of Iowa. Currently, we have no employees.

CMFG Life is a stock insurance company organized on May 20, 1935 and domiciled in Iowa. CMFG Life is one of the world’s largest direct underwriters of credit life and disability insurance and is a major provider of qualified pension products to credit unions. Further, CMFG Life and its affiliated companies currently offer deferred and immediate annuities, individual term and permanent life insurance, and accident and health insurance. In 2012, CMFG Life was reorganized as a wholly-owned subsidiary of CUNA Mutual Financial Group, Inc., which is a wholly-owned subsidiary of CUNA Mutual Holding Company, (“CM Holding”), a mutual holding company organized under the laws of the State of Iowa.

In August 2013, the Company began issuing thean Index-Linked Annuity Contract under the name “MEMBERS® Zone Annuity”. In July 2016, the Company began issuing a flexible premium variable and index-linked deferred annuity contract under the name “MEMBERS® Horizon Variable Annuity”. In December 2018, the Company began issuing a flexible premium variable and index-linked deferred annuity contract under “MEMBERS® Horizon II Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity”. These annuity contracts account for all the new product sales of the new sales by the Company since August 2013.Company. The Company also serves previously existing blocks of individual and group life policies.

CMFG Life provides significant services required in the conduct of the Company’s operations. We have entered into a Cost Sharing, Procurement, Disbursement, Billing and Collection Agreement for the administration of our business pursuant to which CMFG Life performs certain administrative functions related to agent licensing, payment of commissions, actuarial services, annuity policy issuance and service, accounting and financial compliance, market conduct, general and informational services and marketing as well as share certain resources and personnel with us; and

35


pursuant to which CMFG Life provides us with certain procurement, disbursement, billing and collection services.

52


You may write us at 2000 Heritage Way, Waverly, Iowa 50677-9202, or call us at 1-800-798-5500.

We share office space with our indirect parent, CMFG Life. CMFG Life occupies office space in Madison, Wisconsin and Waverly, Iowa that is owned by CMFG Life. Expenses associated with the facilities are allocated to us through the Amended and Restated Expense Sharing Agreement.Agreement that we entered into with CMFG Life on January 1, 2015.

Financial Information

Our financial statements have been prepared in accordance with U.S. generally accepted accounting principals (“U.S. GAAP”).GAAP.

Investments

Our investment portfolio consists primarily of fixed income securities.

Reinsurance  [to be updated in amendment filing]

We reinsure our life insurance exposure with an affiliated insurance company under a traditional indemnity reinsurance arrangement. We entered into a coinsurance agreementCoinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life in 2012. Under this agreement, we agreed to cede 95% of all insurance in force including annuity contracts, as of October 31, 2012 to CMFG Life. On September 30, 2015, we amended the Company amended its coinsurance agreementCoinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life and now cedescede 100% of itsour insurance policies in force to CMFG Life. In 2013, we entered into a second coinsurance agreement to cede 100% of allthe business issued on and after January 1, 2013related to MEMBERS® Zone Annuity contracts to CMFG Life. On November 1, 2015, we entered into a Coinsurance and Modified Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to MEMBERS® Horizon Flexible Premium Deferred Variable Annuity.and Index Linked Annuity contracts. On October 15, 2018, we amended the Coinsurance and Modified Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to MEMBERS® Horizon II Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity contracts. On ______, we amended the Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to CUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity contracts. These agreements do not relieve us of our obligations to our policyholders under contracts covered by these agreements. However, they do transfer nearly all of the Company’s underwriting profits and losses to CMFG Life and require CMFG Life to indemnify the Company for nearly all of its liabilities.

Policy Liabilities and Accruals

The applicable accounting standards and state insurance laws under which we operate require that we record policy liabilities to meet the future obligations associated with all of our outstanding policies.

36


 
Potential Risk Factors That May Affect Our Business and Our Future ResultsPOTENTIAL RISK FACTORS THAT MAY AFFECT OUR BUSINESS AND OUR FUTURE RESULTS
 

Although economic conditions both domestically and globally have continued to improve since the financial crisis in 2008, we remain vulnerable to market uncertainty and continued financial instability of national, state and local governments. Continued difficult conditions in the global capital markets and economy could deteriorate in the near future and affect our financial position and our level of earnings from our operations.

Markets in the United States and elsewhere experienced extreme volatility and disruption since the second half of 2007, due in part to the financial stresses affecting the liquidity of the banking system and the financial markets. This volatility and disruption reached unprecedented levels in late 2008 and early 2009. The United States entered a severe recession and recovery was slow with long-term high unemployment rates and lower average household income levels. One of the strategies used by the U.S. government to stimulate the economy has been to keep interest rates low and increase the supply of

53


United States dollars. While these strategies have appeared to have had positive effects, any future economic downturn or market disruption could negatively impact our ability to invest our funds.

Specifically, if market conditions deteriorate in 2018 or beyond:

 our investment portfolio could incur other-than-temporary impairments;
   
 due to potential downgrades in our investment portfolio, we could be required to raise additional capital to sustain our current business in force and new sales of our annuity products, which may be difficult in a distressed market. If capital would be available, it may be at terms that are not favorable to us; or
   
 our liquidity could be negatively affected, and we could be forced to further limit our operations and our business could suffer, as we need liquidity to pay our policyholder benefits and operating expenses.

The principal sources of our liquidity are monthly settlements under the coinsurance agreements with CMFG Life, annuity deposits, investment income, proceeds from the sale, maturity and call of investments and capital contributions from CMFG Life.

Governmental initiatives intended to improve global and local economies that have been adopted may not be effective and, in any event, may be accompanied by other initiatives, including new capital requirements or other regulations that could materially affect our results of operations, financial condition and liquidity in ways that we cannot predict.

We are subject to extensive laws and regulations that are administered and enforced by a number of different regulatory authorities including state insurance regulators, the National Association of Insurance Commissioners (“NAIC”) and the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”).SEC. Some of these authorities are or may in the future consider enhanced or new regulatory requirements intended to prevent future crises or otherwise assure the stability of institutions under their supervision. These authorities may also seek to exercise their supervisory or enforcement authority in new or more robust ways. All of these possibilities, if they occurred, could affect the way we conduct our business and manage our capital, and may require us to satisfy increased capital requirements, any of which in turn could materially affect our results of operations, financial condition and liquidity.

We face potential competition from companies that have greater financial resources, broader arrays of products, higher ratings and stronger financial performance, which may impair our ability to attract new customers and maintain our profitability and financial strength. It may also

37


impair our ability to retain customers which could increase surrenders and impact profitability and financial strength.

We operate in a highly competitive industry. Many of our competitors are substantially larger and enjoy substantially greater financial resources, claims-paying ability and financial strength, broader and more diversified product lines and more widespread distribution relationships. Our annuity products compete with fixed indexed, traditional fixed rate and variable annuities (and combinations thereof) sold by other insurance companies and also with mutual fund products, traditional bank investments and other investment and retirement funding alternatives offered by asset managers, banks and broker-dealers. Our annuity products also compete with products of other insurance companies, financial intermediaries and other institutions based on a number of factors, including crediting rates, policy terms and conditions, serviceservices provided to distribution channels and policyholders, ratings, reputation and distribution compensation.

Our ability to compete will depend in part on ratesthe performance of interest credited to policyholder account balances or the parameters governing the determination of index credits which is driven by our investment performance.products. We will not be able to accumulate and retain assets under management for our products if our investment resultsproducts underperform the market or the competition, since such underperformance likely would result in asset withdrawals and reduced sales.

54


We compete for distribution sources for our products. We believe that our success in competing for distributors will depend on factors such as our financial strength, the services we provide to, and the relationships we develop with these distributors and offering competitive commission structures. Our distributors will generally be free to sell products from whichever providers they wish, which makes it important for us to continually offer distributors products and services they find attractive. If our products or services fall short of distributors’ needs, we may not be able to establish and maintain satisfactory relationships with distributors of our annuity products. Our ability to compete will also depend in part on our ability to develop innovative new products and bring them to market more quickly than our competitors. In order for us to compete in the future, we will need to continue to bring innovative products to market in a timely fashion. Otherwise, our revenues and profitability could suffer.

The loss of key executives could disrupt our operations.

Our success depends in part on the continued service of key executives within our Company and CMFG Life and ourLife’s ability to attract and retain additional executives and employees. The loss of key executives or CMFG Life employees or ourLife’s inability to recruit and retain additional qualified personnel could cause disruption in our business and prevent us from fully implementing our business strategies, which could materially and adversely affect our business, growth and profitability.

Changes in state and federal regulation may affect our profitability.  [to be updated in amendment filing]

We are subject to regulation under applicable insurance statutes, including insurance holding company statutes, in the various states in which we transact business. Insurance regulation is intended to provide safeguards for policyholders rather than to protect shareholders of insurance companies or their holding companies. As increased scrutiny has been placed upon the insurance regulatory framework, a number of state legislatures have considered or enacted legislative proposals that alter, and in many cases increase, state authority to regulate insurance companies and holding company systems.

Regulators oversee matters relating to trade practices, policy forms, claims practices, guaranty funds, types and amounts of investments, reserve adequacy, insurer solvency, minimum amounts of capital and surplus, transactions with related parties, changes in control and payment of dividends.

38


State insurance regulators and the NAIC continually reexamine existing laws and regulations and may impose changes in the future.

We are subject to the NAIC’s risk-based capital requirements which are intended to be used by insurance regulators as an early warning tool to identify deteriorating or weakly capitalized insurance companies for the purpose of initiating regulatory action. We also may be required, under solvency or guaranty laws of most states in which we do business, to pay assessments up to certain prescribed limits to fund policyholder losses or liabilities for insolvent insurance companies.

Although the federal government does not directly regulate the insurance business, federal legislation and administrative policies in several areas, including pension regulation, age and sex discrimination,anti-discrimination regulation, financial services regulation, securities regulation and federal taxation, can significantly affect the insurance business. In addition, legislation has been enacted whichthat could result in the federal government assuming some role in the regulation of the insurance industry.

In July 2010, theThe Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (the “Dodd-Frank Act”(“Dodd-Frank”) was enacted and signed into law, making extensivein July 2010 made sweeping changes to the laws regulatingregulation of financial services entities, products and markets. The Dodd-Frank Act directed existing and newly-created government agencies and bodies to perform studies and promulgate a multitude of regulations implementing the law, a process that has substantially advanced

55


but is not yet complete. While a number of studies and much of the rule-making process has already been completed, there continues to be uncertainty regarding the results of ongoing studies and the ultimate requirements of regulations that have not yet been adopted. Although the new presidential administration has indicated a desire to revise or reverse some of its provisions, the fate of these proposals is unclear, and we cannot predict with certainty how the Dodd-Frank Act will continue to affect the financial services industry. markets generally, or impact our business, ratings, results of operations, financial condition or liquidity.

Among other things, the Dodd-Frank Act imposes a comprehensive new regulatory regime on the over-the-counter (“OTC”) derivatives marketplace and grants new joint regulatory authority to the SECUnited States Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) and the U.S. Commodity Futures Trading Commission (“CFTC”) over OTC derivatives. While the SEC and CFTC continue to promulgate rules required by the Dodd-Frank Act, most rules have been finalized and, as a result, certain of the Company’s derivatives operations are subject to, among other things, new recordkeeping, reporting and documentation requirements and new clearing requirements for certain swap transactions (currently, certain interest rate swaps and index-based credit default swaps; cleared swaps require the posting of margin to a clearinghouse via a futures commission merchant and, in some case, to the futures commission merchant as well).

In addition, in the latter part of 2015, U.S. federal banking regulators and the CFTC adopted regulations that will require swap dealers, security-based swap dealers, major swap participants and major security-based swap participants (“Swap Entities”) to post margin to, and collect margin from, their OTC swap counterparties (the “Margin Rules”). UnderPursuant to the Margin Rules, the Company would be considered a “financial end-user” that, when facing a Swap Entity, is required to post and collectexchange variation margin for its non-cleared swaps. In addition, depending onwith its derivatives exposure, the Companycounterparties that are Swap Entities and it may be required to post and collectexchange initial margin as well. The initial margin requirements of the Margin Rules will be phased-in over a period of five years based on the average aggregate notional amount of the Swap Entity’s (combined with all of its affiliates) and its counterparty’s (combined with all of its affiliates) swap positions. It is anticipated that the Company will not be subject to the initial margin requirements untilsuch counterparties beginning in September 1, 2020. The variation margin requirement took effect on September 1, 2016, for swaps where both the Swap Entity (and its affiliates) and its counterparty (and its affiliates) have an average daily aggregate notional amount of swaps for March, April and May of 2016 that exceeds $3 trillion. Otherwise, the variation margin requirement, to which we are subject, took effect on March 1, 2017.

Other regulatory requirements may indirectly impact us. For example, non-U.S. counterparties of the Company may also be subject to non-U.S. regulation of their derivatives transactions with the Company. In addition, counterparties regulated by the Prudential Regulators (which consist of the Office of the Comptroller of the Currency, the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, the FDIC, the Farm Credit Administration, and the Federal Housing Finance Agency) are subject to liquidity, leverage and capital requirements that impact their derivatives transactions with the Company. Collectively, these new requirements have increased the direct and indirect costs of our derivatives activities and may further increase them in the future.

The Dodd-Frank Act also established a Federal Insurance Office (“FIO”) under the U.S. Treasury Department. Although the Federal Insurance Office was not granted general supervisory authority over the insurance industry, it is authorized to, among other things, (1) monitor all aspects of the insurance industry and of lines of business other than certain health insurance, certain long-term care insurance and crop insurance and (2) recommend changes to the state system of insurance regulation to the U.S. Congress. The FIO iswas required to issue several reports to Congress on the insurance industry, most

39


notably, (i) a report on “how to modernize and improve the system of insurance regulation in the United States”, and (ii) a report on “the breadth and scope of the global reinsurance market and the critical role such market plays in supporting insurance in the United States.” The FIO issued its report on how to modernizehas completed such reports and improve the system of insurance regulation in the United States in December 2013. The report details the strengths and weaknesses of the current insurance regulatory system and makes recommendations in the areas of insurance sector solvency and marketplace regulation. Although the report stops short of recommending direct federal regulation of insurance, it does recommend significantly greater federal involvement in a number of areas. In December 2014, the FIO published its report on the breadth and scope of the global reinsurance market. In this reinsurance report, the FIO indicates that reinsurance collateral continues to be at the forefront of its thinking with regard to potential direct federal involvement in insurance regulation. Specifically, the FIO’s report argues that federal officials are well-positioned to make determinations regarding whether a foreign jurisdiction has sufficiently effective regulation and, in doing so, consider other prudential issues pending in the U.S. and between the U.S. and affected foreign jurisdictions. The reinsurance report notes that work continues towards initiating negotiations for covered agreements with leading reinsurance jurisdictions that may have the effect of preempting inconsistent state laws. In 2017, the U.S. and E.U. entered into such a covered agreement. It remains to be seen whether the U.S. will negotiate covered agreements with other major U.S. trading partners. More generally, it remains to be seen whether either of the FIO’s reports will affect the manner in which insurance and reinsurance are regulated in the U.S. and, thereby, the Company’s business.

The Dodd-Frank Act also established a new federal council of financial regulators, the Financial Stability Oversight Council (“Council”(the “FSOC”), which is charged with identifying risks to the financial stability of the U.S. financial markets, promoting market discipline, and responding to emerging threats to the stability of the U.S. financial markets. The CouncilFSOC is empowered to make recommendations to primary financial regulatory agencies regarding the application of new or heightened standards and safeguards for financial activities or practices, and certain participation in such activities, that threaten the stability of the U.S. financial markets. In addition, the CouncilFSOC is authorized to determine whether an insurance company is systematically significant and to recommend that it should be subject to enhanced prudential standards and to supervision by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System. In April 2012, the CouncilFSOC approved its final rule for designating

56


non-bank financial companies as systemically important financial institutions (“SIFI”). Under the final rule, the Company’s assets, liabilities and operations do not currently satisfy the financial thresholds that serve as the first step of the three-stage process to designate a non-bank financial company as a SIFI. Despite not being aWhile recent developments suggest that it is unlikely that FSOC will be designating additional non-bank financial companies as systematically significant, there can be no assurance of that unless and until FSOC’s authority to do so has been rescinded.

Separate from any SIFI designation, the Company could potentially be subject to the orderly liquidation authority of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (“FDIC”), in accordance with Title II of the Dodd-Frank Act. Title II of the Dodd-Frank Act provides that the FDIC, under certain circumstances, may be appointed receiver of a “covered financial company,” which could include an insurance company, for purposes of liquidating such company. This would apply to insurance companies in a limited context, where the relevant state insurance regulator has failed to act within 60 days after a determination has been made to subject the insurance company to the FDIC’s orderly liquidation authority, and resolution by the FDIC would be in accordance with state insurance law. The uncertainty about regulatory requirements could influence the Company’s product line or other business decisions with respect to some product lines.

Additionally, Dodd-Frank created the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (“CFPB”), an independent division of the Department of Treasury with jurisdiction over credit, savings, payment, and other consumer financial products and services, but excluding investment products already regulated by the SEC or the CFTC. The CFPB has supervisory authority over certain non-banks whose activities or products it determines pose risks to consumers.

In addition to promulgating rules that could impose compliance obligations on April 6, 2016, the United States DepartmentCompany, the CFPB continues to bring enforcement actions involving a growing number of Labor (“DOL”)issues, including actions brought jointly with state Attorneys General, which could directly or indirectly affect the Company. Additionally, the CFPB is exploring the possibility of helping Americans manage their retirement savings and is considering the extent of its authority in that area. The Company is unable at this time to predict the impact of the CFPB’s activities on the Company.

Although the full impact of the Dodd-Frank Act cannot be determined until all of the various studies mandated by the law are conducted and all implementing regulations are adopted, many of the legislation’s requirements could have profound and/or adverse consequences for the financial services industry, including for the Company. The Dodd-Frank Act could make it more expensive for the Company to conduct business, require the Company to make changes to its business model, or satisfy increased capital requirements. Additionally, there is substantial uncertainty as to whether aspects of the Dodd-Frank Act or regulatory bodies established thereunder will be impacted by regulatory or legislative changes made by the Trump administration or Congress.

Regulation of Broker-Dealers and Sales of Insurance Products

The sales of our insurance products could also be adversely affected to the extent that some or all of the third-party firms that distribute our products face heightened regulatory scrutiny, increased regulation and potentially heightened litigation risks that cause them to de-emphasize sales of the types of products issued a finalby us.

For example, the Dodd-Frank Act provides that the SEC may promulgate rules to provide that the standard of conduct for all broker-dealers, when providing personalized investment advice about securities to retail customers (and any other customers as the SEC may by rule that is intendedprovide), will be the same as the standard of conduct applicable to expand the circumstances in which a person may be deemed to be an investment advice “fiduciary” for purposes ofadviser under the Employee Retirement Income SecurityInvestment Advisers Act of 1974 (“ERISA”) and certain Code sections1940. Although the full impact of such a provision can only be measured when the implementing regulations are adopted, the intent of this provision is to authorize the SEC to impose a heightened standard of care owed by broker-dealers to their customers, similar to the duties applicable to IRAs. In connection with this expanded definition,investment advisers under existing law. On April 18, 2018, the Department of Labor issuedSEC published a complex series of exemptions from ERISAproposed rules related to the standard of care owed by a broker-dealer to its customers (“Regulation BI”), and Code restrictions. Compliance with these rulesthe

57


creation of a Form CRS Relationship Summary. Among other things, Regulation BI would impose a “best interest” standard of care on broker-dealers making recommendation to their customers. Broker-dealers and investment advisers would be required to provide the Form CRS Relationship Summary to their customers. The Form is designed to provide information about the broker-dealer or investment adviser to their customers. The SEC requested comments on the newly proposed regulations by August 7, 2018. We cannot predict whether any such proposal will be adopted and, if so, what impact it could significantly increase the costs associated with distributing investment productshave on our business, consolidated results of operations and limit the services that investment providers and professionals provide to retirement plan investors. These rules are currently scheduled to become fully effective on July 1, 2019.financial condition.

We are not yet certain how, if at all, these rules might be amended during this extension of the applicability date given the change in presidential administrations following the publication of the final rule. Litigation by both proponent and opponents of the rule create additional uncertainty. There is also a possibiolitypossibility that other regulators including the SEC and the various states through the NAIC may develop other fiduciary rules raising the standard of care owed by insurance agents to their customers that may be in harmony or conflict with the DOL rules. The outcome may affectRegulation BI, if adopted, or other requirements. For example, the extentNAIC annuity suitability working group is working on a proposal to which these rulesadd an enhanced standard to the NAIC’s Suitability in Annuity Transactions Model Regulation. As a result, as this or similar changes are adopted by our state insurance regulator(s) and made applicable to us or the third-party firms that distribute our businesses.products, they could have an adverse impact on our business. Whether other proposals, or the proposed amendments to the NAIC’s Suitability in Annuity Transactions Model Regulation, will be adopted is uncertain.

40


Changes in federal income taxation laws may affect sales of our products and profitability.

The annuity products that we market generally provide the policyholder with certain federal income tax advantages. For example, federal income taxation on any increases in non-qualified annuity contract values (i.e., the “inside build-up”) is deferred until it is received by the policyholder. With other savings and investments, such as certificates of deposit and taxable bonds, the increase in value is generally taxed each year as it is earned.

From time to time, various tax law changes have been proposed that could have an adverse effect on our business, including the elimination of all or a portion of the income tax advantages for annuities. If legislation were enacted to eliminate the tax deferral for annuities, such a change may have an adverse effect on our ability to sell non-qualified annuities. Non-qualified annuities are annuities that are not sold to a qualified retirement plan.

Distributions from non-qualified annuity policies have been considered “investment income” for purposes of the Medicare tax on investment income contained in the Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010. As a result, in certain circumstances, a 3.8% tax (“Medicare Tax”) may be applied to some or all of the taxable portion of distributions from non-qualified annuities to individuals whose income exceeds certain threshold amounts. This new tax may have an adverse effect on our ability to sell non-qualified annuities to individuals whose income exceeds these threshold amounts and could accelerate withdrawals due to this impending additional tax. The constitutionality of the Health Care and Education Reconciliation Act of 2010 is currently the subject of multiple litigation actions initiated by various state attorneys general, and the Act is also the subject of several proposals in the U.S. Congress for amendment and/or repeal. The outcome of such litigation and legislative action as it relates to the 3.8% Medicare Tax is unknown at this time.

We face risks relating to litigation, including the costs of such litigation, management distraction and the potential for damage awards, which may adversely impact our business.

We may become involved in litigation, both as a defendant and as a plaintiff, relating to claims arising out of our operations in the normal course of business. In addition, state regulatory bodies, such as state insurance departments, the SEC, the FINRA, the Department of Labor, and other regulatory bodies regularly make inquiries and conduct examinations or investigations of companies in the annuity business concerning compliance with, among other things, insurance laws, securities laws, the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended, and laws governing the activities of broker-dealers. Companies in the annuity business have faced litigation, including class action lawsuits, alleging improper product design, improper sales practices and similar claims. There can be no assurance that any future litigation will not have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition or results of operations through distraction of our management or otherwise.

Selected Financial Data
[to be updated in amendment filing]

4158


 
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of OperationsSELECTED FINANCIAL DATA
 
[to be updated inby amendment filing]

The following selected financial data is derived from the Company’s financial statements and should be read in conjunction with the discussion under Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. The results of operations data for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015 and the balance sheet data as of December 31, 2017 and 2016 should be read in conjunction with our financial statements and related notes appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus. The results for the past periods are not necessarily indicative of results that may be expected for future periods. The Company entered into reinsurance agreements in 2015, 2013 and 2012 which impact the Company’s financial results. See Note 7 of the Notes to Financial Statements appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus for additional information on these agreements.

 
  2017  2016  2015  2014  2013
 
  (Dollars in thousands)
                    
Revenues                   

Life and health premiums, net

 $  $(21) $(1,175) $127  $139

Contract charges, net

        18   24   46

Net investment income

  517   376   366   278   176

Net realized investment gains

        117      

Other income

  3,996   3,415   5,336      293
 
                    
Total revenues  4,513   3,770   4,662   429   654
 
                    
Benefits and expenses                   

Life and health insurance claims

                   

and benefits, net

  2   (1)  (1,204)  112   179

Interest credited to policyholder

                   

account balances, net

        4   8   9

Operating and other expenses

  1,709   1,049   1,633   137   86
 
                    
Total benefits and expenses  1,711   1,048   433   257   274
 
                    
Income before income taxes  2,802   2,722   4,229   172   380
Income tax expense  723   887   1,449   11   249
 
                    
Net income $2,079  $1,835  $2,780  $161  $131
 

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations reviews our financial condition at December 31, 2017 and December 31, 2016; our results of operations for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015; and where appropriate, factors that may affect future financial performance. This discussion should be read in conjunction with our financial statements and notes thereto appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus. The dollar amounts disclosed in this Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations are “in thousands.”

59


Cautionary Statement Regarding Forward-Looking Information

All statements, trend analyses and other information contained in this Prospectus and elsewhere (such as in press releases, presentations by us, our immediate parent CMIC, or CUNA Mutual Holding Company (“CM Holding”), our management or oral statements) relative to markets for our products and trends in our operations or financial results, as well as other statements including words such as “anticipate”, “believe”, “plan”, “estimate”, “expect”, “intend”, and other similar expressions, constitute forward-looking statements. We caution that these statements may vary from actual results and the differences between these statements and actual results can be material. Accordingly, we cannot assure you that actual results will not differ materially from those expressed or implied by the forward-looking statements. Factors that could contribute to these differences include, among other things:

general economic conditions and other factors, including prevailing interest rate levels and stock and credit market performance which may affect (among other things) our ability to sell our products, our ability to access capital resources and the costs associated therewith, the fair value of our investments, which could result in other than temporary impairments, and certain liabilities, and the lapse rate and profitability of policies;
customer response to new products and marketing initiatives;
changes in the Federal income tax laws and regulations which may affect the relative income tax advantages of our products;
increasing competition in the sale of annuities;
regulatory changes or actions, including those relating to regulation of financial services affecting (among other things) bank and credit union sales and underwriting of insurance products and regulation of the sale, underwriting and pricing of products; and
the risk factors or uncertainties disclosed in this Prospectus.

For a detailed discussion of these and other factors that might affect our performance see the section entitled “Potential Risk Factors That May Affect Our Business and Our Future Results.”

Overview

We are a wholly-owned indirect subsidiary of CMFG Life Insurance Company (“CMFG Life”) and a direct wholly-owned subsidiary of CMIC. Our ultimate parent is CM Holding, a mutual insurance holding company organized under the laws of Iowa. On May 3, 2007, the Company re-domiciled from Wisconsin to Iowa. On February 17, 2012, we amended and restated our Articles of Incorporation to change our purpose to be the writing of any and all of the lines of insurance and annuity business authorized by Iowa Code Chapter 508 as authorized by the laws of the State of Iowa.

The Company is authorized to sell life, health and annuity policies in all states in the U.S. and the District of Columbia, except New York. The following table identifies states with premiums greater than 5% of total direct premium and states with deposits on annuity contracts greater than 5% of total deposits. The 2018, 2017 and 2016 results associated with the deposits on annuity contracts include MEMBERS® Zone Annuity and MEMBERS® Horizon Variable Annuity. The 2015 results associated with deposits on annuity contracts include MEMBERS® Zone Annuity.

60


 
  Direct Life and Health Premium  Deposits on Annuity Contracts 
 
  2017  2016  2015  2017  2016  2015 
 
Michigan 62%  63%  63%  9%  6%  8% 
Texas 24  23  23  5  8  7 
California 5  6  5  6  7  8 
Pennsylvania *  *  *  8  6  5 
Iowa *  *  *  7  6  5 
Indiana *  *  *  6  7  6 
Wisconsin *  *  *  6  6  5 
Washington *  *  *  *  5  5 
Florida *  *  *  *  *  5 
 
*Less than 5%                  

No other state represents more than 5% of the Company’s premiums or deposits for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016, and 2017.

As of December 31, 2017, the Company had more than $3,260 million and $2,586 million in assets and more than $80 million and $86 million of life insurance in force, respectively.

The Company services existing closed blocks of individual and group life policies. In August 2013, the Company began issuing a single premium deferred index annuity contract under the name “MEMBERS® Zone Annuity”. In July 2016, the Company began issuing a flexible premium variable and index-linked deferred annuity contract under the name “MEMBERS® Horizon Variable Annuity”. In December 2018, the Company began issuing a flexible premium variable and index-linked deferred annuity contract under the name “MEMBERS® Horizon II Variable Annuity”. The Contract described in the prospectus is first being offered as of the date of this Prospectus. When it becomes available, the Company will have four annuity contract forms for sale. These annuity contracts account for all the new sales of the Company. We distribute the annuity contracts through multiple face-to-face distribution channels, including:

Managed Agents: employees of CMFG Life who sell insurance and investment products to members of credit unions that have contracted with the Company and its affiliates to provide these services;
Dual Employee Agents: employees of credit unions who sell insurance and investment products to members of credit unions that have contracted with the Company and its affiliates to provide these services. These agents are registered representatives of the Company’s affiliated broker dealer, CBSI; and
Independent Agents: agents who also represent other insurance companies and, along with or through an unaffiliated broker-dealer, contract with the Company to offer its annuity products that are made available for distribution through this channel.

We entered into a Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life in 2012. Under this agreement, we agreed to cede 95% of all insurance in force as of October 31, 2012 to CMFG Life. On September 30, 2015, we amended the Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life and now cede 100% of our insurance policies in force to CMFG Life. In 2013, we entered into a second agreement to cede 100% of the business related to MEMBERS® Zone Annuity contracts to CMFG Life. On November 1, 2015, we entered into a Coinsurance and Modified Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to MEMBERS® Horizon Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity contracts. On October 15, 2018, we amended the Coinsurance and Modified Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to MEMBERS® Horizon II Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity contracts. On ______, we amended the Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to CUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity contracts. These agreements do not relieve us of our obligations to our policyholders under contracts covered by these agreements. However, they do transfer all the Company’s underwriting profits and losses to CMFG Life and require CMFG Life to indemnify the Company for all of its liabilities. As a result, the Company believes its profitability from insurance operations going forward will be minimal.

61


CMFG Life provides significant services required in the conduct of the Company’s operations pursuant to a Cost Sharing, Procurement, Disbursement and Billing and Collection Agreement. CMFG Life allocates expenses to us on the basis of estimated time spent by employees of CMFG Life on Company matters and the use of operational resources. Management believes the allocations of expenses are reasonable and that the results of the Company’s operations may have materially differed in a negative manner from the results reflected in the accompanying financial statements if the Company did not have this relationship.

Critical Accounting Policies

The complexity of the business environment and applicable authoritative accounting guidance requires us to closely monitor our accounting policies. The following summary of our critical accounting policies is intended to enhance your ability to assess our financial condition and results of operations and the potential volatility due to changes in estimates.

Use of Estimates – The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“GAAP”) requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates and in some cases the difference could be material. Investment valuations, embedded derivatives, claim and policyholder benefit reserves and deferred tax asset valuation reserves are most affected by the use of estimates and assumptions.

Investments – Investments in debt securities are classified as available-for-sale and are carried at fair value. Unrealized gains and losses on investments in debt securities, net of federal income taxes, are included in accumulated other comprehensive income as a separate component of stockholder’s equity.

Fair value is defined as the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.

The fair value hierarchy prioritizes the inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value of assets and liabilities into three broad levels. The Company has categorized its financial instruments, based on the degree of subjectivity inherent in the valuation technique, as follows:

Level 1: Inputs are directly observable and represent quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets the Company has the ability to access at the measurement date.
Level 2: All significant inputs are observable, either directly or indirectly, other than quoted prices included in Level 1, for the asset or liability. This includes: (i) quoted prices for similar instruments in active markets, (ii) quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in markets that are not active, (iii) inputs other than quoted prices that are observable for the instruments, and (iv) inputs that are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data by correlation or other means.
Level 3: One or more significant inputs are unobservable and reflect the Company’s estimates of the assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability, including assumptions about risk.

For purposes of determining the fair value of the Company’s investments, observable inputs are those inputs used by market participants in valuing financial instruments, which are developed based on market data obtained from independent sources. The Company uses prices and inputs that are current as of the measurement date. In some instances, valuation inputs used to measure fair value fall into different levels of the fair value hierarchy. The category level in the fair value hierarchy is determined based on the lowest level input that is significant to the fair value measurement in its entirety.

62


The hierarchy requires the use of market observable information when available for assessing fair value. The Company has no Level 3 investments included in other comprehensive income.

Our assets which are measured at fair value on a recurring basis as of December 31, 2017 are presented below based on the fair value hierarchy levels.

 
                 
Assets, at Fair Value  Level 1  Level 2  Level 3  Total
 
                 
Cash equivalents  $16,607  $  $  $16,607
Debt securities:                

U.S. government and agencies

      8, 954      8,954

Residential mortgage-backed securities:

      1,713      1,713
 

Total debt securities

      10,667      10,667

Derivatives embedded in assets on deposit

         471,192   471,192

Separate account assets

      69,005      69,005
 
                 

Total assets

  $16,607  $79,672  $471,192  $567,471
 
                 
 
                 
Liabilities, at Fair Value  Level 1  Level 2  Level 3  Total
 
                 
Derivatives embedded in annuity contracts  $  $  $471,192  $471,192
 
                 

Total liabilities

  $  $  $471,192  $471,192
 

Our assets which are measured at fair value on a recurring basis as of December 31, 2016 are presented below based on the fair value hierarchy levels.

 
                
Assets, at Fair Value Level 1  Level 2  Level 3  Total
 
                
Cash equivalents $14,415  $  $  $14,415
Debt securities:               

U.S. government and agencies

     8,430      8,430

Residential mortgage-backed securities

     2,109      2,109
 

Total debt securities

     10,539      10,539

Derivatives embedded in assets on deposit

        246,405   246,405

Separate account assets

     20,221      20,221
 
                

Total assets

 $14,415  $30,760  $246,405  $291,580
 

 
                
Liabilities, at Fair Value Level 1  Level 2  Level 3  Total
 
                
Derivatives embedded in annuity contracts $  $  $246,405  $246,405
 
                
Total liabilities $  $  $246,405  $246,405
 

63


Other-Than-Temporary Investment Impairments – Investment securities are reviewed for other than temporary impairment (“OTTI”) on an ongoing basis. The Company creates a watchlist of securities based largely on the fair value of an investment security relative to its cost basis. When the fair value drops below the Company’s cost, the Company monitors the security for OTTI. The determination of OTTI requires significant judgment on the part of the Company and depends on several factors, including:

the existence of any plans to sell the investment security;
the extent to which fair value is less than book value;
the underlying reason for the decline in fair value (credit concerns, interest rates, etc.);
the financial condition and near-term prospects of the issuer/borrower, including the ability to meet contractual obligations, relevant industry trends and conditions;
the Company’s intent and ability to retain the investment for a period of time sufficient to allow for an anticipated recovery in fair value;
the Company’s ability to recover all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the agreements; and
the Company’s collateral position in the case of bankruptcy or restructuring.

A debt security is considered other-than-temporarily impaired when the fair value is less than the amortized cost basis and its value is not expected to recover through the Company’s holding period of the security. If a credit loss exists, but the Company does not intend to sell the impaired debt security and is not more likely than not to be required to sell before recovery, it is required to bifurcate the impairment into the loss that is attributable to credit and non-credit related risk. The credit portion of the OTTI is the difference between the present value of the expected future cash flows and amortized cost. Only the estimated credit loss amount is recognized in earnings, with the remainder of the loss amount recognized in other comprehensive income. If the Company intends to sell, at the time this determination is made, the Company records a realized loss equal to the difference between the amortized cost and fair value. The fair value of the other-than-temporarily impaired security becomes its new cost basis. In determining whether an unrealized loss is expected to be other than temporary, the Company considers, among other factors, any plans to sell the security, the severity of impairment, financial position of the issuer, recent events affecting the issuer’s business and industry sector, credit ratings, and the ability of the Company to hold the investment until the fair value has recovered at least its original cost basis.

For securitized debt securities, the Company considers factors including residential property changes in value that vary by property type and location and average cumulative collateral loss rates that vary by vintage year. These assumptions require the use of significant management judgment and include the probability of issuer default and estimates regarding timing and amount of expected recoveries. In addition, projections of expected future debt security cash flows may change based upon new information regarding the performance of the issuer and/or underlying collateral.

For certain securitized financial assets with contractual cash flows, the Company is required to periodically update its best estimate of cash flows over the life of the security. If the fair value of a securitized financial asset is less than its cost or amortized cost and there has been a decrease in the present value of the estimated cash flows since the last revised estimate, considering both timing and amount, an OTTI charge is recognized. The Company also considers its intent and ability to retain a temporarily impaired security until recovery. Estimating future cash flows involves judgment and includes

64


both quantitative and qualitative factors. Such determinations incorporate various information and assessments regarding the future performance of the underlying collateral. In addition, projections of expected future cash flows may change based upon new information regarding the performance of the underlying collateral.

Management has completed a review for other-than-temporarily impaired securities at December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015 and recorded no OTTI. As a result of the subjective nature of these estimates, however, provisions may subsequently be determined to be necessary as new facts emerge and a greater understanding of economic trends develops. Consistent with the Company’s practices, OTTI will be recorded as appropriate and as determined by the Company’s regular monitoring procedures of additional facts.

Assets on Deposit – Assets on deposit represent the amount of policyholder account balances related to reinsurance of the single premium deferred annuity and risk control accounts of the flexible premium deferred variable annuity contracts. Assets on deposit are accounted for on a basis consistent with accounting for the underlying investment type contracts; therefore, the Company accounts for the reinsurance of these contracts using the deposit method of accounting consistent with the terms of the reinsurance agreement with CMFG Life. The related contract charges and interest credited to policyholder account balances in the statements of operations and comprehensive income (loss) are reported net of the amounts ceded under the agreement. See Note 7 of the Notes to the Financial Statements appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus for a further discussion of the ceding agreement.

Derivative Financial Instruments - – The Company issues single premium deferred annuity and flexible premium deferred variable annuity contracts that contain embedded derivatives. Derivatives embedded within non-derivative host contracts are separated from the host instrument when the embedded derivative is not clearly and closely related to the host instrument. Such embedded derivatives are recorded at fair value, and they are reported as part of assets on deposit and policyholder account balances in the balance sheets, with the change in the value being recorded in net realized investment gains.

Changes in the fair value of the embedded derivative in assets on deposit offset changes in the fair value of the embedded derivative in policyholder account balances; both of these changes are included in net realized investment gains. Accretion of the interest on assets on deposit offsets accretion of the interest on the host contract; both of these activities are included in interest credited on policyholder account balances and are ceded as part of the ceding and reinsurance agreements.

Reinsurance – Reinsurance premiums, claims and benefits, commission expense reimbursements, and reserves related to reinsured business ceded are accounted for on a basis consistent with the accounting for the underlying direct policies that have been ceded and the terms of the reinsurance contracts. Premiums and insurance claims and benefits in the statements of operations and comprehensive income (loss) are reported net of the amounts ceded to other companies under such reinsurance contracts. Ceded insurance reserves and ceded benefits paid are included in reinsurance recoverables along with certain ceded policyholder account balances which include mortality risk. A prepaid reinsurance asset is also recorded for the portion of unearned premiums related to ceded policies.

The Company entered into a Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life, as described previously in the Overview of this Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations. As consideration for the reinsurance provided under this agreement, the Company transfers all of its revenues to CMFG Life. Specifically, CMFG Life receives 100% of all premiums and insurance claims and benefits received on account of our existing business.

The Company entered into a second agreement with CMFG Life, as described previously in the Overview of this Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, to cede 100% of its MEMBERS® Zone Annuity investment-type Contracts, which are accounted for using the deposit method of accounting. The Company amended this agreement on ________ and will cede 100% of new business related to the Contract in this Prospectus, which will be accounted for using the deposit method of accounting.

65


The Company entered into a third agreement with CMFG Life, as described previously in the Overview of this Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, to cede 100% of its MEMBERS® Horizon Variable Annuity investment-type Contracts. Accordingly, the agreement is accounted for using the deposit method of accounting. The Company amended this agreement and will cede 100% of new business related to its MEMBERS® Horizon II Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity investment-type Contracts, which will be accounted for using the deposit method of accounting.

SeparateRecognition of Insurance Revenue and Related Benefits – Term-life and whole-life insurance premiums are recognized as premium income when due. Policy benefits for these products are recognized in relation to the premiums so as to result in the recognition of profits over the expected lives of the policies and contracts.

Policies not subject to significant mortality or longevity risk, such as the Company’s single premium deferred annuity and flexible premium deferred variable annuity contracts, are considered investment-type Contracts. Amounts collected on these products, with the exception of the variable annuity component of the flexible premium deferred variable annuity, are recorded as increases in policyholder account balances. The variable annuity component of the flexible premium deferred variable annuity meets criteria for separate account reporting and therefore is recorded in separate account assets and liabilities. Revenues from investment-type Contracts principally consist of net investment income and contract charges such as expense and Surrender Charges. Expenses for investment-type Contracts consist of interest credited to Contracts, benefits incurred in excess of related policyholder account balances and policy maintenance costs. Because the Company has entered into an agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of this business, these revenues and expenses are ceded and do not impact the statement of operations and comprehensive income (loss). See Note 7, Reinsurance for additional information on this agreement.

Claim and Policy Benefit Reserves – Life and Health – Life and health claim and policy benefit reserves consist principally of future policy benefit reserves and reserves for estimates of future payments on incurred claims reported but not yet paid and unreported incurred claims. Estimates for future payments on incurred claims are developed using actuarial principles and assumptions based on past experience adjusted for current trends. Any change in the probable ultimate liabilities is reflected in net income in the period in which the change is determined.

When actual experience indicates that existing contract liabilities, together with the present value of future gross premiums, will not be sufficient to recover the present value of future benefits or recover unamortized deferred acquisition costs, a premium deficiency will be recognized by either a reduction in unamortized acquisition costs or an increase in liability of future benefits.

Additionally, the liability for future policy benefits may not be deficient in the aggregate to trigger a premium deficiency, but the pattern of earnings may be such that profits are expected to be recognized in early years followed by losses in later years. In those situations, the liability for future benefits will be increased to offset losses that would be recognized in later years. The Company recorded a liability of $138 for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2018 for the profits that are expected to be followed by losses in the future. There was no liability recorded for the three or nine months ended September 30, 2017.

The Company entered into three agreements with CMFG Life, as described previously in the Overview of this Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations to mitigate the Company’s risks. These agreements do not relieve the Company of its obligations to our policyholders under contracts covered by these agreements. However, they do transfer all of the Company’s underwriting profits and losses to CMFG Life and require CMFG Life to indemnify the Company for all of its liabilities.

66


Policyholder Account Balances – The single premium deferred annuities and risk control accounts of the flexible premium deferred variable annuities, are included in policyholder account balances. These products have two risk control accounts, referred to as the Secure and Growth Accounts; the Secure Account has an annual credited interest rate floor of 0% and the annual Growth Account floor is -10%. The Secure and Growth Accounts -both have credited interest rate caps that vary based on Contract Issue Date. Interest is credited at the end of each Contract Year during the selected index term based on the allocation between risk control accounts and the performance of an external index during that Contract Year. Each risk control account has a reference index. For the single premium deferred annuity, the Company offers one reference index, which is the S&P 500 Index. For the flexible premium deferred variable annuity, the Company offers two reference indices, which are the S&P 500 Index and the MSCI EAFE Index. Policyholders are able to allocate funds in both the Secure and Growth Accounts for the available indices. At the end of the initial index term only the Secure Account will be available as an option to the policyholder. The average annualized credited rate for the single premium deferred annuity was 1.44%, 1.63% and 1.65% for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015, respectively. The average annualized credited rate for the risk control accounts of the flexible premium deferred variable annuity was 1.59% and 1.12% for the years ended December 31, 2017 and 2016, respectively. The average annualized credited rate for the single premium deferred annuity was 1.98% and 1.38% for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2018, respectively and 1.45% and 1.41% for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2017, respectively. The average annualized credited rate for the risk control accounts of the flexible premium deferred variable annuity was 2.59% and 1.52% for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2018, respectively and 2.92% and 2.21% for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2017, respectively.

The Company recognizes a liability at the stated account value for policyholder deposits that are not subject to significant policyholder mortality or longevity risk and for universal life-type policies. The account value equals the sum of the original deposit and accumulated interest, less any withdrawals and expense charges. The average credited rate of interest applied to the account values was 4.5% for each of the three and nine months ending September 30, 2018 and 2017 and for the years ending December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015. The minimum guaranteed rate of interest that must be credited to such account values for the life of those contracts is 4.5%.

Income Taxes – The Company recognizes taxes payable or refundable and deferred taxes for the tax consequences of differences between the financial reporting and tax basis of assets and liabilities. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured by applying the enacted tax rates to the difference between the financial statement and tax basis of assets and liabilities. The Company records current tax benefits and deferred tax assets utilizing a benefits-for-loss approach. Under this approach, current benefits are realized, and deferred tax assets are considered realizable by the Company when realized or realizable by the consolidated group of which the Company is a member even if the benefits would not be realized on a stand-alone basis. The Company records a valuation allowance for deferred tax assets if it determines it is more likely than not that the asset will not be realized by the consolidated group. Deferred income tax assets can be realized through future earnings, including, but not limited to the generation of future income, reversal of existing temporary differences and available tax planning strategies.

The Company is subject to tax-related audits. These audits may result in additional tax assets or liabilities. In establishing tax liabilities, the Company determines whether a tax position is more likely than not to be sustained under examination by the appropriate taxing authority. Tax positions that do not meet the more likely than not standard are not recognized. Tax positions that meet this standard are recognized in the financial statements within net deferred tax assets or liabilities or federal income taxes recoverable or payable.

As a result of the comprehensive tax legislation commonly referred to as the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act (the “Tax Act”), which was enacted on December 22, 2017, the Company remeasured its deferred tax assets and liabilities as of December 31, 2017. See Note 5 of the Notes to Financial Statements appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus for additional information on the impact of the remeasurement and further discussion on the Tax Act.

67


The Company is included in the consolidated federal income tax return of CM Holding, the Company’s ultimate parent. The Company has entered into a tax sharing agreement with CM Holding and its subsidiaries. The agreement provides for the allocation of tax expenses based on each subsidiary’s contribution to the consolidated federal income tax liability. Pursuant to the agreement, subsidiaries that have incurred losses are reimbursed regardless of the utilization of the loss in the current year. Federal income taxes recoverable reported on the balance sheet are due from affiliates.

Executive Summary

The Company provides life and health insurance throughout the United States servicing its existing blocks of individual and group life policies, and began marketing the MEMBERS® Zone Annuity Contractcontract in August 2013, and the MEMBERS® Horizon Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity contractContract in 2016.2016, the MEMBERS® Horizon II Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity Contract in 2018, and the Contract offered by this Prospectus as of the date of this Prospectus. The Company is managed as two reportable business segments, (1) life and health, and (2) annuities. See Note 109 of the Notes to the Financial Statements appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus for information related to the two business segments.

The Company began distributing the MEMBERS® Zone Annuity, an individual or joint owned, single premium deferred annuity contract, in 2013 which became the Company’s second reportable business segment. The Company began distributing the MEMBERS® Horizon Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity contract,Contract, an individual or joint owned, flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract in 2016. The results of the Company’s annuities segment, which includes the MEMBERS® Zone Annuity and the MEMBERS® Horizon Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity contracts, are ceded 100% to CMFG Life under the 2013 and 2015 ceding agreements and accordingly does not impact the results of operations.

In 2012, the Company entered into a Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 95% of its business inforce as of October 31, 2012. On September 30, 2015, the Company amended its Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life and now cedes 100% of its insurance policies in force to CMFG Life. In 2013, it entered into a second agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to the MEMBERS® Zone Annuity Contract.contract. On November 1, 2015, the Company entered into a Coinsurance and Modified Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to ceded 100% of the business related to the MEMBERS® Horizon Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity contract.Contract. On October 15, 2018, the Company amended its Coinsurance and Modified Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to MEMBERS® Horizon II Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity Contracts. On ______, we amended the Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to CUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity contracts. See Note 7 of the Notes to the Financial Statements appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus for information on the 2012, 2013 and 2015 agreements.

Results of Operations for the Years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015.
2015

[Total revenues, which consisted mainly of net premiums, net realized investment gains, investment income and other income, were $4,513, $3,770 and $4,662 for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015, respectively. The increase in total revenues in 2017 as compared to be updated2016 was primarily due to an increase in other income from a litigation settlement received on structured security investments that had previously been sold along with an increase in net investment income. The decrease in total revenues in 2016 compared to 2015 was primarily due to a decrease in other income from a litigation settlement received on structured security investments that had previously been sold. There was no net premium in 2017 due to the reinsurance agreements with CMFG Life. Net premium revenue was ($21) and ($1,175) for the years ended December 31, 2016 and 2015, respectively, and consists of life and health direct (and ceded) written renewal premium. Effective September 30, 2015, all premiums are 100% ceded to CMFG Life. The negative premium revenue in 2015 is reflective of the reinsurance agreement amendment filing]executed in 2015 pursuant to which the Company ceded $1,297 of earned premiums. Total net investment income was $517, $376 and $366 for the years ended December 31, 2017,

4268


2016 and 2015, respectively, which represents an average yield earned of 1.8%, 1.2% and 1.6% for the same periods, respectively. There were no sales of investments in 2017 or 2016 that resulted in a realized gain or loss. Net realized investment gains were $117 for the year ended December 31, 2015 due to the sale of investments.

Total benefits and expenses were $1,711, $1,048 and $433 for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015, respectively. The increase in benefits and expenses in 2017 as compared to 2016 was primarily due to increased legal expenses related to the settlement received on structured security investments that had previously been sold. The increase in benefits and expenses in 2016 as compared to 2015 was primarily due to the 2015 amendment to the 2012 reinsurance agreement. Life and health benefits totaled $2, ($1) and ($1,204) for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015, respectively. The increase in total benefits and expenses in 2017 as compared to 2016 was due to a true up of a ceded benefit. The Company ceded $1,244 of life and health benefits in 2015 as a result of the September 30, 2015 amendment to the 2012 reinsurance agreement, leading to the increase in benefits in 2016. As a result of the September 30, 2015 amendment, all benefits are ceded to CMFG Life. Operating expenses totaled $1,709, $1,049 and $1,633 for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015, respectively. CMFG Life provides significant services required in the conduct of the Company’s operations. Operating expenses incurred by the Company that are specifically identifiable are borne by the Company; other operating expenses are allocated from CMFG Life on the basis of estimated time and usage studies. Operating expenses are primarily related to and include employee costs such as wages and benefits, legal expenses and other operating expenses such as rent, insurance and utilities. The increase in operating expenses in 2017 as compared to 2016 was primarily due to an increase in legal fees related to a litigation settlement received on structured security investments that had previously been sold. The decrease in operating expenses in 2016 as compared to 2015 was primarily due to a decrease in legal fees related to litigation settlements received on structured security investments that had previously been sold.

Income tax expense is recorded at 35% offset by prior year tax expense or benefits primarily related to interest on accrued refunds, resulting in an effective tax rate of 25.8%, 32.5% and 34.3% for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015, respectively.

Net income was $2,079, $1,835 and $2,780 for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015, respectively. The increase in 2017 net income as compared to 2016 and the decrease in 2016 net income as compared to 2015 was primarily due to increased litigation settlements received in 2017 and 2015 and decreased litigation settlements received in 2016 related to structured security investments that had previously been sold.

Tax Reform – The Tax Act made changes to the U.S. tax code, including, but not limited to reducing the U.S. federal corporate tax rate to 21% effective January 1, 2018.

The Company completed its initial evaluation of the impacts of the Tax Act and recorded a net tax expense of $49 for the quarter ended December 31, 2017 due to the remeasurement of deferred tax assets and liabilities.

The Company has made no adjustments to the impacts initially recorded for the three or nine months ended September 30, 2018. The Company’s accounting for the impacts of the Tax Act is now complete.

Financial Condition

The Company’s investment strategy is based upon a strategic asset allocation framework that considers the need to manage our General Account investment portfolio on a risk-adjusted spread basis for the underwriting of contract liabilities and to maximize return on retained capital. The Company’s investment in debt securities consists of residential mortgage-backed securities and U.S. Treasury securities. While the are categorized as available-for-sale, the Company generally holds our bond portfolio to maturity.

69


Insurance statutes regulate the type of investments that the Company is permitted to purchase and limit the amount of funds that may be used for any one type of investment. In light of these statutes and regulations and our business and investment strategy, the Company generally seeks to invest in United States government and government-sponsored agency securities and debt securities rated investment grade by established nationally recognized rating organizations or in securities of comparable investment quality, if not rated.

The Company’s investment portfolio is comprised solely of debt securities at December 31, 2017 and December 31, 2016. The table below presents our total debt securities by type at December 31, 2017 and December 31, 2016.

 
   December 31,
    
   2017   %  2016 % 
 
                
U.S. government and agencies  $8,954   83.9% $8,430 80.0%
Residential mortgage-backed securities:   1,713   16.1   2,109 20.0 
 
                
Total debt securities  $10,667   100.0% $10,539 100.0%
 

The amortized cost and estimated fair value of debt securities by contractual maturity are shown below at December 31, 2017. Actual maturities may differ from contractual maturities because borrowers may have the right to call or prepay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties.

 
[To be updated by amendment – provide 2018 information]        
        
        
  Amortized Cost  Estimated Fair Value
 
Due after one year through five years $304  $304
Due after ten years  8,748   8,650
Residential mortgage-backed securities:  1,598   1,713
 
Total debt securities $10,650  $10,667
 

The Company has classified its debt securities as available-for-sale. Available-for-sale securities are reported at fair value and unrealized gains and losses, if any, on these securities (net of income taxes) are included as a separate component of stockholder’s equity, thereby exposing stockholder’s equity to volatility for changes in the reported fair value of securities classified as available-for-sale.

At December 31, 2017, the Company owned one debt security with a fair value of $8,207 in an unrealized loss position of $103 for more than twelve months. At December 31, 2016, the Company owned one debt security with a fair value of $8,115 in an unrealized loss position of $638 for less than twelve months. At December 31, 2015, the Company owned one debt security with a fair value of $8,210 in an unrealized loss position of $546 for less than twelve months.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

On September 30, 2015, the Company amended its Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life and now cedes 100% of its insurance policies in force to CMFG Life. In 2013, the Company entered into an agreement to cede 100% of the business related to MEMBERS® Zone Annuity contracts to CMFG Life. On November 1, 2015, the Company entered into a Coinsurance and Modified Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to MEMBERS® Horizon Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity contracts. On October 15, 2018, the Company amended its Coinsurance and Modified Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related

70


to MEMBERS® Horizon II Flexible Premium Deferred Variable and Index Linked Annuity contracts. On _______, we amended the Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to CUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity contracts. These agreements do not relieve us of our obligations to our policyholders under contracts covered by these agreements. However, they do transfer all of the Company’s underwriting profits and losses to CMFG Life and require CMFG Life to indemnify the Company for all of its liabilities.

As consideration for the reinsurance provided under these agreements, and as of November 1, 2015, the Company transfers all of our revenues to CMFG Life. Specifically, CMFG Life receives 100% of all premiums and other amounts received on account of our existing business and new business. CMFG Life pays us a monthly expense allowance to reimburse the Company for expenses and costs incurred on account of its insurance business.

While the reinsurance transactions have a minimal impact on our stockholder’s equity, they substantially diminish our net liabilities and greatly decrease the amount of capital and liquidity needed within the Company.

Operating activities provided $5,773 of net cash flow for the year ended December 31, 2017, used cash of $41 for the year ended December 31, 2016 and provided $10,987 in net cash flow for the year ended December 31, 2015. The Company’s primary use of funds includes the payment of benefits and related operating expenses as well as settlements related to the reinsurance agreements with CMFG Life. The Company issues the single premium deferred annuity contracts on the 10th and 25th of each month. The Company recognizes a liability on contracts for which it has received cash but has not issued a contract. The increase in operating cash flow in 2017 as compared to 2016 was primarily due to an increase in cash received for contracts not yet issued. The decrease in operating cash flow in 2016 as compared to 2015 was primarily due to a reduction in cash received for contracts not yet issued. The Company’s sources of funds include renewal premiums, sales of investment-type contracts and investment income.

Investing activities provided $367, $1,628 and $331 of net cash flow for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015, respectively. The Company’s main investing activities include the purchase and sale or maturity of debt securities. The Company had maturities on debt securities which provided cash of $367 and $1,628 in 2017 and 2016, respectively, contributing to the net increase of cash from investing activities. The Company purchased $8,760 of debt securities and sold $8,987 of debt securities in 2015, contributing to the net cash provided from investing activities.

The Company’s financing activities used $6,432 and provided $52 and $173 of net cash flow for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015, respectively. The Company’s main financing activities include the collection of deposits and payment of withdrawals from policyholder’s accounts. The decrease in financing cash flow in 2017 as compared to 2016 is primarily due to the payment of a $7,000 dividend to the Company’s parent. The Company had increased deposits on policyholder accounts in 2016 as compared to 2015; however, effective for all of 2016, 100% of the insurance business was ceded to CMFG Life which resulted in a decrease in the cash provided by financing activities.

Operating activities provided $830 and $998 of net cash flow for the nine months ended September 30, 2018 and 2017, respectively. The Company’s sources of funds include renewal premiums, sales of investment-type contracts and investment income and the Company’s primary use of funds includes the payment of benefits and related operating expenses as well as settlements related to the reinsurance agreements with CMFG Life. The Company issues the single premium deferred annuity contracts on the 10th and 25th of each month. The Company recognizes a liability on contracts for which it has received cash but has not issued a contract. The decrease in operating cash flow as of September 30, 2018 as compared to 2017 was primarily due to a decrease in cash received for contracts not yet issued.

Investing activities provided $528 and $310 of net cash flow for the nine months ended September 30, 2018 and 2017, respectively. The Company’s main investing activities include the purchase and sale or maturity of debt securities. The Company had maturities on debt securities which provided cash of $528 and $310 during the nine months ended September 30, 2018 and 2017, respectively, contributing to the net increase of cash from investing activities.

71


The Company’s financing activities provided $503 and $309 of net cash flow for the nine months ended September 30, 2018 and 2017, respectively. The Company’s main financing activities include the collection of deposits and payment of withdrawals from policyholder’s accounts. The increase in financing cash flow for the nine months ended September 30, 2018 as compared to 2017 is primarily due to an increase in cash received for new annuity deposits.

Liquidity requirements are met primarily through quarterly settlements under the coinsurance and modified coinsurance agreements with CMFG Life. The Company anticipates receiving adequate cash flow from these settlements and investment income to meet its obligations. However, a primary liquidity concern going forward will be the risk of an extraordinary level of early policyholder withdrawals. The Company includes provisions within its policies, such as Surrender Charges, that help limit and discourage early withdrawals.

The Company believes that cash flows generated from sources above will be sufficient to satisfy the near term liquidity requirements of its operations, including reasonable foreseeable contingencies. However, the Company cannot predict future experience regarding benefits and surrenders since benefit and surrender levels are influenced by such factors as the interest rate environment, the Company’s claims paying ability and the Company’s financial credit ratings.

Most annuity deposits the Company will receive going forward will be invested in high quality investments, those identified by the Company as investment grade, to fund future commitments. The Company believes that the settlement it receives under the reinsurance agreements with CMFG Life, the diversity of its investment portfolio and a concentration of in high quality securities should provide sufficient liquidity to meet foreseeable cash requirements. Although there is no present need or intent to dispose of our investments, the Company could readily liquidate portions of our investments, if such a need arose. Sales of available-for-sale securities in an unrealized loss position are subject to other-than-temporary impairment considerations including our intent to sell.

Statutory Financial Data and Dividend Restrictions

The Company is a life and health insurer domiciled in Iowa. The Company files statutory basis financial statements with regulatory authorities. Our statutory capital and surplus was $17,660 and $18,601 as of September 30, 2018 and December 31, 2017, respectively. Our statutory basis net income was $1,914, $1,051 and $1,112 for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016, and 2015, respectively. Our statutory basis net income was $124 and $929 for the three months ended September 30, 2018 and 2017, respectively. Our statutory basis net income was $383 and $1,137 for the nine months ended September 30, 2018 and 2017, respectively.

The Company is subject to statutory regulations as to maintenance of equity and the payment of dividends. Generally, ordinary dividends from an insurance subsidiary to its parent company must meet notice requirements promulgated by the regulator of the subsidiary’s state of domicile (“Insurance Department”). Extraordinary dividends, as defined by state statutes, must be approved by the Insurance Department. Based on Iowa statutory regulations, the Company could pay dividends of $1,860 during 2018 without prior approval of the Iowa Insurance Department.

Risk-based capital requirements promulgated by the NAIC require U.S. insurers to maintain minimum capitalization levels that are determined based on formulas incorporating credit risk, insurance risk, interest rate risk, and general business risk. At December 31, 2016 and 2015, the Company’s adjusted capital exceeded the minimum capitalization requirements.

72


.

Contractual Obligations

In December 2007, the Company entered into a Procurement and Disbursement and Billing and Collection Services Agreement with CMFG Life and certain other affiliated companies whereby CMFG Life has agreed to provide certain of our operational requirements. In January 2008, the Company entered into a Cost Sharing, Procurement, Disbursement, Billing and Collection Agreement with CMFG Life and certain other affiliated companies. Pursuant to this agreement, CMFG Life has agreed to provide the Company with certain office and market services and personnel services. On January 1, 2015, the Company entered into a Cost Sharing, Procurement, Disbursement, Billing and Collection Agreement which replaced all prior agreements. Additionally, we allocated a certain portion of the total compensation of each of our executive officers and directors, based on various factors, the primary being the estimated time allocated to providing services to the Company. In exchange for providing these administrative functions and use of shared resources and personnel, the Company reimburses CMFG Life for the cost of providing such administrative functions, resources and personnel. The Company reimbursed CMFG Life $20,808, $15,349 and $8,477 for these expenses for the years ended December 31, 2017, 2016 and 2015, respectively. The Company reimbursed CMFG Life $21,676 and $15,293 for these expenses for the nine months ended September 30, 2018 and 2017, respectively.

For detailed discussion of the management services agreement, the investment advisory agreement and the coinsurance agreements, see “Management – Transactions with Related Persons, Promoters and Certain Control Persons.”

Going forward, we may enter into financing transactions, lease agreements, or other commitments in the normal course of our business.

The Company has the following future minimum estimated claim and benefit payments that are 100% reinsured as of December 31, 2017.

 
  Estimated Future Claim
  and Benefit Payments
 
    
Due in one year or less $157,897
Due after one year through three years  508,119
Due after three years through five years  715,613
Due after five years  1,465,865
 
    
Total estimated payments $2,847,494
 

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk and Cyber Security

We have exposure to market risk through both our insurance operations and investment activities, although a significant portion of this risk is reinsured by CMFG Life pursuant to the coinsurance and modified coinsurance agreements discussed above. In addition, many of the measures described herein to offset these market risks are taken by CMFG Life because it will hold all assets related to our insurance business as a result of the Coinsurance Agreements.

Interest rate risk is our primary market risk exposure. Substantial and sustained increases and decreases in market interest rates will affect the profitability of our annuity products and the fair value of our investments. Most of the interest rate risk is absorbed by CMFG Life under the coinsurance and modified coinsurance agreements. The profitability of most of our annuity products will depend on the spreads between interest yield on investments and rates credited on the annuity products. We have the ability to adjust crediting rates (caps, participation rates or asset fee rates for indexed annuities) on substantially all of our annuity products at least annually (subject to minimum guaranteed values). In addition, substantially all of our annuity products have surrender and withdrawal penalty provisions designed to

73


encourage persistency and to help ensure targeted spreads are earned. However, competitive factors, including the impact of the level of surrenders and withdrawals, may limit our ability to adjust or maintain crediting rates at levels necessary to avoid narrowing of spreads under certain market conditions.

A major component of our interest rate risk management program is structuring the General Account investment portfolio with cash flow characteristics consistent with the cash flow characteristics of our annuity products. We use computer models to simulate cash flows expected from our existing business under various interest rate scenarios. These simulations enable us to measure the potential gain or loss in fair value of our interest rate-sensitive financial instruments, to evaluate the adequacy of expected cash flows from our assets to meet the expected cash requirements of our annuity products and to determine if it is necessary to lengthen or shorten the average life and duration of our investment portfolio. The “duration” of a security is the time weighted present value of the security’s expected cash flows and is used to measure a security’s sensitivity to changes in interest rates. When the durations of assets and liabilities are similar, exposure to interest rate risk is minimized because a change in value of assets should be largely offset by a change in the value of liabilities. As of December 31, 2017, the Company’s fixed debt investment securities portfolio consisted of U.S. government and agency securities and residential mortgage-backed securities with fair values of $8,954 and $1,713, respectively, and has an average duration of 16 years.

Our business is highly dependent upon the effective operation of our computer systems and those of our business partners, so that our business is potentially susceptible to operational and information security risks resulting from a cyber-attack. These risks include, among other things, theft, misuse, corruption and destruction of data maintained online or digitally, denial of service on websites and other operational disruption and unauthorized release of confidential customer information. Cyber-attacks affecting the Company may adversely affect us and your Contract Value. For instance, cyber-attacks may interfere with our processing of Contract transactions, cause the release and possible destruction of confidential Owner or business information, impede order processing, subject the Company to regulatory fines and financial losses and/or cause reputational damage. There can be no assurance that we will avoid losses affecting your Contract due to cyber-attacks or information security breaches in the future.

MANAGEMENT
 
Management
[To be updated by amendment]

Directors and Executive Officers

Our directors and executive officers are as follows:

Name Age Position
     
     
David L. Sweitzer 54 President and Director
 
Steven R. Suleski 64 Secretary and Director
 
Brian J. Borakove 39 Treasurer
 
Michael F. Anderson 50 Director
 
Michael T. Defnet 58 Director
 
WilliamWilliams Karls 47 Director

All executive officers and directors are elected annually.

43


David L. Sweitzer has served as President and as director of the Company since October 31, 2016. He also serves as the Senior Vice President of Wealth Management for CMFG Life where he leads overall business strategy and product management for CBSI and CMFG Life’s and its affiliates family of

74


annuity products. Mr. Sweitzer has held various positions in CMFG Life for 26 years. He brings more than 26 years of progressive experience in sales and marketing, sales operations and sales strategy.

Steven R. Suleski has been a director of the Company since December 15, 2015 and has served as our Secretary and Senior Vice President since February 1, 2012. He has served as Associate General Counsel at CMFG Life, from May 1999 to January 2014. He serveshad served as Chief Governance & Compliance Officer effectiveat CMFG Life from January 2014 to present.2017. Before joining the Company, Mr. Suleski spent 12 years at Foley & Lardner, LLP, in Madison, Wisconsin, where he was a partner specializing in securities law, mergers and acquisitions and general corporate law.

Brian J. Borakove has served as our Treasurer since November 19,9, 2012 and Vice President, Corporate Treasurer since November 19, 2012 at CMFG Life. He served as Director of Investment Finance from 2007 to 2011 and was promoted to Associate Treasurer in 2011. Prior to joining CMFG Life, he was a Senior Manager, Investment Finance at Liberty Mutual Insurance in Boston, Massachusetts from 2005 to 2007. Prior to joining Liberty Mutual Insurance, Mr. Borakove served as a Senior Analyst, Treasury at FM Global in Johnston, Rhode Island from 2003-2005. Mr. Borakove held various positions at State Street Bank in Boston, Massachusetts from 2001-2003.

Michael F. Anderson has been a director of the Company since December 15, 2015. He has also servedserves as the Senior Vice President, Chief Legal Officer for CMFG Life where he ishas been responsible for all legal matters across CMFG Life’s business entities since 2011. He has served as Managing Associate General Counsel from 2008 to 2009, was promoted to Vice President in 2009 and in 2011 was promoted to Senior Vice President. Before joining the Company, Mr. Anderson spent 15 years in private practice, most recently as a partner in the New York office of Morgan, Lewis & Bockius.

Michael T. Defnet has been a director of the Company since December 15, 2015 and Senior Vice President of Sales & Marketing for CMFG Life. Mr. Defnet previously served as Senior Vice President of Sales Distribution Support and various positions in CMFG Life’s Sales Department for 25 years. He brings more than 25 years of progressive experience in sales and marketing leadership, sales operations and sales strategy.

William Karls has been director of the Company since August 4, 2017 and has served as Controller for CMFG Life since ____.2012. Prior to joining CMFG Life in 2004, Mr. Karls was a Senior Manager with Strohm Ballweg, LLP, which provides audit and consulting services to insurance companies.

Transactions with Related Persons, Promoters and Certain Control Persons

Policy Regarding Related Person Transactions

.It is our policy to enter into or ratify related person transactions only when our Board of Directors determines that the transaction either is in, or is not inconsistent with, our best interests, including but not limited to situations where we may obtain products or services of a nature, quantity or quality, or on other terms, that are not readily available from alternative sources or when we provide products or services to related persons on an arm’s length basis on terms comparable to those provided to unrelated third parties or on terms comparable to those provided to employees generally.

Therefore, we have adopted the following written procedures for the review, approval or ratification of related person transactions. For purposes of the related person transaction policy, a related person transaction is a transaction, arrangement, or relationship (or any series of similar transactions, arrangements, or relationships) in which (i) we were, are or will be a participant, (ii) the amount of the transaction,

44


arrangement or relationship exceeds $120,000, and (iii) in which a related person had, has or will have a direct or indirect material interest in the transaction.

A related person means:

any person who is, or at any time since the beginning of our last fiscal year was, a member of our Board of Directors or an executive officer or a nominee to become a member of our Board of Directors;

75


 any person who is, or at any time since the beginning of our last fiscal year was, a member of our Board of Directors or an executive officer or a nominee to become a member of our Board of Directors;
any person who is known to be the beneficial owner of more than 5% of any class of our voting securities;
  
any immediate family member of any of the foregoing persons; or
  
any firm, corporation, or other entity in which any of the foregoing persons is employed or is a general partner or principal or in a similar position or in which such person has a 5% or greater beneficial ownership interest.

Any proposed transaction with a related person shallwill be consummated or amended only if the following steps are taken:

 Counsel (either inside or outside) will assess whether the proposed transaction is a related person transaction for purposes of this policy.
  
If counsel determines that the proposed transaction is a related person transaction, the proposed transaction shallwill be submitted to the Board of Directors for consideration at the next meeting or, in those instances in which counsel, in consultation with the President or the Treasurer, determines that it is not practicable or desirable for us to wait until the next committeeBoard of Directors meeting, to the President of the Company (who has been delegated authority to act between meetings).
  
The Board of Directors shall consider all of the relevant facts and circumstances available, including (if applicable) but not limited to: (i) the benefits to the Company; (ii) the impact on a director’s independence in the event the related person is a director, an immediate family member of a director, or an entity in which a director is a partner, shareholder, or executive officer; (iii) the availability of other suppliers or customers for comparable products or services; (iv) the terms of the transaction; and (v) the terms available to unrelated third parties or to employees generally.
  
The Board of Directors shall approve only those related person transactions that are in, or are not inconsistent with, the best interests of the Company and its shareholders, as the Board of Directors determines in good faith. The Board of Directors shall convey the decision to counsel, who shall convey the decision to the appropriate persons within the Company.

At the Board of Director’s first meeting of each fiscal year, it shall review any previously approved related person transactions that remain ongoing and have a remaining term of more than six months or remaining amounts payable to or receivable from the Company of more than $120,000. Based on all relevant facts and circumstances, taking into consideration the Company’s contractual obligations, the Board of Directors shall determine if it is in the best interests of the Company and its shareholders to continue, modify, or terminate the related person transaction.

No member of the Board of Directors shall participate in any review, consideration, or approval of any related person transaction with respect to which such member or any of his or her immediate family members is the related person.

45


Certain Relationships and Related Person Transactions

[to be updated in amendment filing]

.Except for the agreements noted below, there have been no transactions between the Company and any related person since January 1, 2011, nor are any such related person transactions currently being contemplated for which disclosure would be required.

On September 30, 2015, the Company amended its coinsurance agreement with CMFG Life and now cedes 100% of its insurance policies in force to CMFG Life. In 2013, we entered into a second coinsurance agreement to cede 100% of all insurance issued on and after January 1, 2013 to CMFG Life. On November 1, 2015, we entered into a Coinsurance and Modified Coinsurance Agreement with CMFG Life to cede 100% of the business related to the MEMBERS® Horizon Variable Annuity.Contract, and other investment type contracts similar to the Contract. These agreements do not relieve us of our obligations to our policyholders under contracts

76


covered by these agreements. However, they do transfer nearly all of the Company’s underwriting profits and losses to CMFG Life and require CMFG Life to indemnify the Company for nearly all of its liabilities.

On January 1, 2015, the Company entered into a Cost Sharing, Procurement, Disbursement, Billing and Collection Agreement with CMFG Life and certain other affiliated companies and on that same day, January 1, 2015, the Company entered into an Amended and Restated Expense Sharing Agreement with CMFG Life. See “Contractual Obligations” for more information about each of these agreements.

The Company has hired MEMBERS Capital Advisors, Inc. (“MCA”) to provide investment advisory services with respect to the Company’s General Account assets. MCA, which is 100% owned by CMIC, manages substantially all of the Company’s invested assets in accordance with policies, directives and guidelines established by the Company.

Committees of the Board of Directors

Our Board of Directors of the Company has not established any committees. OurThe Board of Directors relies upon the committees of the CM Holding to oversee actions over the subsidiary companies. For example, the CM Holding Audit Committee will assist with oversight of the Company’scompany’s external auditors, performance of internal audit functions and legal and regulatory compliance requirements.

Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation

Our Board of Directors has not established a compensation committee. None of our current executive officers serves on the board of directors or compensation committee (or other committee serving an equivalent function) of any other entity whose executive officers served on our Board of Directors. Mr. Sweitzer is on the Board of Directors for CBSI whose executive officersBoard of Directors include Messrs. Anderson, Defnet, PisarikKarls and Suleski, the other Directors of the Company.

Executive Compensation  [to be updated in amendment filing]

. We sharedo not have any employees but rather are provided personnel, withincluding our named executive officers, by our parent company, CMFG Life, pursuant to a Costthe Amended and Restated Expense Sharing Procurement, Disbursement, Billing and Collection Agreement between CMFG Life and us. Our operational needs are met by CMFG Life and certain of its affiliates pursuant to the CUNA Mutual Group Cost Sharing, Procurement, Disbursement, Billing and Collection Agreement. Certain employees who provide services to us under such agreement are CMFG Life executive officersAs a result, we do not determine or employees and are paid by CMFG Life. Their compensation-related costs are allocated to us based on various factors, the primary being the estimated time allocated to providing services to us. The dollar amounts in this Executive Compensation are not “in thousands”.

In order to help you understand our compensation-related costs, we have set forth below a discussion of CMFG Life’spay any compensation policies and programs as such policies and programs relate to our named executive officers.

46


Compensation Discussion and Analysis. These compensation policies and programs are designed to attract and retain highly qualified and motivated executive officers and employees and encourage and reward achievement of annual and long-term goals.

Federal income tax law limits deductibility of compensation in excess of $1 million paid to certain named executive officers unless this compensation qualifies as “performance-based compensation.” It is the intent ofor additional personnel provided by CMFG Life to qualify its executives’ compensation for deductibility under applicable tax laws, while recognizing that there may be situations in which compensation for executive officers may not be tax deductible.

Named Executive Officers. The primary elements of compensation forour operations. CMFG Life determines and pays the salaries, bonuses and other wages earned by our named executive officers who are officers of and compensatedby additional personnel provided to us by CMFG Life, include base pay and incentive compensation.

Base Pay. The Board of Directors of CM Holding (“CM Holding Board”), the indirect parent ofLife. CMFG Life engages Mercer (US) Inc. (“Mercer”) as a compensation consultantalso determines whether and to what extent our named executive officers and additional personnel from CMFG Life may participate in any with employee benefit plans. We do not have employment agreements with our named executive officers and do not provide advice and data with respectpension or retirement benefits, perquisites or other personal benefits to compensation bench-marking and market practices for executives of CMFG Life. The most recent executive compensation review was presented to the Compensation Committee of the CM Holding Board by Mercer on November 9, 2016. Mercer develops a blended market consensus base salary for each of the positions of theour named executive officers. Mercer utilizes proxy data and private survey data from selected peer insurance companies public and private survey data from 2015 forWe do not have arrangements to make payments to our named executive officers upon their termination or in the financial service and insurance industriesevent of companies.

Incentive Compensation. Under the CSSP for 2016, an incentive compensation pool is created if CM Holding and its subsidiaries consolidated financial statement has positive pre-tax net income on a GAAP basis. If this objective is met, the CM Holding Board determines the amountchange in control of the pool that may be paid to leadershipCompany. See “Contractual Obligations” for more information about the Amended and staff based on CMFG Life performance, using the following guidelines and weighting factors: pre-tax operating gain, 60%; controllable expenses, 20%; and weighted revenue, 20%. Depending upon the level of CMFG Life’s success as determined by the CM Holding Board, compensation is paid out of this pool as a percentage of the base salary according to the level of individual performance. Our management and the CM Holding Board believe that this CSSP design creates the proper focus, flexibility and alignment for maximizing short-term and long-term policyholder value creation to benefit the policyholders who own CM Holding, the ultimate parent of bothRestated Expense Sharing Agreement between CMFG Life and the Company.

There is an additional incentive program for senior management personnel of CMFG Life, which includes some of the named executives, known as the Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”). This plan is based upon CM Holding and/or its subsidiaries meeting certain financial objectives but differs from the CSSP plan because the payments are not based upon individual performance but on whether or not the pre-determined corporate objectives are met.

At the time, the performance goals for the different incentive plans were approved by the CM Holding Board of Directors, it was believed that the performance targets reflected an appropriate degree of stretch but that they were attainable based on successful execution of the Company’s business plan and the realization of macro-economic and market conditions reasonably aligned with the Company’s near term expectations.

Change in Control, Separation and Retirement Arrangements. CMFG Life has a written employment contract with Mr. Trunzo, former President and Director of the Company. None of the other named executive officers have employment contracts or separation agreements with CMFG Life. No costs associated with this employment contract have previously been allocated to the Company.
us.

Non-Qualified Elective DeferredDirector Compensation Arrangements. CMFG Life permits eligible employees to defer on an elective basis a specified portion of their LTIP. Any such deferrals must be made pursuant to a non-qualified deferred compensation plan between the officer and CMFG Life. The

47


deemed investment of deferred amounts is directed by the individual officers and the returns on such investments is reflected in the deferred account balance of such officer. The balance of the deferred compensation accounts will be distributed to each officer who has elected to make such deferrals upon his or her death, disability or separation from service.

Other Compensation Including Other Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Arrangements. CMFG Life has a qualified 401(k) plan for all eligible employees. CMFG Life matches 100% of employee contributions to the plan up to 5% of the employee’s total compensation, subject to the limitations specified in the Internal Revenue Code. CMFG Life also maintains a Supplemental 401(k) Plan in which some of the named executive officers participate that provides additional benefits and a company match.

In addition to the 401(k) plan, all employees of CMFG Life participate in a qualified Defined Benefit Pension Plan. There is a non-qualified plan for some of the named executives that provides benefits that would otherwise be paid into the qualified Defined Benefit Pension Plan but for Internal Revenue Code limitations. CMFG Life offers a package of insurance benefits to all employees including health, dental, long-term disability and life insurance. Several of the named executive officers receive perquisites including personal liability insurance, use of Company owned aircraft, travel to Company conventions for themselves and their spouse, tax benefits and tax preparation fees.

48


Compensation Summary [to be updated in amendment filing]

The following table sets forth the allocated compensation based upon the estimated percentage of time the following officers devote to the affairs of MEMBERS Life Insurance Company for the 2017, 2016 and 2015 fiscal years:

Name and principal positionYearSalary
($)
Bonus
($)
Total****
($)

                                    (a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(j)

Robert N. Trunzo, President and Director*
 

2015

$14,036

$58,376

$72,412

M. Jeffrey Bosco, President and Director**
 

2015
2016

$2,718
$3,671

$2,166
$4,568

$4,884
$8,239

David L. Sweitzer, President and Director***
 

2016
2017

$4,393

$3,729

$8,122

Brian J. Borakove, Treasurer****
 

2015
2016
2017

$2,802
$2,644
$

$1,595
$2,154
$

$4,397
$4,798
$
*Mr. Trunzo resigned as President and Director of the Company effective December 1, 2015.
**Mr. Bosco was appointed President effective December 1, 2015. Mr. Bosco resigned as President and Director of the Company effective October 31, 2016.
***Mr. Sweitzer was appointed President and Director effective October 31, 2016.
****Includes compensation paid by CMFG Life that was allocated to the Company for service rendered by Messrs. Sweitzer and Borakove.

Director Compensation

Each of the directors of the Company are also officers of CMFG Life. The Company’s directors receive no compensation for their service as directors of the Company but are compensated by CMFG Life for their services as officers of CMFG Life. Accordingly, no costs were allocated to the Company for services of following persons in their role as current directors: Michael F. Anderson, Michael T. Defnet, Jason A. Pisarik,William Karls, Steven R. Suleski and David L. Sweitzer. Messr. Bosco is no longer a director of the Company effective October 31, 2016.

Legal Proceedings

Like other insurance companies, we routinely are involved in litigation and other proceedings, including class actions, reinsurance claims and regulatory proceedings arising in the ordinary course of our business. In recent years, the life insurance and annuity industry, including us and our affiliated

77


companies, has been subject to an increase in litigation pursued on behalf of both individual and purported classes of insurance and annuity purchasers, questioning the conduct of insurance companies and their agents in the marketing of their products. In addition, state and federal regulatory bodies, such as state insurance departments and attorneys general, periodically make inquiries and conduct examinations concerning compliance by us and others with applicable insurance and other laws.

In connection with regulatory examinations and proceedings, government authorities may seek various forms of relief, including penalties, restitution and changes in business practices. The Company has established procedures and policies to facilitate compliance with laws and regulations and to support financial reporting. These actions are based on a variety of issues and involve a range of the Company’s practices. We respond to such inquiries and cooperate with regulatory examinations in the ordinary course of business. In the opinion of management, the ultimate liability, if any, resulting from all such pending actions will not materially affect the financial statements of the Company.Company, nor the Company’s ability to meet its obligations under the Contracts.

49


Important Information about the Index

The Contract is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated (“BofA Merrill Lynch”). BofA Merrill Lynch has not passed on the legality or suitability of, or the accuracy or adequacy of descriptions and disclosures relating to, the Contract, nor makes any representation or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of Contract or any member of the public regarding the Contract or the advisability of investing in the Contract, particularly the ability of the (“Indices”) to track performance of any market or strategy. BofA Merrill Lynch’s only relationship to MEMBERS Life Insurance Company (“Licensee”) is the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names and indices or components thereof. The Indices are determined, composed and calculated by BofA Merrill Lynch without regard to the Licensee or the Contract or its holders. BofA Merrill Lynch has no obligation to take the needs of the Licensee or the holders of the Product into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the Indices. BofA Merrill Lynch is not responsible for and has not participated in the determination of the timing of, prices of, or quantities of the Contract to be issued or in the determination or calculation of the equation by which the Product is to be priced, sold, purchased, or redeemed. BofA Merrill Lynch has no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing, or trading of the Contract.

BOFA MERRILL LYNCH DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY AND/OR THE COMPLETENESS OF THE INDICES OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN AND BOFA MERRILL LYNCH SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, UNAVAILABILITY, OR INTERRUPTIONS THEREIN. BOFA MERRILL LYNCH MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED BY LICENSEE, HOLDERS OF THE PRODUCT OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FROM THE USE OF THE INDICES OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. BOFA MERRILL LYNCH MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE, WITH RESPECT TO THE INDICES OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. WITHOUT LIMITING ANY OF THE FOREGOING, IN NO EVENT SHALL BOFA MERRILL LYNCH HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOST PROFITS, EVEN IF NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

The BofA Merrill Lynch Marks are trademarks of Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated or its affiliates and have been licensed for use by Members Life Insurance Company.

The Contract is not sponsored, endorsed, sold or promoted by Standard & Poor’s, a division of the McGraw-Hill companies, Inc. (“S&P”). S&P makes no representation or warranty, express or implied, to the owners of the Contract or any member of the public regarding the advisability of investing in securities generally or in the Product particularly or the ability of the S&P 500 Index to track general stock market performance. S&P’s only relationship to the Company is the licensing of certain trademarks and trade names of S&P and of the S&P 500 Index which is determined, composed and calculated by S&P without regard to the Company or Contract. S&P has no obligation to take the needs of the Company or the owners of the Contract into consideration in determining, composing or calculating the S&P 500 Index. S&P is not responsible for and has not participated in the determination of the prices and amount of the Product or the timing of the issuance or sale of the Contract or in determination or calculation of the equation by which the Contract is to be converted into cash. S&P has no obligation or liability in connection with the administration, marketing or trading of the Contract.

S&P DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY AND/OR THE COMPLETENESS OF THE S&P 500 INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN AND S&P SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS, OMISSIONS, OR INTERRUPTIONS THEREIN. S&P MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AS TO RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED BY LICENSEE, OWNERS OF THE PRODUCT, OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY FROM THE USE OF THE S&P 500 INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. S&P MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE WITH RESPECT TO THE S&P 500 INDEX OR ANY DATA INCLUDED THEREIN. WITHOUT LIMITING ANY OF THE FOREGOING, IN NO EVENT SHALL S&P HAVE ANY LIABILITY

50


FOR ANY SPECIAL, PUNITIVE, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING LOST PROFITS), EVEN IF NOTIFIED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

The S&P 500 Index is a stock market index based on the market capitalizations of 500 leading companies publicly traded in the U.S. stock market, as determined by Standard & Poors. The Index can go up or down based on the stock prices of the 500 companies that comprise the Index. The Index does not include dividends paid on the stocks comprising the Index and therefore does not reflect the full investment performance of the underlying stocks.* * *

We do not file reports under the 1934 Act in reliance on Rule 12h-7 under the 1934 Act, which provides an exemption from the reporting requirements of Sections 13 and 15 of the 1934 Act.

5178


 
financial statementsFINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
[To be updated by amendment]

[to be updated in amendment filing]

5279


 
appendix a: examples of Partial Withdrawals and Full Surrender with Application of Surrender Charge and Market Value AdjustmentAPPENDIX A: EXAMPLES OF PARTIAL WITHDRAWALS AND FULL SURRENDER WITH APPLICATION OF SURRENDER CHARGE AND MARKET VALUE ADJUSTMENT
 

Example 1 – Partial Withdrawal with a Negative Market Value Adjustment (“MVA”)

Assume the following information at the last Contract Anniversary (9/1/2017):

Risk Control
Account
Risk Control
Account Allocation
Initial Index
Rate Floor
Initial Index
Rate Cap
S&P 500 Index
Value
(Initial Index Value) x (1 +
Index Interest Rate Floor)
(Initial Index Value) x (1 +
Index Interest Rate Cap)
Secure
Account
75%0%3.50%1,000.001,000.001,035.00
Growth
Account
25%-10%14.00%1,000.00900.001,140.00

Total ContractExample 1: Partial Withdrawal with a Negative Market Value = $100,000
10-Year Initial Index Period
I = 10-Year Constant Maturity Treasury Rate = 3.50%
K = The BofA Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US Corporate
Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread = 1.00%Adjustment (MVA)
  
  
Assume the following information atas it relates to the time of partial withdrawal (3/1/2018):Contract:
  
Gross partial withdrawal = $50,000.00 
UnadjustedThe Contract was issued on 06/10/2017 with an initial deposit of $100,000.00.
The Contract Fee is 0.75%, only applied to Risk Control Accounts.
Money is allocated to the Declared Rate Account and S&P 500 Risk Control Accounts.
An Excess Withdrawal of $20,000.00 is taken on 12/10/2018. No other withdrawals have been previously taken.
Contract Value as of the last Contract Anniversary 6/10/2018:
oDeclared Rate Account value equals $10,300.00.
oThe S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account value equals $59,999.96.
oThe S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account value equals $40,000.01.
Assume the following information as it relates to the Declared Rate Account:
As of the withdrawal date, the Declared Rate Account balance was $10,453.78.
Assume the following information as it relates to the Risk Control Accounts:
The Allocation Option Start Date is 06/10/2017 and the Allocation Option Maturity Date is 06/10/2023.
The S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account has a 0.00% Index Rate Floor and a 6.00% Index Rate Cap.
The S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account has a -10.00% Index Rate Floor and a 15.00% Index Rate Cap.
As of the withdrawal date, there are 5,940.59 S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account Accumulation Credits.
As of the withdrawal date, there are 3,902.44 S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account Accumulation Credits.
The Accumulation Credit Factor (P) at the start of the Contract Year immediately preceding the withdrawal for the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account is $10.10.
The Accumulation Credit Factor (P) at the start of the Contract Year immediately preceding the withdrawal for the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account is $10.25.
The S&P 500 Index Value = 1,200.00value at the start of Contract Year immediately preceding the withdrawal is 1000.00.
 The S&P 500 Index value at the time of the withdrawal is 1200.00.
J = 8.5 YearOn the Allocation Option Start Date, the interpolated 6-year Constant Maturity Treasury Rate = 4.00%(I) was 2.50% and the Bank of America/Merrill Lynch Index (K) was 1.00%.
 
L = The BofA At the time of the withdrawal the Constant Maturity Treasury Rate for the remaining Index period (J) is 2.90% and the Bank of America/Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US CorporateIndex (L) is 1.10%.
 
Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread = 1.50% 
N = Years RemainingAt the time of the withdrawal there are 4.50137 years remaining in Initial Indexthe Allocation Option Period = 8.50 Years
Surrender Charge Percent = 9.00%(N).

A-1


We take the following steps to determine the net partial withdrawal amount (excluding taxes) payable to the Owner from eachOwner:

First, we calculate the Contract Value at the time of the withdrawal.

Account(1)

Accumulation
Credits
(2)

Accumulation
Credit Factor
(3)
Contract Value
at time of
Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account
5,940.59
3,902.44
$10.668021
$11.748957
$10,453.78
$63,374.34
$45,849.60
Total$119,677.72

(1), (2), (3)
The current Declared Rate Value equals $ 10,453.78.

The return of the Index is equal to the Closing Index Value divided by the Initial Index Value. The return of the S&P 500 Index is calculated to be 1.2 (1,200.00 / 1,000.00 - 1). This is greater than the (1 + Index Rate Cap) and above (1 + the Index Rate Floor) for both the S&P 500 Secure and Growth Accounts. Therefore, the Index Rate of Return is set to (1 + the Index Rate Cap) which equals 1.06 for the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account and 1.15 for the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account.

The Contract Fee is calculated as 0.75% divided by the number of days in connection withthe Contract Year multiplied by the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year (0.75% / 365 x 10.10 for the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account and 0.75% / 365 x 10.25 for the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account).

The Accumulation Credit Factor is then calculated as (a) the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year multiplied by (b) the Index Rate of Return less (c) the Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee multiplied by the number of days that have passed since the last Contract Anniversary (i.e. a partialx b – c).

For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, this results in an Accumulation Credit Factor at the time of the withdrawal resultingof $10.10 x 1.06 – ((0.75% / 365 x 10.10) x 183) which equals $10.668021. The current S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account Contract Value is then calculated as 5,940.59 x $10.668021 which equals $63,374.34.

For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, this results in an Accumulation Credit Factor at the time of the withdrawal of $10.25 x 1.15 – ((0.75% / 365 x $10.25) x 183) which equals $11.748957. The current S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account Contract Value is then calculated as 3,902.44 x $11.748957 which equals $45,849.60.

A-2


Next, we calculate the gross withdrawal from each account.

Account(4)
Gross
Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account
$1,746.99
$10,590.83
$7,662.28
Total$20,000.00

(4)
Withdrawal is taken Pro Rata from each Allocation Option at the time of the Withdrawal.

The Pro Rata withdrawal from the Declared Rate Account is the Contract Value in this account divided by the total Contract Value multiplied by the withdrawal amount. This is calculated as $ 10,453.78 / $119,677.72 x $20,000 which equals $1,746.99. The Pro Rata withdrawal from the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $63,374.34 / $119,677.72 x $20,000 which equals $10,590.83. The Pro Rata withdrawal from the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $45,849.60 / $119,677.72 x $20,000 which equals $7,662.28.

Next, we calculate the net withdrawal from each account.

Account(5)
Withdrawal
Subject to
Surrender Charge
and MVA
(6)



MVA
(7)


Surrender
Charge
(8)



Net Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account
$783.53
$4,749.99
$3,436.49
($16.81)
($101.93)
($73.75)
$70.52
$427.50
$309.28
$1,659.66
$10,061.40
$7,279.15
Total$8,970.00($192.49)$807.30$19,000.21

(5)
The Annual Free Withdrawal Amount based on beginning of Contract Year Contract Value is first calculated to determine the withdrawal subject to a negative MVA.Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment (MVA). The beginning of Contract Year Contract Value equals $59,999.96 + $40,000.01 + $10,300.00 = $110,299.97. The total Annual Free Withdrawal Amount is calculated as 10% x $110,299.97 = $11,030.00. This Annual Free Withdrawal Amount is applied Pro Rata at the time of the withdrawal then subtracted from the Gross Withdrawal Amount (4) to determine the withdrawal subject to Surrender Charge and MVA (5). For the Declared Rate Account, it is calculated as $1,746.99 – ($10,453.78 / $119,677.72 x $11,030) which equals $783.53. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $10,590.83 – ($63,374.34 /

A-3


$119,677.72 x $11,030) which equals $4,749.99. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $7,662.18 – ($45,849.60 / $119,677.72 x $11,030) which equals $3,436.49.

(6)
The MVA equals W x (MVAF - 1) and is calculated separately for each Allocation Option, where W is the amount of withdrawal that is in excess of the Annual Free Withdrawal Amount for that Contract Year. At the time of the withdrawal there are 4.50137 years remaining in the Risk Control Account Period (N). Therefore, MVAF = ((1 + I + K)/(1 + J + L))^N = ((1 + 2.50% + 1.00%)/(1 + 2.90% + 1.10%))^4.50137 = 0.9785402.

For the Declared Rate Account, the MVA is $783.53 x (0.9785402 - 1) which equals -$16.81. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, the MVA is $4,749.99 x (0.9785402 - 1) which equals -$101.93. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, the MVA is $3,436.49 x (0.9785402 - 1) which equals -$73.75.

(7)
It has been more than one year but less than two years since the Contract Issue Date so the applicable Surrender Charge percentage is 9.00%. This is multiplied by the amount of the withdrawal subject to a Surrender Charge to determine the Surrender Charge. For the Declared Rate Account, the Surrender Charge is calculated as $783.53 x 9.00% which equals $70.52. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, the Surrender Charge is calculated as $4,749.99 x 9.00% which equals $427.50. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, the Surrender Charge is calculated as $3,436.49 x 9.00% which equals $309.28.

(8)
The net withdrawal is equal to the gross withdrawal plus the Market Value Adjustment less the Surrender Charge. For the Declared Rate Account, the net withdrawal is calculated as $1,746.99 + - $16.81 - $70.52 which equals $1,659.66. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, the net withdrawal is calculated as $10,590.83 + -$101.93 - $427.50 which equals $10,061.40. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, the net withdrawal is calculated as $7,662.28 + -$73.75 - $309.28 which equals $7,279.15. The total net withdrawal is the sum of the three accounts, $19,000.21.

Next, we calculate the Accumulation Credits and Contract Value remaining after the withdrawal.

Account(9)

Accumulation Credits
After Withdrawal
(10)
Contract
Value after
Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account

4,947.83
3,250.28
$8,706.79
$52,783.51
$38,187.42
Total$99,677.72

(9)
The number of Accumulation Credits remaining after the withdrawal is equal to the number of Accumulation Credits prior to the withdrawal minus the result of the gross withdrawal from the account divided by the Accumulation Credit Factor as of the withdrawal date. For the Declared Rate

A-4


Account there are no Accumulation Credits so this calculation does not apply, see (10) below. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, this is calculated as 5,940.59 - ($10,590.83 / $10.668021) which equals 4,947.83. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, this is calculated as 3,902.44 - ($7,662.18/ $11.748957) which equals 3,250.28.

(10)
The Contract Value remaining after the withdrawal for the Declared Rate Account is equal to the Declared Rate Account value prior to the withdrawal less the Gross Withdrawal. For the Declared Rate Account this is equal to $ 10,453.78 - $1,746.99 which equals $8,706.79. For the Risk Control Accounts the Contract Value remaining after the withdrawal is equal the Accumulation Credit Factor as of the withdrawal date multiplied by the number of Accumulation Credits after the withdrawal. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, this is calculated as $10.668021 x 4,947.83 which equals $52,783.51. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, this is calculated as $11.748957 x 3,250.28 which equals $38,187.42. The total Contract Value after the withdrawal is the sum of the three accounts, $99,677.72.

A-5


Example 2: Partial Withdrawal with a Positive MVA
Assume the following information as it relates to the Contract:
 
First, we determine Credited Index Interest and Contract Value for each Risk Control Account at the time of the partial withdrawal. With respect to the Secure Account, because the Unadjusted Index Value is greater than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the sum of 1 + Index Interest Rate Cap, Credited Index Interest equals the Contract Value held in the Secure Account ($75,000) multiplied by the Initial Index Rate Cap (3.50%) or $2,625.00. We then add the Credited Index Interest ($2,625.00) to the Contract Value in the Secure Account ($75,000) to determine the Contract Value in the Secure Account at the time of partial withdrawal ($77,625.00).
  
 We follow the same steps in determining Credited Index Interest andThe Contract Value for the Growth Account at the timewas issued on 06/10/2017 with an initial deposit of the partial withdrawal. With respect to the Growth Account, because the Unadjusted Index Value is greater than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the sum of 1 + Index Interest Rate Cap, Credited Index Interest equals the Contract Value held in the Secure Account ($25,000.00) multiplied by the Initial Index Rate Cap (14.00%) or $3,500.00. We then add the Credited Index Interest ($3,500.00) to the Contract Value in the Secure Account ($25,000.00) to determine the Contract Value in the Growth Account at the time of partial withdrawal ($28,500.00).$100,000.00.
  
 
SecondThe Contract Fee is 0.75%, we determine the free annual withdrawal amount available in connection with a partial withdrawal from eachonly applied to Risk Control Account at the time of the partial withdrawal. We determine the free annual withdrawal amount for each Risk Control Account on a proportional basis based on the Contract Value held in each Risk Control Account. The free annual withdrawal amount is equal to 10% of the Contract Value at the beginning of the Contract Year ($100,000.00) or $10,000.00. We determine the portion of the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Secure Account by calculating the percentage of Contract Value held in the Secure Account. We divide the Secure Account Value ($77,625.00) by the sum of the Secure Account Value ($77,625.00) and the Growth Account Value ($28,500.00). The result is then multiplied by the free annual withdrawal amount (10,000.00) to determine the free annual withdrawal amount available in connection with a withdrawal from the Secure Account ($7,314.49).
Accounts.
  
 We followMoney is allocated to the same steps in determining the free annual withdrawal amount available in connection with a partial withdrawal from the GrowthDeclared Rate Account at the time of the partial withdrawal. We determine the portion of the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Growth Account by calculating the percentage of Contract Value held in the Growth Account. We divide the Growth Account Value ($28,500.00) by the sum of the Secure Account Value ($77,625.00) and the Growth Account Value ($28,500.00). The result is then multiplied by the free annual withdrawal amount ($10,000.00) to determine the free annual withdrawal amount available in connection with a withdrawal from the Growth Account ($2,685.51).S&P 500 Risk Control Accounts.
  
 
Third, we calculate the amountAn Excess Withdrawal of the partial withdrawal to be$20,000.00 is taken from each Risk Control Account. We determine the gross partial withdrawal amount for each Risk Control Account on a proportional basis based on the Contract Value held in each Risk Control Account. We determine the portion of the gross partial withdrawal to be taken from the Secure Account by multiplying the percentage of Contract Value held in the Secure Account by the gross partial withdrawal amount ($50,000.00), which equals $36,572.44.

A-2


We follow the same steps in determining the amount of the gross partial withdrawal to be taken from the Growth Account at the time of the partial withdrawal. We determine the portion of the gross partial withdrawal to be taken from the Growth Account by multiplying the percentage of Contract Value held in the Growth Account by the gross partial withdrawal amount ($50,000.00), which equals $13,427.56.12/10/2018. No other withdrawals have been previously taken.
  
 
Fourth, we determine the amountContract Value as of the gross partial withdrawal that may be subject to a Surrender Charge and MVA for each Risk Control Account. We do this by subtracting the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Risk Control Account from the gross partial withdrawal amount for the Risk Control Account. For the Secure Account, the gross partial withdrawal amount ($36,572.44) minus the portion of free annual withdrawal amount available from the Secure Account in connection with the partial withdrawal ($7,314.49) equals $29,257.95. For the Growth Account, the gross partial withdrawal amount ($13,427.56) minus the portion of free annual withdrawal amount available from the Growth Account in connection with the partial withdrawal ($2,685.51) equals $10,742.05.
last Contract Anniversary 6/10/2018:
  
 
Fifth, we determine the amount of the Surrender Charge that would be deducted from the gross partial withdrawal amount for each Risk Control Account. We do this by multiplying the amount of the gross partial withdrawal that may be subject to a Surrender Charge by the applicable Surrender Charge percentage for each Risk Control Account. For the Secure
oDeclared Rate Account the amount of the gross partial withdrawal subject to a Surrender Charge ($29,257.95) multiplied by the Surrender Charge percentage (9%)value equals $2,633.22. For the Growth Account, the amount of the gross partial withdrawal subject to a Surrender Charge ($10,742.05) multiplied by the Surrender Charge percentage (9%) equals $966.78. The total Surrender Charge deducted in connection with the partial withdrawal equals $3,600.00 ($2,633.22 plus $966.78).$10,300.00.
  
 
Sixth, we determine the MVA that would be applied to the gross partial withdrawal amount for each Risk Control Account. For each
oThe S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account we do this by dividing the amount of the gross partial withdrawal that may be subject to an MVA by the sum of 1 plus the cumulative Index Interest Rate credited to date in the current Contract Year and multiply the result by the Market Value Adjustment factor (“MVAF”). (The MVAF is equal to (((1 + I + K) / (1 + J + L))^N) – 1 and for this example is equal to -0.0778.) For the Secure Account, we would divide $29,257.95 by 1.035 then multiply the result by -0.0778 whichvalue equals a negative MVA of $2,198.25. For the Growth Account, we would divide $10,742.05 by 1.14 then multiply the result by -0.0778 which equals a negative MVA of $732.75. The total MVA applied in connection with the partial withdrawal is a negative MVA of $2,931.00 (-$2,198.25 plus -$732.75).$59,999.96.
  
o The amount of the net partial withdrawal paid the Owner from eachS&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account value equals the gross partial withdrawal amount less the Surrender Charge and MVA. For the Secure Account, that equals $36,572.44 -$2,633.22 -$2,198.25 or $31,740.97. For the Growth Account, that equals $13,427.56 -$966.78 -$732.75 or $11,728.03. The total net partial withdrawal paid the Owner is $43,469.00 ($31,740.97 plus $11,728.03).$40,000.01.
  
The Contract Value remaining in each Risk Control Account after the partial withdrawal equals the Contract Value in the Risk Control Account at the beginning of the Contract Year plus any Credited Indexed Interest and less the gross partial withdrawal amount. For the Secure Account, that equals

A-3


$75,000.00 + $2,625.00 - $36,572.44 or $41,052.56. For the Growth Account, that equals $25,000.00 + $3,500.00 - $13,427.56 or $15,072.44. The total Contract Value in both Risk Control Accounts after the partial withdrawal is $56,125.00 ($41,052.56 plus $15,072.44).

Example 2 – Partial Withdrawal with Positive MVA

Assume the following information at the last Contract Anniversary (9/1/2017):

Risk Control
Account
Risk Control
Account Allocation
Initial Index
Rate Floor
Initial Index
Rate Cap
S&P 500 Index
Value
(Initial Index Value) x (1 +
Index Interest Rate Floor)
(Initial Index Value) x (1 +
Index Interest Rate Cap)
Secure
Account
75%0%3.50%1,000.001,000.001,035.00
Growth
Account
25%-10%14.00%1,000.00900.001,140.00

Total Contract Value = $100,000.00
10-Year Initial Index Period
I = 10-Year Constant Maturity Treasury Rate = 3.50%
K = The BofA Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US Corporate
Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread = 1.00%
  
  
Assume the following information atas it relates to the time of partial withdrawal (3/1/2018):Declared Rate Account:
  As of the withdrawal date, the Declared Rate Account balance was $10,453.78.
Gross partial withdrawal = $50,000.00 
UnadjustedAssume the following information as it relates to the Risk Control Accounts:
The Allocation Option Start Date is 06/10/2017 and the Allocation Option Maturity Date is 06/10/2023.
The S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account has a 0.00% Index Rate Floor and a 6.00% Index Rate Cap.
The S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account has a -10.00% Index Rate Floor and a 15.00% Index Rate Cap.
As of the withdrawal date, there are 5,940.59 S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account Accumulation Credits.
As of the withdrawal date, there are 3,902.44 S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account Accumulation Credits.
The Accumulation Credit Factor (P) at the start of the Contract Year immediately preceding the withdrawal for the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account is $10.1.
The Accumulation Credit Factor (P) at the start of the Contract Year immediately preceding the withdrawal for the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account is $10.25.
The S&P 500 Index Value = 1,200.00value at the start of Contract Year immediately preceding the withdrawal is 1000.00.
 The S&P 500 Index value at the time of the withdrawal is 1200.00.
J = 8.5-YearOn the Allocation Option Start Date, the interpolated 6-year Constant Maturity Treasury Rate = 3.00%(I) was 2.50% and the Bank of America/Merrill Lynch Index (K) was 1.00%.
 
L = The BofA At the time of the withdrawal the Constant Maturity Treasury Rate for the remaining Index period (J) is 2.10% and the Bank of America/Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US CorporateIndex (L) is 0.90%.
 
Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread = 0.85% 
N = Years RemainingAt the time of the withdrawal there are 4.50137 years remaining in Initial Indexthe Allocation Option Period = 8.50
Surrender Charge Percent = 9.00%(N).

A-4A-6


We take the following steps to determine the net partial withdrawal amount (excluding taxes) payable to the Owner from eachOwner:

First, we calculate the Contract Value at the time of the withdrawal.

Account(1)


aAccumulation Credits
(2)

Accumulation
Credit Factor
(3)
Contract Value
at time of
Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account

5,940.59
3,902.44

$10.668021
$11.748957
$10,453.78
$63,374.34
$45,849.60
Total$119,677.72

(1), (2), (3)
The current Declared Rate Value equals $10,453.78.

The return of the Index is equal to the Closing Index Value divided by the Initial Index Value. The return of the S&P 500 Index is calculated to be 1.2 (1,200.00 / 1,000.00 - 1). This is greater than the (1 + Index Rate Cap) and above (1 + the Index Rate Floor) for both the S&P 500 Secure and Growth Accounts. Therefore, the Index Rate of Return is set to (1 + the Index Rate Cap) which equals 1.06 for the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account and 1.15 for the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account.

The Contract Fee is calculated as 0.75% divided by the number of days in connection withthe Contract Year multiplied by the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year (0.75% / 365 x 10.1 for the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account and 0.75% / 365 x 10.25 for the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account).

The Accumulation Credit Factor is then calculated as (a) the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year multiplied by (b) the Index Rate of Return less (c) the Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee multiplied by the number of days that have passed since the last Contract Anniversary (i.e. a partialx b – c).

For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, this results in an Accumulation Credit Factor at the time of the withdrawal resultingof $10.1 x 1.06 – ((0.75% / 365 x 10.1) x 183) which equals $10.668021. The current S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account Contract Value is then calculated as 5,940.59 x $10.668021 which equals $63,374.34.

For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, this results in a positive MVA.an Accumulation Credit Factor at the time of the withdrawal of $10.25 x 1.15 – ((0.75% / 365 x $10.25) x 183) which equals $11.748957. The current S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account Contract Value is then calculated as 3,902.44 x $11.915414 which equals $45,849.60.

A-7


Next, we calculate the gross withdrawal from each account.

Account
First, we determine Credited Index Interest and Contract Value for each(4)
Gross
Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account
$1,746.99
$10,590.83
$7,662.28
Total$20,000.00

(4)
Withdrawal is taken Pro Rata from each Allocation Option at the time of the Withdrawal.

The Pro Rata withdrawal from the Declared Rate Account is the Contract Value in this account divided by the total Contract Value multiplied by the withdrawal amount. This is calculated as $ 10,453.78 / $119,677.72 x $20,000 which equals $1,746.99. The Pro Rata withdrawal from the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $63,374.34 / $119,677.72 x $20,000 which equals $10,590.83. The Pro Rata withdrawal from the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $45,849.60 / $119,677.72 x $20,000 which equals $7,662.28.

Next, we calculate the net withdrawal from each account.

Account(5)
Withdrawal
Subject to
Surrender
Charge and MVA
(6)



MVA
(7)


Surrender
Charge
(8)



Net Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account
$783.53
$4,749.99
$3,436.49
$17.27
$104.68
$75.73
$70.52
$427.50
$309.28
$1,693.74
$10,268.01
$7,428.63
Total$8,970.00$197.68$807.30$19,390.38

(5)
The Annual Free Withdrawal Amount based on beginning of Contract Year Contract Value is first calculated to determine the withdrawal subject to a Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment (MVA). The beginning of Contract Year Contract Value equals $59,999.96 + $40,000.01 + $10,300.00 = $110,299.97. The total Annual Free Withdrawal Amount is calculated as 10% x $110,299.97 = $11,030.00. This Annual Free Withdrawal Amount is applied Pro Rata at the time of the withdrawal then subtracted from the Gross Withdrawal Amount (4) to determine the withdrawal subject to Surrender Charge and MVA (5). For the Declared Rate Account, it is calculated as $1,746.99 – ($10,453.78 / $119,677.72 x $11,030) which equals $783.53. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $10,590.83 – ($63,374.34 / $119,677.72 x $11,030) which equals $4,749.99. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $7,662.28 – ($45,849.60 / $119,677.72 x $11,030) which equals $3,436.49.

A-8


(6)
The MVA equals W x (MVAF - 1) and is calculated separately for each Allocation Option, where W is the amount of withdrawal that is in excess of the Annual Free Withdrawal Amount for that Contract Year. At the time of the withdrawal there are 4.50137 years remaining in the Risk Control Account Period (N). Therefore, MVAF = ((1 + I + K)/(1 + J + L))^N = ((1 + 2.50% + 1.00%)/(1 + 2.10% + 0.90%))^4.50137 = 1.0220378.

For the Declared Rate Account, the MVA is $783.53 x (1.0220378 - 1) which equals $17.27. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, the MVA is $4,749.99 x (1.0220378 - 1) which equals $104.68. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, the MVA is $3,436.49 x (1.0220378 - 1) which equals $75.73.

(7)
It has been more than one year but less than two years since the Contract Issue Date so the applicable Surrender Charge percentage is 9.00%. This is multiplied by the amount of the withdrawal subject to a Surrender Charge to determine the Surrender Charge. For the Declared Rate Account, the Surrender Charge is calculated as $783.53 x 9.00% which equals $70.52. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, the Surrender Charge is calculated as $4,749.99 x 9.00% which equals $427.50. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, the Surrender Charge is calculated as $3,436.49 x 9.00% which equals $309.28.

(8)
The net withdrawal is equal to the gross withdrawal plus the Market Value Adjustment less the Surrender Charge. For the Declared Rate Account, the net withdrawal is calculated as $1,746.99 + $17.27 - $70.52 which equals $1,693.74. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, the net withdrawal is calculated as $10,590.83 + $104.68 - $427.50 which equals $10,268.01. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, the net withdrawal is calculated as $7,662.28 + $75.73 - $309.28 which equals $7,428.63. The total net withdrawal is the sum of the three accounts, $19,390.38.

Next, we calculate the Accumulation Credits and Contract Value remaining after the withdrawal.

Account(9)

Accumulation Credits
After Withdrawal
(10)
Contract
Value after
Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account

4,947.83
3,250.28
$8,706.79
$52,783.51
$38,187.42
Total$99,677.72

(9)
The number of Accumulation Credits remaining after the withdrawal is equal to the number of Accumulation Credits prior to the withdrawal minus the result of the gross withdrawal from the account divided by the Accumulation Credit Factor as of the withdrawal date. For the Declared Rate

A-9


Account there are no Accumulation Credits, so this calculation does not apply, see (10) below. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, this is calculated as 5,940.59 - ($10,590.83 / $10.668021) which equals 4,947.83. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, this is calculated as 3,902.44 - ($7,662.18/ $11.748957) which equals 3,250.28.

(10)
The Contract Value remaining after the withdrawal for the Declared Rate Account is equal to the Declared Rate Account value prior to the withdrawal less the Gross Withdrawal. For the Declared Rate Account this is equal to $ 10,453.78 - $1,746.99 which equals $8,706.79. For the Risk Control Accounts the Contract Value remaining after the withdrawal is equal the Accumulation Credit Factor as of the withdrawal date multiplied by the number of Accumulation Credits after the withdrawal. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, this is calculated as $10.668021 x 4,947.83 which equals $52,783.51. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, this is calculated as $11.748957 x 3,250.28 which equals $38,187.42. The total Contract Value after the withdrawal is the sum of the three accounts, $99,677.72.

A-10


Example 3: Full Surrender of the partial withdrawal. With respect to the Secure Account, because the Unadjusted Index Value is greater than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the sum of 1 + the Index Interest Rate Cap, Credited Index Interest equals the Contract Value held in the Secure Account ($75,000) multiplied by the Initial Index Rate Cap (3.50%) or $2,625.00. We then add the Credited Index Interest ($2,625.00) to the Contract Value in the Secure Account ($75,000) to determine the Contract Value in the Secure Account at the time of partial withdrawal ($77,625.00).with a Negative MVA
  
 We follow
Assume the same steps in determining Credited Index Interest and Contract Value for the Growth Account at the time of the partial withdrawal. With respectfollowing information as it relates to the Growth Account, because the Unadjusted Index Value is greater than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the sum of 1 + Index Interest Rate Cap, Credited Index Interest equals the Contract Value held in the Growth Account ($25,000) multiplied by the Initial Index Rate Cap (14.00%) or $3,500.00. We then add the Credited Index Interest ($3,500.00) to the Contract Value in the Growth Account ($25,000.00) to determine the Contract Value in the Growth Account at the time of partial withdrawal ($28,500.00).Contract:
  
Second, we determine the free annual withdrawal amount available in connection with a partial withdrawal from each Risk Control Account at the time of the partial withdrawal. We determine the free annual withdrawal amount for each Risk Control Account on a proportional basis based on the Contract Value held in each Risk Control Account. The free annual withdrawal amount is equal to 10% of the Contract Value at the beginning of the Contract Year ($100,000.00) or $10,000.00. We determine the portion of the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Secure Account by calculating the percentage of Contract Value held in the Secure Account. We divide the Secure Account Value ($77,625.00) by the sum of the Secure Account Value ($77,625.00) and the Growth Account Value ($28,500.00). The result is then multiplied by the free annual withdrawal amount $10,000.00) to determine the free annual withdrawal amount available in connection with a withdrawal from the Secure Account ($7,314.49).
  
 We follow the same steps in determining the free annual withdrawal amount available in connection with a partial withdrawal from the Growth Account at the time of the partial withdrawal. We determine the portion of the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Growth Account by calculating the percentage of Contract Value held in the Growth Account. We divide the Growth Account Value ($28,500.00) by the sum of the Secure Account Value ($77,625.00) and the Growth Account Value ($28,500.00). The result is then multiplied by the free annual withdrawal amount $10,000.00) to determine the free annual withdrawal amount available in connection with a withdrawal from the Growth Account ($2,685.51).
Third, we calculate the amount of the partial withdrawal to be taken from each Risk Control Account. We determine the gross partial withdrawal amount for each Risk Control Account on a proportional basis based on the Contract Value held in each Risk Control Account. We determine the portion of the gross partial withdrawal to be taken from the Secure Account by multiplying the percentage of Contract Value held in the Secure Account

A-5


(73.14%) by the gross partial withdrawal amount ($50,000.00) to determine the amount of the partial withdrawal to be taken from the Secure Account ($36,572.44).
We follow the same steps in determining the amount of the gross partial withdrawal to be taken from the Growth Account at the time of the partial withdrawal. We determine the portion of the gross partial withdrawal to be taken from the Growth Account by multiplying the percentage of Contract Value held in the Growth Account (26.86%) by the gross partial withdrawal amount ($50,000.00) to determine the amount of the partial withdrawal to be taken from the Growth Account ($13,427.56).
Fourth, we determine the amount of the gross partial withdrawal that may be subject to a Surrender Charge and MVA for each Risk Control Account. We do this by subtracting the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Risk Control Account from the gross partial withdrawal amount for the Risk Control Account. For the Secure Account, the gross partial withdrawal amount ($36,572.44) minus the portion of free annual withdrawal amount available from the Secure Account in connection with the partial withdrawal ($7,314.49) equals $29,257.95. For the Growth Account, the gross partial withdrawal amount ($13,427.56) minus the portion of free annual withdrawal amount available from the Growth Account in connection with the partial withdrawal ($2,685.51) equals $10,742.05.
Fifth, we determine the amount of the Surrender Charge that would be deducted from the gross partial withdrawal amount for each Risk Control Account. We do this by multiplying the amount of the gross partial withdrawal that may be subject to a Surrender Charge by the applicable Surrender Charge percentage for each Risk Control Account. For the Secure Account, the amount of the gross partial withdrawal subject to a Surrender Charge ($29,257.95) multiplied by the Surrender Charge percentage (9%) equals $2,633.22. For the Growth Account, the amount of the gross partial withdrawal subject to a Surrender Charge ($10,742.05) multiplied by the Surrender Charge percentage (9%) equals $966.78. The total Surrender Charge deducted in connection with the partial withdrawal equals $3,600.00 ($2,633.22 plus $966.78).
Sixth, we determine the MVA that would be applied to the gross partial withdrawal amount for each Risk Control Account. For each Risk Control Account, we do this by dividing the amount of the gross partial withdrawal that may be subject to an MVA by the sum of 1 plus the cumulative Index Interest Rate credited to date in the current Contract Year and multiply the result by the Market Value Adjustment factor (“MVAF”). (The MVAF is equal to (((1 + I + K) / (1 + J + L))^N) – 1 and for this example is equal to 0.0545.) For the Secure Account, we would divide $29,257.95 by 1.035 then multiply the result by 0.0545 which equals a positive MVA of $1,539.72. For the Growth Account, we would divide $10,742.05 by 1.14 then multiply the result by 0.0545 which equals a positive MVA of $513.24. The total MVA applied in connection with the partial withdrawal is a positive MVA of $2,052.96 ($1,539.72 plus $513.24).
The amount of the net partial withdrawal paid the Owner from each Risk Control Account equals the gross partial withdrawal amount less the Surrender Charge plus the MVA. For the Secure Account, that equals $36,572.44 - $2,633.22 + $1,539.72 or $35,478.94. For the Growth Account, that equals $13,427.56 - $966.78 + $513.24 or $12,974.02. The total net partial withdrawal paid the Owner is $48,452.96 ($35,478.94 plus $12,974.02).

A-6


The Contract Value remaining in each Risk Control Account after the partial withdrawal equals the Contract Value in the Risk Control Account at the beginning of the Contract Year plus any Credited Indexed Interest and less the gross partial withdrawal amount. For the Secure Account, that equals $75,000.00 + $2,625.00 - $36,572.44 or $41,052.56. For the Growth Account, that equals $25,000 + $3,500.00 - $13,427.56 or $15,072.44. The total Contract Value in both Risk Control Accounts after the partial withdrawal is $56,125.00 ($41,052.56 plus $15,072.44).

A-7


Example 3 –Full Surrender of Contract on First Day of Second Contract Year with Negative MVA

Assume the following information at Contract Issue (9/1/2016):

Risk Control
Account
Risk Control
Account Allocation
Initial Index
Rate Floor
Initial Index Rate CapS&P 500 Index
Value
(Initial Index Value) x (1 +
Index Interest Rate Floor)
(Initial Index Value) x (1 +
Index Interest Rate Cap)
Secure
Account
75%0%3.50%1,000.001,000.001,035.00
Growth
Account
25%-10%14.00%1,000.00900.001,140.00

Purchase Payment = $100,000
10-Year Initial Index Period
I = 10-Year Constant Maturity Treasury Rate = 3.50%
K = The BofA Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US Corporate
Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread = 1.00%
  
  
Assume at timeThe Contract was issued on 06/10/2017 with an initial deposit of first Contract Anniversary (9/1/2017):$100,000.00.
  The Contract Fee is 0.75%, only applied to Risk Control Accounts.
UnadjustedThe GLWB Rider Fee is 0.50% applied to GLWB Benefit Base.
The average daily GLWB Benefit Base is $120,000 in the current Contract Year prior to the surrender.
Money is allocated to the Declared Rate Account and S&P 500 Risk Control Accounts.
A full Surrender is taken on 12/10/2018. No other withdrawals have been previously taken.
Contract Value as of the last Contract Anniversary 6/10/2018:
oDeclared Rate Account value equals $10,300.00.
oThe S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account value equals $59,999.96.
oThe S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account value equals $40,000.01.
Assume the following information as it relates to the Declared Rate Account:
As of the withdrawal date, the Declared Rate Account balance was $10,453.78.
Assume the following information as it relates to the Risk Control Accounts:
The Allocation Option Start Date is 06/10/2017 and the Allocation Option Maturity Date is 06/10/2023.
The S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account has a 0.00% Index Rate Floor and a 6.00% Index Rate Cap.
The S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account has a -10.00% Index Rate Floor and a 15.00% Index Rate Cap.
As of the withdrawal date, there are 5,940.59 S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account Accumulation Credits.
As of the withdrawal date, there are 3,902.44 S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account Accumulation Credits.
The Accumulation Credit Factor (P) at the start of the Contract Year immediately preceding the withdrawal for the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account is $10.10.
The Accumulation Credit Factor (P) at the start of the Contract Year immediately preceding the withdrawal for the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account is $10.25.
The S&P 500 Index Value = 950.00value at the start of Contract Year immediately preceding the withdrawal is 1000.00.
 
The Unadjusted S&P 500 Index Value onvalue at the last daytime of the first Contract Anniversarywithdrawal is equal to the Unadjusted S&P 500 Index Value on the first day of the1200.00.
second Contract Anniversary. 
J = 9-YearOn the Allocation Option Start Date, the interpolated 6-year Constant Maturity Treasury Rate = 4.00%(I) was 2.50% and the Bank of America/Merrill Lynch Index (K) was 1.00%.
 
L = The BofA At the time of the withdrawal the Constant Maturity Treasury Rate for the remaining Index period (J) is 2.90% and the Bank of America/Merrill Lynch 1-10 Year US CorporateIndex (L) is 1.10%.
 
Constrained Index Asset Swap Spread = 1.50% 
N = Years RemainingAt the time of the withdrawal there are 4.50137 years remaining in Initial Indexthe Allocation Option Period = 9.00
Surrender Charge Percent = 9.00%(N).

A-8A-11


We take the following steps to determine the Surrender Valueamount (excluding taxes) payable to the Owner from eachOwner:

First, we calculate the Contract Value at the time of the Surrender.

Account(1)

Accumulation
Credits
(2)

Accumulation
Credit Factor
(3)
Contract Value
at time of
Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account

5,940.59
3,902.44

$10.668021
$11.748957
$10,453.78
$63,374.34
$45,849.60
Total$119,677.72

(1), (2), (3)
The current Declared Rate Value equals $10,453.78.

The return of the Index is equal to the Closing Index Value divided by the Initial Index Value. The return of the S&P 500 Index is calculated to be 1.2 (1,200.00 / 1,000.00 - 1). This is greater than the (1 + Index Rate Cap) and above (1 + the Index Rate Floor) for both the S&P 500 Secure and Growth Accounts. Therefore, the Index Rate of Return is set to (1 + the Index Rate Cap) which equals 1.06 for the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account and 1.15 for the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account.

The Contract Fee is calculated as 0.75% divided by the number of days in connection withthe Contract Year multiplied by the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year (0.75% / 365 x 10.1 for the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account and 0.75% / 365 x 10.25 for the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account).

The Accumulation Credit Factor is then calculated as (a) the Accumulation Credit Factor at the start of the Contract Year multiplied by (b) the Index Rate of Return less (c) the Risk Control Account Daily Contract Fee multiplied by the number of days that have passed since the last Contract Anniversary (i.e. a x b – c).

For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, this results in an Accumulation Credit Factor at the time of the withdrawal of $10.1 x 1.06 – ((0.75% / 365 x 10.1) x 183) which equals $10.668021. The current S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account Contract Value is then calculated as 5,940.59 x $10.668021 which equals $63,374.34.

For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, this results in an Accumulation Credit Factor at the time of the withdrawal of $10.25 x 1.15 – ((0.75% / 365 x $10.25) x 183) which equals $11.748957. The current S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account Contract Value is then calculated as 3,902.44 x $11.915414 which equals $45,849.60.

A-12


Next, we calculate the gross withdrawal from each account.

Account(4)
Gross
Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account
$10,453.78
$63,374.34
$45,849.60
Total$119,677.72

(4)
Because this is a full surrender, the entire Contract Value will be withdrawn from each account.

Next, we calculate the net withdrawal from each account.

Account(5)



GLWB Rider
Fee
(6)
Withdrawal
Subject to
Surrender
Charge and
MVA
(7)




MVA
(8)



Surrender
Charge
(9)




Net Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account
$26.27
$159.30
$115.25
$9,464.05
$57,374.20
$41,508.79
($203.10)
($1,231.24)
($890.77)
$851.76
$5,163.68
$3,735.78
$9,372.65
$56,820.12
$41,107.80
Total$300.82$108,350.38($2,325.11)$9,751.22$107,300.57

(5)
The GLWB Rider Fee is calculated as 0.50% divided by the number of days in the Contract Year multiplied by the number of days elapsed since the start of the Contract.Contract Year multiplied by the average daily GLWB Benefit Base in the current Contract Year. The total GLWB Rider Fee equals (0.50% / 365) x 183 x $120,000 = $300.82. This total GLWB Rider Fee is taken Pro Rata at the time of the Surrender from each allocation option. For purposesthe Declared Rate Account it is calculated as $10,453.78 / $119,677.72 x $300.82 which equals $26.27. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $63,374.34 / $119,677.72 x $300.82 which equals $159.30. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $45,849.60 / $119,677.72 x $300.82 which equals $115.25.

(6)
The Annual Free Withdrawal Amount based on beginning of Contract Year Contract Value is first calculated to determine the withdrawal subject to a Surrender Charge and Market Value Adjustment (MVA). The beginning of Contract Year Contract Value equals $59,999.96 + $40,000.01 + $10,300.00 = $110,299.97. The total Annual Free Withdrawal Amount is calculated as 10% x $110,299.97 = $11,030.00. This Annual Free Withdrawal Amount is applied Pro Rata at the time of the withdrawal then subtracted from the Gross Withdrawal Amount (4) less GLWB Rider Fee

A-13


(5) to determine the withdrawal subject to Surrender Charge and MVA (6). For the Declared Rate Account it is calculated as $10,453.78 - $26.27 – ($10,453.78 / $119,677.72 x $11,030) which equals $9,464.05. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $63,374.34 – $159.30 - ($63,374.34 / $119,677.72 x $11,030) which equals $57,374.20. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account is calculated the same way to be $45,849.60 - $115.25 – ($45,849.60 / $119,677.72 x $11,030) which equals $41,508.79.

(7)
The MVA equals W x (MVAF - 1) and is calculated separately for each Allocation Option, where W is the amount of withdrawal that is in excess of the Annual Free Withdrawal Amount for that Contract Year. At the time of the withdrawal there are 4.50137 years remaining in the Risk Control Account Period (N). Therefore, MVAF = ((1 + I + K)/(1 + J + L))^N = ((1 + 2.50% + 1.00%)/(1 + 2.90% + 1.10%))^4.50137 = 0.9785402.

For the Declared Rate Account, the MVA is $9,464.05 x (0.9785402 - 1) which equals -$203.10. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, the MVA is $57,374.20 x (0.9785402 - 1) which equals -$1,231.24. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, the MVA is $41,508.79 x (0.9785402 - 1) which equals -$890.77.

(8)
It has been more than one year but less than two years since the Contract Issue Date so the applicable Surrender Charge percentage is 9.00%. This is multiplied by the amount of the withdrawal subject to a Surrender Charge to determine the Surrender Charge. For the Declared Rate Account, the Surrender Charge is calculated as $9,464.05 x 9.00% which equals $851.76. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, the Surrender Charge is calculated as $57,374.20 x 9.00% which equals $5,163.68. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, the Surrender Charge is calculated as $41,508.79 x 9.00% which equals $3,735.78.

(9)
The net withdrawal is equal to the gross withdrawal less GLWB Rider Fee plus the Market Value Adjustment less the Surrender Charge. For the Declared Rate Account, the net withdrawal is calculated as $10,453.78 - $26.27 + - $203.10 - $851.76 which equals $9,372.65. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, the net withdrawal is calculated as $63,374.34 - $159.30 + -$1,231.24 - $5,163.68 which equals $56,820.12. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, the net withdrawal is calculated as $45,849.60 - $115.25 + -$890.77 - $3,735.78 which equals $41,107.80. The total net withdrawal is the sum of the three accounts, $107,300.57.

Next, we calculate the Accumulation Credits and Contract Value remaining after the withdrawal.

Account(10)

Accumulation Credits
After Withdrawal
(11)
Contract
Value after
Withdrawal
Declared Rate Account
S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account
S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account

0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
Total$0.00

A-14


(10)
The number of Accumulation Credits remaining after the withdrawal is equal to the number of Accumulation Credits prior to the withdrawal minus the result of the gross withdrawal from the account divided by the Accumulation Credit Factor as of the withdrawal date. For the Declared Rate Account there are no Accumulation Credits, so this example, we assumecalculation does not apply, see (11) below. For the S&P 500 Secure Risk Control Account, this is calculated as 5,940.59 - ($63,374.34 / $10.668021) which equals 0.00. For the S&P 500 Growth Risk Control Account, this is calculated as 3,902.44 - ($45,849.60/ $11.748957) which equals 0.00.

(11)
Following the surrender takes place on the first day of the second Contract, Year.there is no Contract Value remaining because there are no Declared Rate Account Value and no Accumulation Credits remaining. Following the surrender of the Contract, the GLWB Rider terminates and the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit ends.

A-15


APPENDIX B: STATE VARIATIONS OF CERTAIN FEATURES AND BENEFITS
[To be updated by amendment]

The following information is a summary of certain features or benefits of the CUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity Contracts that vary from the features and benefits previously described in this Prospectus as a result of requirements imposed by states. Please contact your financial professional for more information about Contract variations and availability in your state.

States where certain CUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity features or benefits vary:

  StateUponFeature or BenefitVariation
  ArizonaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If your age as of the Contract Anniversary, we calculate and apply Credited Index InterestIssue Date is at least 65 years old, you must return your Contract within 30 days of receipt.
  CaliforniaSee “Owner” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”The Owner has the right to each Risk Control Account. The Automatic Rebalancing Program then transfers Contract Value betweenassign the Risk Control Accounts in accordance with the Owner’s most recently communicated allocation instructions. First, we determine Credited Index Interest and Contract Value for each Risk Control Account on the Contract Anniversary. With respect to the Secure Account, because the Unadjusted Index Value is less than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the sum of 1 + the Index Interest Rate Floor, no Credited Index Interest would be credited to Contract Value held in the Secure Account ($75,000). With respect to the Growth Account, because the Unadjusted Index Value is greater than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the sum of 1 + Index Interest Rate Floor and the Unadjusted Index Value is less than the Initial Index Value multiplied by the sum of 1 + Index Interest Rate Cap, we would apply Credited Index Interest to Contract Value held in the Growth Account ($25,000). Because the Unadjusted Index Value is less than the Initial Index Value, we will credit negative Credited Index Interest to the Contract Value held in the Growth Account. The negative Credited Index Interest we will credit equals the Contract Value held in the Growth Account ($25,000) multiplied by the Unadjusted Index Value (950) divided by Initial Index Value (1,000) minus 1 or -$1,250.00. We then apply the negative Credited Index Interest (-$1,250.00) to the Contract Value in the Growth Account ($25,000) to determine the Contract Value in the Growth Account on the Contract Anniversary ($23,750).Contract.
  
  See “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if your age as of the Contract Issue Date is at least 60 years old and you only allocated your Purchase Payment to the money market fund option.
 
The Automatic Rebalancing Program then transfers Contract Value between the Risk Control Accounts as noted in the chart below:
Before Rebalancing:        
 Risk Control Account  Account Value Percentage
 Secure  $75,000.00 75.95%   
 Growth  $23,750.00 24.05%   
     
 Contract Value  $98,750.00 100.00%   
          
After Rebalancing:        
 Risk Control Account  Account Value Percentage
 Secure  $74,062.50 75.00% (-$937.50) 
 Growth  $24,687.50 25.00% (+$937.50) 
     
 Contract Value  $98,750.00 100.00%   

 
Second, we determine
If your age as of the free annual withdrawal amount available in connectionContract Issue Date is at least 60 years old, you must return your Contract within 30 days of receipt.
See “Waiver of Surrender Charges” under “Access to Your Money”“Nursing Home or Hospital” is replaced with a“Facility Care, Home Care, or Community-Based Services”. There is no minimum confinement period to utilize this waiver. The Facility Care or Home Care and Terminal Illness waivers apply to full surrender from each Risk Control Account atsurrenders only, not partial withdrawals.
  ConnecticutSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the time of surrender. We determine the free annual withdrawal amount for each Risk Control Account on a proportional basis based onPurchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, held in each Risk Control Account.the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals.
You must return your Contract within 10 days of receipt, including replacement contracts.
See “Waiver of Surrender Charges” under “Access to Your Money”There is a one-year wait before the waiver of surrender charge provisions may be exercised.
  DelawareSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The free annual withdrawal amountAccumulation Period”You must return your Contract within 10 days of receipt (20 days if it is equal to 10% of the Contract Value at the beginning of the Contract Year ($98,750.00) or $9,875.00. We determine the portion of the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Secure Account by calculating the percentage of Contract Value held in the Secure Account. We divide the Secure Account Value ($74,062.50) by the sum of the Secure Account Valuea replacement contract).

A-9B-1


  State($74,062.50) andFeature or BenefitVariation
  FloridaSee “Owner” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”The Owner has the Growth Account Value ($24,687.50). The result is then multiplied by the free annual withdrawal amount $9,875.00)right to determine the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Secure Account ($7,406.25) in connection with the surrender ofassign the Contract.
  
 We follow the same steps in determining the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Growth Account at the time of surrender. We determine the portion of the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Growth Account by calculating the percentage of Contract Value held in the Growth Account. We divide the Growth Account Value ($24,687.50) by the sum of the Secure Account Value ($74,062.50) and the Growth Account Value ($24,687.50). The result is then multiplied by the free annual withdrawal amount $9,875.00) to determine the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Growth Account ($2,468.75).
  
 
Third, we determine the amount
See “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”You must return your Contract within 21 days of the withdrawal that may be subject toreceipt (30 days if it is a Surrender Charge and MVA for each Risk Control Account. We do this by subtracting the free annual withdrawal amount available from the Contract Value in the Risk Control Account. For the Secure Account, the Secure Account Value ($74,062.50) minus the portion of free annual withdrawal amount available from the Secure Account in connection with the surrender ($7,406.25) equals $66,656.25. For the Growth Account, the Growth Account Value ($24,687.50) minus the portion of free annual withdrawal amount available from the Growth Account in connection with the surrender ($2,468.75) equals $22,218.75.replacement contract).
  
 
Fourth, we determine
See “Payout Date” under “Income Payments – The Payout Period”The requested Payout Date must be at least one year after the amount ofContract Issue Date.
  GeorgiaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Surrender Charge that would be deducted fromPurchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, in each Risk Control Account. We do this by multiplying the amount ofrefund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals.
  HawaiiSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, that maythe refund will be subjectyour Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was new money, not a replacement.
  IdahoSee “Right to a Surrender Charge byExamine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the applicable Surrender Charge percentage for each Risk Control Account. For the Secure Account, the Secure Account Value subject to a Surrender Charge ($66,656.25) multiplied by the Surrender Charge percentage (9%) equals $5,999.06. For the Growth Account, the Growth Account Value subject to a Surrender Charge ($22,218.75) multiplied by the Surrender Charge percentage (9%) equals $1,999.69. The total Surrender Charge deducted in connection with the surrender ofPurchase Payment exceeds the Contract equals $7,998.75 ($5,999.06 plus $1,999.69).Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals.
  
 
You must return your Contract within 20 days of receipt, including replacement contracts.
  IllinoisSee definition of Terminally Ill and Terminal Illness in “Glossary”Fifth, we determineTerminally Ill, Terminal Illness – A life expectancy of 24 months or less due to any illness or accident.
  IndianaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the MVA that would be applied toPurchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, in each Risk Control Account. For each Risk Control Account, we do this by dividing the amountrefund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of the Contract Value that may be subject to an MVA by the sum of 1 plus the cumulative Index Interest Rate credited to date in the current Contract Year and multiply the result by the Market Value Adjustment factor (“MVAF”). (The MVAF is equal to (((1 + I + K) / (1 + J + L))^N) – 1 and for this example is equal to -0.0821.) For the Secure Account, we would divide $66,656.25 by 1.00 then multiply the result by -0.0821 which equalsyour initial Purchase Payment was a negative MVA of $5,475.42. For the Growth Account, we would divide $22,218.75 by 1.00 then multiply the result by -0.0821 which equals a negative MVA of $1,825.14. The total MVA applied in connection with the surrender of the Contract is a negative MVA of $7,300.56 ($5,475.42 plus $1,825.14).replacement, not new money.
  
 You must return your Contract within 10 days of receipt (20 days if it is a replacement contract).
  KansasSee definition of Terminally Ill and Terminal Illness in “Glossary”Terminally Ill, Terminal Illness – A life expectancy of 24 months or less due to any illness or accident.
  LouisianaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The net amount paidAccumulation Period”If the Owner from the surrender of the Contract from each Risk Control Account equalsPurchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, in the Risk Control Accountrefund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the Surrender Charge andsource of your initial Purchase Payment was new money, not a replacement.

B-2


  StateFeature or BenefitVariation
  MarylandSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the MVA. For the Secure Account, that equals $74,062.50 - $5,999.06 - $5,475.42 or $62,588.02. For the Growth Account, that equals $24,687.50 - $1,999.69 - $1,825.14 or $20,862.67. The total net amount paid the Owner from the surrender ofPurchase Payment exceeds the Contract is $83,450.69 ($62,588.02 plus $20,862.67). FollowingValue, the surrenderrefund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was new money, not a replacement.
  MassachusettsSee definition of Terminally Ill and Terminal Illness in “Glossary”Terminally Ill, Terminal Illness – A life expectancy of 24 months or less due to any illness or accident.
See “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract there wouldValue, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals.
You must return your Contract within 10 days of receipt (20 days if it is a replacement contract).
See “Waiver of Surrender Charges” under “Access to Your Money”There is no Nursing Home or Hospital waiver. The Terminal Illness waiver applies to full surrenders only, not partial withdrawals.
See “Terms of Income Payments” under “Income Payments – The Payout Period”Income Options are not based on gender. The amount of each payment depends on all the items listed other than gender.
See “Misstatement of Age or Gender” under “Other Information”Income Options are not based on gender. Only proof of age is required for misstatement; proof of gender is not.
  MinnesotaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, remainingthe refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was a replacement, not new money.
  MississippiSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was new money, not a replacement.
  MontanaSee “Terms of Income Payments” under “Income Payments – The Payout Period”Income Options are not based on gender. The amount of each payment depends on all the items listed other than gender.
See “Misstatement of Age or Gender” under “Other Information”Income Options are not based on gender. Only proof of age is required for misstatement; proof of gender is not.

B-3


  StateFeature or BenefitVariation
  NebraskaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was new money, not a replacement.
  NevadaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals.
  New JerseySee “Waiver of Surrender Charges” under “Access to Your Money”There is no Terminal Illness waiver.
  New HampshireSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was new money, not a replacement.
  North CarolinaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was new money, not a replacement.
  North DakotaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”You must return your Contract within 20 days of receipt (30 days if it is a replacement contract).
  OklahomaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals.
You must return your Contract within 10 days of receipt (20 days if it is a replacement contract).
  PennsylvaniaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”You must return your Contract within 10 days of receipt (30 days if it is an external replacement contract and 45 days if it is an internal replacement contract).
See “Waiver of Surrender Charges” under “Access to Your Money”“Terminal Illness” is replaced with “Terminal Condition”. The minimum consecutive day confinement is 90 days for a Nursing Home and 30 days for a Hospital.

B-4


  StateFeature or BenefitVariation
  Rhode IslandSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was new money, not a replacement.
You must return your Contract within 20 days of receipt (30 days if it is a replacement contract).
  South CarolinaSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was new money, not a replacement.
  TennesseeSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was a replacement, not new money.
  TexasSee “Owner” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”The Owner has the right to assign the Contract.
See “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”You must return your Contract within 20 days of receipt (30 days if it is a replacement contract).
See “Waiver of Surrender Charges” under “Access to Your Money”“Terminal Illness” is replaced with “Terminal Disability”.
  UtahSee “Owner” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”The Owner has the right to assign the Contract.
See “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals.
  VermontSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals if the source of your initial Purchase Payment was new money, not a replacement.
  WashingtonSee “Right to Examine” under “Getting Started – The Accumulation Period”If the Purchase Payment exceeds the Contract Value, the refund will be your Purchase Payment less withdrawals.
You must return your Contract within 10 days of receipt (20 days if it is a replacement contract).
See “Waiver of Surrender Charges” under “Access to Your Money”The life expectancy to utilize the Terminal Illness waiver is 24 months.
  WisconsinSee “Owner” under “Getting Started - The Accumulation Period”The Owner has the right to assign the Contract

A-10B-5


MEMBERS Life Insurance Company
2000 Heritage Way
Waverly, IA 50677
1-800-798-5500

Dealer Prospectus Delivery Obligations

All dealers that effect transactions in these securities are required to deliver a Prospectus.


GLWB Supplement Dated May 1, 2019
to the
Prospectus Dated May 1, 2019

This GLWB Supplement should be read and retained with the prospectus for the CUNA Mutual Group Zone Income Annuity.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terms reflected in this GLWB Supplement shall remain in effect and will not be superseded until an updated GLWB Supplement is filed with the SEC. We will publish any changes to this GLWB Supplement for any future periods at least seven calendar days before they take effect on EDGAR at www.sec.gov under file number 333-XXXXXX. Please work with your financial professional or contact us at 800-798-5500 to confirm the most current supplement prior to your Contract Issue Date.

Age of Covered Person as of
the Contract Issue Date
Base Withdrawal PercentageAnnual Increase Percentage
Single LifeJoint LifeSingle LifeJoint Life
552.00%1.50%0.40%0.40%
55 - 593.00%2.50%0.40%0.40%
60 - 644.00%3.50%0.40%0.40%
65 - 745.00%4.50%0.40%0.40%
75 - 796.00%5.50%0.40%0.40%
80+7.00%6.50%0.40%0.40%

On the Contract Issue Date both the Base Withdrawal Percentage and Annual Increase Percentage are determined based on the election of single life or joint life option rates using the age of the younger Covered Person(s).

We cannot change the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terms for your Contract once they are established. If the Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit terms you receive are unacceptable, you can cancel your Contract during the right to examine period.
The Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit cannot provide a GLWB Payment until the Contract Anniversary following the 50th birthday of the younger Covered Person or the first Contract Anniversary, whichever is later.
If you begin GLWB Payments before age 59½, the payments may be subject to an additional 10% federal tax penalty.

PART II


INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS

Item 13. Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution.*

The expenses for the issuance and distribution of the Contracts,securities offered by this Registration Statement, other than any underwriting discounts and commissions, are as follows:
[to be updated by amendment filing]

Securities and Exchange Commission Registration Fees $100,700 
Printing and engraving $116,023 
Accounting fees and expenses $102,822 
Legal fees and expenses $22,000 
Miscellaneous $7,000 
    
TOTAL EXPENSES $348,545 
Securities and Exchange Commission Registration Fees$
Printing and engraving$
Accounting fees and expenses$
Legal fees and expenses$
Miscellaneous$

TOTAL EXPENSES

$


* Estimated.

Item 14. Indemnification of Directors and Officers.

Section 490.202 of the Iowa Business Corporation Act (the “IBCA”), provides that a corporation’s articles of incorporation may contain a provision eliminating or limiting the personal liability of a director to the corporation or its shareholders for monetary damages for any action taken, or failure to take action, as a director, except liability for (1) the amount of a financial benefit received by a director to which the director is not entitled, (2) an intentional infliction of harm on the MEMBERS Life Insurance Company (the “Registrant”, “we”, “our”, or “us”) or the shareholders, (3) a violation of Section 490.833 of the IBCA or (4) an intentional violation of criminal law.

Further, Section 490.851 of the IBCA provides that a corporation may indemnify its directors who may be party to a proceeding against liability incurred in the proceeding by reason of such person serving in the capacity of director, if such person has acted in good faith and in a manner reasonably believed by the individual to be in the best interests of the corporation, if the director was acting in an official capacity, and in all other cases that the individual’s conduct was at least not opposed to the best interests of the corporation, and in any criminal proceeding if such person had no reasonable cause to believe the individual’s conduct was unlawful or the director engaged in conduct for which broader indemnification has been made permissible or obligatory under a provision of the articles of incorporation. The indemnity provisions under Section 490.851 do not apply (i) in the case of actions brought by or in the right of the corporation except for reasonable expenses incurred in connection with the proceeding if it is determined that the director has met the relevant standard of conduct set forth above or (ii) in connection with any proceedings with respect to conduct for which the director was adjudged liable on the basis that the director received a financial benefit to which the director was not entitled, whether or not involving action in the director’s official capacity.

In addition, Section 490.852 of the IBCA provides mandatory indemnification of reasonable expenses incurred by a director who is wholly successful in defending any action in which the director was a party because the director is or was a director of the corporation. A director who is a party to a proceeding because the person is a director may also apply for court-ordered indemnification and advance of expenses under Section 490.854 of the IBCA.

Section 490.853 of the IBCA provides that a corporation may, before final disposition of a proceeding, advance funds to pay for or reimburse the reasonable expenses incurred by a director who is a party to a proceeding because such person is a director if the director delivers the following to the corporation: (1) a written affirmation that the director has met the standard of conduct described above or that the proceeding involved conduct for which liability has been eliminated under the corporation’s articles of incorporation and (2) the director’s written undertaking to repay any funds advanced if the director is not


entitled to mandatory indemnification under Section 490.852 of the IBCA and it is ultimately determined that the director has not met the standard of conduct described above.

Under Section 490.856 of the IBCA, a corporation may indemnify and advance expenses to an officer of the corporation who is a party to a proceeding because such person is an officer, to the same extent as a director. In


addition, if the person is an officer but not a director, further indemnification may be provided by the corporation’s articles of incorporation or bylaws, a resolution of the board of directors or by contract, except liability for (1) a proceeding by or in the right of the corporation other than for reasonable expenses incurred in connection with the proceeding and (2) conduct that constitutes receipt by the officer of a financial benefit to which the officer is not entitled, an intentional infliction of harm on the corporation or the shareholders or an intentional violation of criminal law. Such indemnification is also available to an officer who is also a director if the basis on which the officer is made a party to a proceeding is an act taken or a failure to take action solely as an officer.

Our Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation provide that our directors will not be liable to us or our shareholders for money damages for any action taken, or any failure to take any action, as a director, except liability for (1) the amount of a financial benefit received by a director to which the director is not entitled, (2) an intentional infliction of harm on the CompanyRegistrant or the shareholders, (3) a violation of Section 490.833 of the IBCA or (4) an intentional violation of criminal law.

Our Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation also provide that we indemnify each of our directors or officers for any action taken, or any failure to take any action, as a director or officer except liability for (1) the amount of a financial benefit received by a director to which the director is not entitled, (2) an intentional infliction of harm on the CompanyRegistrant or the shareholders, (3) a violation of Section 490.833 of the IBCA or (4) an intentional violation of criminal law. Additionally, the CompanyRegistrant is required to exercise all of its permissive powers as often as necessary to indemnify and advance expenses to its directors and officers to the fullest extent permitted by law.

Our Bylaws also provide indemnification to our directors on the same terms as the indemnification provided in our Amended and Restated Articles of Incorporation. Our Bylaws also provide for advances of expenses to our directors and officers. The indemnification provisions of our Bylaws are not exclusive of any other right which any person seeking indemnification may have or acquire under any statute, our Amended and Restated of Incorporation or any agreement, vote of stockholders or disinterested directors or otherwise.

Section 490.857 of the IBCA provides that a corporation may purchase and maintain insurance on behalf of a person who is a director or officer of a corporation, or who, while a director or officer of a corporation, serves at the corporation’s request as a director, officer, partner, trustee, employee or agent of another domestic or foreign corporation, partnership, joint venture, trust, employee benefit plan or other entity, against liability asserted against or incurred by that person in that capacity or arising from that person’s status as a director or officer, whether or not the corporation would have the power to indemnify or advance expenses to that person against the same liability under the IBCA. As permitted by and in accordance with Section 490.857 of the IBCA, we maintain insurance coverage for our officers and directors as well as insurance coverage to reimburse us for potential costs for indemnification of directors and officers.

Item 15. Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities

None.


Item 16. Exhibits.

(1)Exhibit
Item Number
Description(i)Incorporated by Reference toDistribution Agreement dated June 11, 2013. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)Filed
Herewith
1(i)(ii)Selling Agreement. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)
(iii)
Amended and Restated Distribution Agreement dated September 9, 2013. as of January 7, 2016 between MEMBERS Life Insurance Company (“MLIC”) and CUNA Brokerage Services, Inc. (“CBSI”)
Incorporated herein by reference to the initial filing of the Registration StatementMEMBERS Horizon Variable Separate Account on Form S-1,N-4, filed November 27, 2013.January 29, 2016 (File No. 333-192603)333-207276)
1(ii)(iv)Amended and Restated Distribution Agreement dated as of January 7, 2016. Incorporated herein by reference to the initial filing of the Registration StatementRegistrant on Form S-1, filed April 6, 2016 (File No. 333-207222)
1(iii)
Amended and Restated Distribution Agreement dated Exhibit A dated September 2018 between MEMBERS Life Insurance Company (“MLIC”) and CUNA Brokerage Services, Inc. (“CBSI”)
Incorporated herein by reference to the pre-effective amendment 1 filing of the MEMBERS Horizon Variable Separate Account on Form N-4 filed January 29, 2016.November 15, 2018 (File No. 333-207276)
333-226804) 
(3)3(i)(i)Incorporated herein by reference to the initial filing of the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed February 6, 2013.2013 (File No. 333-186477)
3(ii)(ii)Incorporated herein by reference to the initial filing of the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed February 6, 2013.2013 (File No. 333-186477)
3(iii)(iii)Incorporated herein by reference to the initial filing of the Registration StatementMEMBERS Horizon Variable Separate Account on Form N-4, filed January 29, 2016.2016 (File No. 333-207276)
 
(4)4(i) (i)X
4(ii) FormsX
4(iii)X
4(iv)X
4(v)X
4(vi)X
5Legal Opinion*
10(i)(a)Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013.2013 (File No. 333-186477)
10(i)(b)(ii)Form of Application. Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013.2013 (File No. 333-186477)
 

Exhibit
Item Number
(iii)DescriptionIncorporated by Reference toForm of Change of Annuitant Endorsement. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)Filed
Herewith
(iv)Form of Roth IRA Endorsement. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)
(v)Form of IRA Endorsement. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)
(vi)Form of Amendment to Application Endorsement. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)
(vii)Bailout Provision Rider. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 2 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed August 2, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)
(5)10(i)(c)
Legality Opinion. (to be filed by amendment)
(10)Material Contracts
(i)Coinsurance Agreement dated October 31, 2012. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)
(ii)Coinsurance Agreement dated January 1, 2013. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)
(a)First Amendment to Coinsurance Agreement dated as of January 1, 2014. 2014Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed April 4, 2014.2014 (File No. 333-192603)333-186477)
(b)10(i)(d)
(c)
Third Amendment to Coinsurance Agreement dated March 24, 2015. (filed herewith)
(d)
Fourth Amendment to Coinsurance Agreement dated August 31, 2015. (filed herewith)
(e)
Fifth Amendment to Coinsurance Agreement dated December 18, 2015. (filed herewith)
(f)
Sixth Amendment to Coinsurance Agreement dated October 20, 2017. (filed herewith)

(iii)Cost Sharing Agreement. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)
(a)Expense Sharing Agreement dated December 31, 2013. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed April 4, 2014. (File No. 333-192603)
(b)Amended and Restated Expense Sharing Agreement dated January 1, 2015. Incorporated herein by reference to the initial filing of the Registration StatementMEMBERS Horizon Variable Separate Account on Form S-1,N-4, filed March 25, 2015.January 29, 2016 (File No. 333-202984).333-207276)
10(i)(e)(iv)Investment Advisory Agreement. Incorporated herein by reference to Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013. (File No. 333-186477)
(a)
2018(b) Amended and Restated Investment Advisory Agreement dated January 1, 2015. Incorporated herein by reference to the initial filing of the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed November 20, 2018 (File No. 333-228484)
10(ii)(a)Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013 (File No. 333-186477)
10(ii)(b)Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed April 4, 2014 (File No. 333-186477)
10(ii)(c)Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed March 25, 2015.2015 (File No. 333-202984).
10(iii)(a)Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013 (File No. 333-186477) 
(v)10(iii)(b)Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed April 4, 2014 (File No. 333-186477) 
10(iii)(c)Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed March 25, 2015 (File No. 333-202984)
10(iv)(a)Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of Pre-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed June 12, 2013.2013 (File No. 333-186477)
10(iv)(b)(a) Incorporated herein by reference to the filing of Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed April 4, 2014.2014 (File No. 333-192603)333-186477)
10(iv)(c)(vi)Incorporated herein by reference to the initial filing of the MLIC Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed March 25, 2015.April 6, 2015 (File No. 333-202984).
 (vii)Amended and Restated Expense Sharing Agreement dated January 1, 2015. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment. No 1 to the Registration Statement on Form N-4, filed March 31, 2017. (File No. 333-207276).

(23)(i)
Consent of Ross D. Hansen. (See exhibit 5)
(ii)Consent of Deloitte & Touche LLP independent registered public accounting firm. [to be updated in amendment filing]
    

Exhibit
Item Number
DescriptionIncorporated by Reference toFiled
Herewith
(24)23(i)Consent of Legal Counsel 
Powers of Attorney. Incorporated herein by reference to Post-Effective Amendment No. 1 to the Registration Statement on Form S-1, filed March 31, 2017. (File No. 333-210491)
William Karls –(filed herewith)
*
23(ii)Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm *
24Powers of Attorney X
101.INS XBRL Instance Document. [to be updated in amendment filing]101
Interactive Date Files 
101.SCH XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema ([to be updated in amendment filing]
101.CAL XBRL Taxonomy Extension Calculation Linkbase [to be updated in amendment filing]
101.DEF XBRL Taxonomy Definition Linkbase [to be updated in amendment filing]
101.LAB XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label Linkbase [to be updated in amendment filing]
101.PRE XBRL Taxonomy Extension Presentation Linkbase [to be updated in amendment filing]*

* to be filed by amendment

Item 17. Undertakings.


(A)  The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes:


(1)  To file, during any period in which offers or sales are being made, a post-effective amendment to this registration statement:

Registration Statement:
 (i) To include any prospectus required by section 10(a)(3) of the Securities Act of 1933;

 (ii) To reflect in the prospectus any facts or events arising after the effective date of the registration statementRegistration Statement (or the most recent post-effective amendment thereof) which, individually or in the aggregate, represent a fundamental change in the information set forth in the registration statement.Registration Statement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any increase or decrease in volume of securities offered (if the total dollar value of securities offered would not exceed that which was registered) and any deviation from the low or high end of the estimated maximum offering range may be reflected in the form of prospectus filed with the Commission pursuant to Rule 424(b) if, in the aggregate, the changes in volume and price represent no more than a 20% change in the maximum aggregate offering price set forth in the “Calculation of Registration Fee” table in the effective registration statement;
Registration Statement;
 (iii) To include any material information with respect to the plan of distribution not previously disclosed in the registration statementRegistration Statement or any material change to such information in the registration statement.Registration Statement.

(2) That, for the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, each such post-effective amendment shall be deemed to be a new registration statementRegistration Statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

(3) To remove from registration by means of a post-effective amendment any of the securities being registered which remain unsold at the termination of the offering.

(4) That, for the purpose of determining liability under the Securities Act of 1933 to any purchaser, each prospectus filed pursuant to Rule 424(b) as part of a registration statementRegistration Statement relating to an offering, other than registration statementsRegistration Statements relying on Rule 430B or other than prospectuses filed in reliance on Rule 430A, shall be deemed to be part of and included in the registration statementRegistration Statement as of the date it is first used after effectiveness. Provided, however, that no statement made in a registration statementRegistration Statement or prospectus that is part of the registration statementRegistration Statement or made in a document incorporated or deemed incorporated by reference into the registration statementRegistration Statement or prospectus that is part of the registration statementRegistration Statement will, as to a purchaser with a time of contract of sale prior to such first use, supersede or modify any statement that was made in the registration statementRegistration Statement or prospectus that was part of the registration statementRegistration Statement or made in any such document immediately prior to such date of first use.

(5) That, for the purpose of determining liability of the registrantRegistrant under the Securities Act of 1933 to any purchaser in the initial distribution of the securities, the undersigned registrantRegistrant undertakes that in a primary offering of securities of the undersigned registrantRegistrant pursuant to this registration statement,Registration Statement, regardless of the underwriting method used to sell the securities to the purchaser, if the securities are offered or sold to such purchaser by means of any of the following communications, the undersigned registrantRegistrant will be a seller to the purchaser and will be considered to offer or sell such securities to such purchaser:

 (i) Any preliminary prospectus or prospectus of the undersigned registrantRegistrant relating to the offering required to be filed pursuant to Rule 424;
 
 (ii) Any free writing prospectus relating to the offering prepared by or on behalf of the undersigned registrantRegistrant or used or referred to by the undersigned registrant;Registrant;

 (iii) The portion of any other free writing prospectus relating to the offering containing material information about the undersigned registrantRegistrant or its securities provided by or on behalf of the undersigned registrant;Registrant; and
 
 (iv) Any other communication that is an offer in the offering made by the undersigned registrantRegistrant to the purchaser.

(B) Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933 may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the Registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the Registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in that Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the Registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the


Registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.


SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, MEMBERS Life Insurance Company has duly caused this registration statementRegistration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, duly authorized, in the City of Madison, and State of Wisconsin on the 20as of this 19 day of December, 2017.2018.

 MEMBERS Life Insurance Company
   
 By: /s//s/ David L. Sweitzer
   
   David L. Sweitzer, President

*Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, this registration statementRegistration Statement has been signed below by the following persons on March 31, 2017 in the capacities indicated.

**Pursuant to the requirementsand as of the Securities Act of 1933, the registration statement has been signed below by the following person on December 20, 2017 in the capacitiesdates indicated.


Name Title Date
*/s/ David L. Sweitzer*President and Director
December 19, 2018
David L. Sweitzer(Principal Executive
Officer)
/s/ Brian J. Borakove*Treasurer (Principal
December 19, 2018
Brian J. BorakoveFinancial & Accounting
Officer)
/s/ Michael F. Anderson*DirectorDecember 19, 2018
Michael F. Anderson    
  President/
/s/ Michael T. Defnet*Director December 20, 201719, 2018
David L. Sweitzer

*
Michael T. Defnet    
  Treasurer
/s/ William A. Karls*Director December 20, 201719, 2018
Brian J. Borakove

*
William A. Karls    
  DirectorDecember 20, 2017
Michael F. Anderson

*
   
/s/ Steven R. Suleski* Director December 20, 201719, 2018
Michael T. Defnet

**
    
DirectorDecember 20, 2017
William A. Karls

*
DirectorDecember 20, 2017
Steven R. Suleski    
     
*By:__/s/ Ross D. Hanson                                                                                                        
* By:  /s/Ross D. Hansen
          Ross D. Hansen
 As Attorney-in-Fact
pursuant to
powers of attorney
  

Exhibit List

10(ii)(b) Second Amendment* Pursuant to Coinsurance Agreement dated November 18, 2014.

10(ii)(c) Third Amendment to Coinsurance Agreement dated March 24, 2015.

10(ii)(d) Fourth Amendment to Coinsurance Agreement dated August 31, 2015.

10(ii)(e) Fifth Amendment to Coinsurance Agreement dated December 18, 2015.

10(ii)(f) Sixth Amendment to Coinsurance Agreement dated October 20, 2017.

(24) Power of Attorney - William Karlsdated December 19, 2018, herewith Powers of Attorney are filed as exhibits to this initial filing.